SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 1 of 465

of 4658

FOREWORD
Well pressure control is the most critical consideration in the planning and performing of any well
servicing operation.
The awareness of well pressure control in the prevention of injury to personnel, harm to the
environment and potential loss of facilities must be fully appreciated by planning engineers and
well site personnel. This appreciation must include personnel in having a sound knowledge of
legislative requirements, completion equipment, pressure control equipment and operating
practices and procedures.
‘Wireline and ‘Slickline’ are commonly used terms to describe servicing operations on oil and gas
wells and which have different interpretations. However, in general, ‘Wireline’ describes well
service operations on all wells and can be conducted with ‘Electric Cable’, ‘Braided Line’ or a single
strand ‘Slickline’. The term has always been ‘Generic’ and has been commonly applied to all three
methods of conveying toolstrings down a well for the purpose of well servicing. ‘Well Intervention’
is a term used to describe ‘through-tree’ live well operations during which the well pressure is
contained with pressure control equipment. Well Interventions are also conducted by coiled
tubing or snubbing methods.
This S-D Consulting Course is designed to provide essential knowledge to delegates participating in
Wireline (Slickline) Well Intervention with Pressure Control.
Well pressure control equipment used by wireline, is so termed as it must control well pressure
during live well intervention operations. As most well servicing is now conducted by live well
intervention methods, this equipment is fully addressed as part of the course. This manual is an
aid to understanding, but as with all manuals, it is impossible to keep them completely current
with modern equipment or practices. Equipment and practices may be discussed on the course
that are not contained in the manual.
To have an understanding of ‘Wireline’ well operations conducted by live well intervention
methods and the associated pressure control equipment, it is first necessary to have, or obtain, a
basic knowledge of completion designs, basic drilling terms, completion equipment, practices, well
service methods and their applications. An overview of these is given in the early sections of the
manual.
Training in ‘Wireline’ well intervention well pressure control is an essential part in ensuring the
competence of personnel involved in the planning and carrying out of live well servicing
operations. The S-D Consulting Oilfield Services WIRELINE, WELL INTERVENTION WELL CONTROL
TRAINING COURSE and course materials intend to provide this essential knowledge in order to
help delegates improve their knowledge levels by obtaining a better understanding of equipment,
practices and procedures for Wireline. S-D Consulting (Scotland) Ltd accepts no responsibility for
any mistakes or inaccuracies contained within this manual.
S-D Consulting (Scotland) Ltd hope that you enjoy your course and find it suitably informative.
Your constructive feedback is always welcome.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 2 of 465

of 4658
AIMS AND OBJECTIVES
The overall aim of the course is to provide a delegate with the theoretical skills essential in
applying well pressure control during well intervention and servicing operations with the objective
of improving the individuals’ knowledge and level of competence.

AIMS
The individual aims are to:
 Improve the delegate's competence in well intervention pressure control.
 Provide an appreciation of completion types, equipment, equipment functions and
practices as recognised by the industry.
 Establish an increased awareness of well intervention/servicing well control
equipment, methods and practices.
 Furnish a student with knowledge of pertinent legislative guidelines, standards and
industry best practice.
 Provide an awareness of how to discern well pressure control problems and apply
solutions.
 Learn the rudiments of Wireline Fishing Techniques

OBJECTIVES
The individual objectives are to assist the delegate to:
 Identify various types of completions and their impact on well interventions.
 List the well parameters necessary to conduct a safe well intervention.
 Identify well pressure control problems from available well data i.e. pressure,
volume and flow characteristics.
 Identify possible problems and implement solutions to various well pressure
control problems.
 Understand pertinent legislative guidelines, standards and best practices.
 Determine if pressure control equipment is fit for purpose.
 Plan a Well Intervention Fishing Operation
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 3 of 465

of 4658
1 ORIGINS OF OIL AND GAS .............................................................................................................................3
1.1 INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................................................................................12
1.2 COMMERCIAL OIL FIELDS.......................................................................................................................................................13
1.3 RESERVOIR DRIVE MECHANISMS..........................................................................................................................................13
1.3.1 Internal Drive.....................................................................................................................................................................13
1.3.2 Depletion Drive..................................................................................................................................................................13
1.3.3 External Gas Cap ...............................................................................................................................................................14
1.3.4 Water Drive .......................................................................................................................................................................14
1.3.5 External Drive ....................................................................................................................................................................14
1.4 RESERVOIR DRIVE MECHANISMS..........................................................................................................................................15
1.4.1 Introduction .......................................................................................................................................................................15
1.5 DRILLING AND CASING...........................................................................................................................................................17
1.6 THE WELLHEAD ......................................................................................................................................................................19
1.7 THE WELLHEAD ......................................................................................................................................................................20
1.7.1 Developing a Discovery.................................................................................................................................................22
2 COMPLETION EQUIPMENT ................................................................................Error! Bookmark not defined.
2.1 COMPLETION SCEMATIC ......................................................................................................... ERROR! BOOKMARK NOT DEFIN ED.
2.1.1 Wireline Re-entry Guide..................................................................................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
2.1.2 Bell Guide...........................................................................................................................................................................29
2.2 Tubing Protection Joint .....................................................................................................................................................30
2.3 Wireline Landing Nipples ..................................................................................................................................................30
2.3.1 No-Go Landing Nipple......................................................................................................................................................30
2.3.2. Selective .............................................................................................................................................................................30
2.4 Typical Wireline Landing Nipples .....................................................................................................................................31
2.4 Perforated Joint .................................................................................................................................................................32
2.5 Packers ...............................................................................................................................................................................32
2.5 Example Packer Installations............................................................................................................................................34
2.6 Retrievable Packers ............................................................................................................ Error! Bookmark not defined.
2.7 Permanent Packers ............................................................................................................ Error! Bookmark not defined.
2.5.1 Setting Methods ................................................................................................................................................................37
2.5.2 Travel Joints ........................................................................................................................ Error! Bookmark not defined.
2.5.3 Permanent Packer Accessories.........................................................................................................................................39
2.9 Permanent Packer Seal Assemblies .................................................................................................................................40
2.10 Polished Bore Receptacle..................................................................................................................................................41
2.11 ELTSR...................................................................................................................................................................................42
2.6 SLIDING SIDE DOORS.........................................................................................................................................................43
2.7 FLOW COUPLINGS .............................................................................................................................................................43
2.8 BLAST JOINTS.....................................................................................................................................................................44
2.12 Sliding Side Door (Picture) ................................................................................................................................................45
2.9 SIDE POCKET MANDRELS ..................................................................................................................................................39
2.9 Permanent Packer Seal Assemblies .................................................................................................................................46
2.9.1 Gas Lift Valves ...................................................................................................................................................................46
2.9.2 Dummy Valves...................................................................................................................................................................46
2.9.3 Chemical Injection Valves .................................................................................................................................................46
2.9.4 Circulating Valves ..............................................................................................................................................................47
2.9.5 Differential Dump Kill Valves ............................................................................................................................................47
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 4 of 465

of 4658
2.9.6 Equalising Dummy Valves.................................................................................................................................................47
2.13 Side Pocket Mandrel (Picture) ..........................................................................................................................................48
2.14 SPM Valves (Picture) .........................................................................................................................................................49
2.10 SUB-SURFACE SAFETY VALVES .........................................................................................................................................50
2.10.1 Types of sub-Surface Safety Valves ..................................................................................................................................51
2.15 SSSV Applications (Chart) .................................................................................................................................................52
2.16 Downhole Safety Valve (Picture)......................................................................................................................................53
2.10.2 SSCSSV................................................................................................................................................................................54
2.10.3 SCSSV..................................................................................................................................................................................55
2.18 Wireline Retrievable SCSSV (Picture) ...............................................................................................................................58
2.19 TRSV ...................................................................................................................................................................................60
2.10.4 Safety Valve Leak Testing .................................................................................................................................................61
2.10.5 Annulus Safety Valves .......................................................................................................................................................62
2.20 Annulus Safety Valve System (Picture) ............................................................................................................................63
2.10.6 Surface Control Manifolds ................................................................................................................................................64
2.10.7 Control Lines ......................................................................................................................................................................65
2.10.8 Tubing ................................................................................................................................................................................65
2.10.9 Tubin Hangers ...................................................................................................................................................................66
2.21 Cameron 'F' Tubing Hanger (Picture)...............................................................................................................................69
2.22 Cameron Single Ram Tubing Head (Picture) ...................................................................................................................70
2.23 Tubing Hanger Spool (Picture) ..........................................................................................................................................71
2.11.1 WELLHEADS .......................................................................................................................................................................72
2.24 Typical Compact Wellhead ...............................................................................................................................................73
3 CHRISTMAS (XMAS) TREE .................................................................................................................................................75
3.1 XMAS TREE (PICTURE) .................................................................................................................................................................76
3.2 COMPOSITE XMAS T REE (PICTURE) ...............................................................................................................................................77
3.1 PRECAUTIONS WHEN OPERATING TREE VALVES .................................................................................................................78
4 SAFETY ONSHORE/OFFSHORE .....................................................................................................................81
4.1 ZONE SYSTEM .........................................................................................................................................................................81
4.2 CONTROL OF SUBSTANCES HAZARDOUS TO HEALTH (COSHH)...........................................................................................82
4.2.1 Ill Health and Hazardous Substances at Work ................................................................................................................82
4.2.2 COSHH Regulations ...........................................................................................................................................................82
4.2.3 Hazard and Risk.................................................................................................................................................................82
4.2.4 Hazard................................................................................................................................................................................82
4.2.5 Risk .....................................................................................................................................................................................83
4.2.6 Complying with COSHH.....................................................................................................................................................83
4.2.7 Assessment ........................................................................................................................................................................83
4.2.8 Who Carries Out the Assessment .....................................................................................................................................84
4.2.9 Recording and Reviewing the Assessment .....................................................................................................................84
4.3 H2S GAS ..................................................................................................................................................................................84
4.3.1 Dangers of H2S Gas...........................................................................................................................................................84
4.3.2 Where H2S May be Found ................................................................................................................................................85
4.3.3 Precautions against H2S ...................................................................................................................................................85
4.3.1 Control................................................................................................................................................................................85
4.4 MANUAL HANDLING ..............................................................................................................................................................86
4.4.1 Lifting Techniques .............................................................................................................................................................86
4.5 THE PERMIT TO WORK SYSTEM.............................................................................................................................................90
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 5 of 465

of 4658
4.5.1 Safe Working System ........................................................................................................................................................90
4.5.2 Overview of the Permit To Work System.........................................................................................................................90
4.5.3 Permits To Work ................................................................................................................................................................91
4.5.4 Supplementary Certificate................................................................................................................................................96
4.5.5 Definition of Personnel and Responsibilities ...................................................................................................................98
4.5.6 Procedure for Completing a Permit to Work Form .......................................................................................................100
4.6 GENERAL SAFETY..................................................................................................................................................................101
4.6.1 Safe Working Procedures/Practices ...............................................................................................................................101
4.7 WIRELINE SAFETY .................................................................................................................................................................102
4.8 WIRELINE OPERATIONAL GUIDELINES................................................................................................................................105
4.8.1 Surface Operations..........................................................................................................................................................105
4.8.2 Equipment Location and Layout.....................................................................................................................................105
4.8.3 Rig-up/Rig-down Considerations ...................................................................................................................................106
4.8.4 Pressure Testing and Pressurising Lubricators ..............................................................................................................107
4.8.5 Pressure Testing Wireline BOPs......................................................................................................................................109
4.8.6 De-pressurising Lubricators ............................................................................................................................................109
5 WHAT IS WIRELINE? ................................................................................................................................. 112
5.1 INTRODUCTION ....................................................................................................................................................................112
5.2 BENDING STRESSES..............................................................................................................................................................115
5.3 RE-SPOOLING .......................................................................................................................................................................116
5.4 HANDLING AND STORAGE ...................................................................................................................................................116
5.5 GENERAL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS.........................................................................................................................................117
5.6 WIRELINE INFORMATION (COURTESY OF BRIDON WIRE) .........................................................................................................120
5.6.1 Bridon Wireline................................................................................................................................................................120
5.6.2 API 9a and UHT ...............................................................................................................................................................120
5.6.3 304 Type (18%Cr. 9%Ni)..................................................................................................................................................120
5.6.4 316 Type (17.5% Cr. 11.5% Ni. 2.5% Mo) ......................................................................................................................120
5.6.5 Supa 60 (20% Cr. 25% Ni. 4.5%Mo) ...............................................................................................................................120
5.6.6 Supa 70 (20%Cr. 17% Ni. 6.5% Mo) ...............................................................................................................................120
5.6.7 Supa 75(20%Cr. 25% Ni. 6.5% Mo) ................................................................................................................................121
5.7 BRIDON SERVICE STRANDS..................................................................................................................................................121
5.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE...........................................................................................................................................................121
5.9 WIRELINE IN SERVICE ...........................................................................................................................................................122
5.9.1 Wireline Termination ......................................................................................................................................................122
5.10 JARRING AND THE MARTIN DECKER TYPE WEIGHT INDICATING SYSTEM ........................................................................123
5.11 TESTING WIRELINE IN SERVICE............................................................................................................................................123
5.12 WIRELINE FAILURE ...............................................................................................................................................................124
5.12.1 Hydrogen Embrittlement ................................................................................................................................................124
5.12.2 Age Hardening.................................................................................................................................................................124
5.12.3 Fatigue .............................................................................................................................................................................124
5.12.4 Corrosion..........................................................................................................................................................................124
5.12.5 Corrosion Fatigue ............................................................................................................................................................124
5.12.6 Stress Corrosion ...............................................................................................................................................................124
5.12.7 Tensile Overload ..............................................................................................................................................................125
5.12.8 Snarl .................................................................................................................................................................................125
5.12.9 Mechanical Damage .......................................................................................................................................................125
5.12.10 Hydrodynamic Deformation ..........................................................................................................................................125
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 6 of 465

of 4658
5.13 WIRELINE TORSION TESTER..............................................................................................................................................126
5.13.1 Objective ..........................................................................................................................................................................126
5.13.2 Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................126
5.13.3 Slickline Operation and Maintenance ............................................................................................................................128
5.13.4 Torsion Test – Specimen Configuration .........................................................................................................................130
5.14 WIRELINE TEST ANALYSIS ...............................................................................................................................................131
5.14.1 Acceptance ......................................................................................................................................................................131
5.14.2 Torsion Fracture Analysis................................................................................................................................................131
5.14.3 Fracture Classification.....................................................................................................................................................131
5.14.4 General Guidance Notes .................................................................................................................................................133
5.14.5 Wrap Testing ...................................................................................................................................................................134
5.15 WIRELINE FAILURES IN SURVICE ....................................................................................................................................135
5.14.6 Braided Line ......................................................................................................................................................................136
5.16 General Safety Precautions .............................................................................................................................................138
6 WIRELINE SURFACE EQUIPMENT .............................................................................................................. 143
6.1 INTRODUCTION ....................................................................................................................................................................143
6.1.1 WIRELINE L UBRICATORS & ACCESSORIES ...................................................................................................................................143
6.1 Wireline Rig-up (Picture)................................................................................................................................... ......... 144
6.2 WELLHEAD ADAPTER...........................................................................................................................................................145
6.3 PUMP-IN TEE ........................................................................................................................................................................146
6.3 PUMP-IN TEE (PICTURE) .............................................................................................................................................................146
6.4 WIRELINE VALVE/BLOW OUT PREVENTER (BOP) ...............................................................................................................147
6.4.1 Pressure Testing of the Wireline Valve (BOP)................................................................................................................150
6.5 LUBRICATORS .......................................................................................................................................................................155
6.6 WIRELINE VALVE R AM CONFIGURATION (PICTURE) .......................................................................................................................154
6.7 LUBRICATOR SECTIONS (PICTURE) ...............................................................................................................................................156
6.6 OTIS TYPE QUICK UNIONS....................................................................................................................................................160
6..9 'O' Ring Seals (Picture)........................................................................................................................................................161
6.10 OTIS & BOWEN QUICK UNIONS ..........................................................................................................................................162
6.4.2 DIFFERENCE O TIS VS BOWEN Q UICK U NIONS .............................................................................................................................163
6.13 LUBRICATOR MAINTENANCE GUIDE (PICTURE)..............................................................................................................................166
6.14 LUBRICATOR MAINTENANCE GUIDE (PICTURE)..............................................................................................................................169
6.7 INJECTION SUB/LIQUID CHAMBER......................................................................................................................................170
6.8 STUFFING BOX......................................................................................................................................................................171
6.9 HYDRAULIC PACKING NUT...................................................................................................................................................174
7 WIRELINE UNIT .....................................................................................................................................................................179
7.1 INTRODUCTION ....................................................................................................................................................................179
7.2 HAY PULLEY ..........................................................................................................................................................................182
7.3 WEIGHT INDICATOR.............................................................................................................................................................183
7.4 MEASURING WHEEL.............................................................................................................................................................185
7.5 CAUSES FOR DEPTH DESCREPANCIES .................................................................................................................................188
7.5.1 Wireline Angle Correction Factors .................................................................................................................................189
7.6 WIRELINE CLAMP .................................................................................................................................................................192
8 POWER PACKS ......................................................................................................................................... 195
8.1 ELECTRICAL ...........................................................................................................................................................................195
8.1.1 Operation and Maintenance ..........................................................................................................................................196
8.2 DIESEL POWER PACKS ..........................................................................................................................................................197
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 7 of 465

of 4658
8.2.1 Fault Finding Chart ..........................................................................................................................................................198
9 WELL CONTROL AND BOP PUMPS .................................................................................................................................202
9.1 SINGLE WELL CONTROL PANEL............................................................................................................................................202
9.2 OPERATING PROCEDURE.....................................................................................................................................................203
9.2.1 Pre-Operational Function Checks ...................................................................................................................................203
9.2.2 Routine Operating Procedures .......................................................................................................................................204
10 GENERAL TOOLSTRING .................................................................................................................................................................209
10.1 INTRODUCTION ....................................................................................................................................................................209
10.2 PRIMARY EQUIPMENT .........................................................................................................................................................210
10.2.1 Rope Sockets ....................................................................................................................................................................210
10.2.2 Wireline Stem ..................................................................................................................................................................211
10.2.3 Lead Stem ........................................................................................................................................................................213
10.2.4 Roller Stem.......................................................................................................................................................................214
10.2.5 Jars ...................................................................................................................................................................................215
10.3 TOOLSTRING ACCESSORIES .................................................................................................................................................222
10.3.1 Quick Lock System (Petroline/Weatherford) .................................................................................................................222
10.3.2 Trinity Quick Lock System ...............................................................................................................................................223
10.3.3 Knuckle Joints ..................................................................................................................................................................224
11 BASIC PULLING TOOLS.............................................................................................................................. 227
11.1 FISHING NECK IDENTIFICATION (EXTERNAL/INTERNAL/REACH) ......................................................................................227
11.1.1 Selection of Shear Direction............................................................................................................................................228
11.2 EXTERNAL NECK PULLING TOOLS........................................................................................................................................230
11.2.1 Otis ‘S’ Series Pulling Tools (Shear down to release) ....................................................................................................230
11.2.2 Otis ‘R’ Series Pulling Tools (Shear up to release) .........................................................................................................231
11.2.3 Camco ‘JD’ Series Pulling Tools (Jar down to release) ..................................................................................................234
11.2.4 ‘JU’ Series Pulling Tools (Jar up to release)....................................................................................................................236
11.2.5 Otis ‘GS’ Pulling Tool .......................................................................................................................................................239
11.2.6 Otis ‘GR’ Pulling Tool.......................................................................................................................................................244
11.2.7 Otis ‘GU’ Adapter ............................................................................................................................................................246
11.2.8 Shear Stock Sizes/Shear Pins ..........................................................................................................................................247
12 BASIC WIRELINE TOOLS ............................................................................................................................ 250
12.1 GAUGE CUTTER ....................................................................................................................................................................250
12.2 LEAD IMPRESSION BLOCK....................................................................................................................................................251
12.3 BLIND BOX ............................................................................................................................................................................252
12.4 TUBING END LOCATOR ........................................................................................................................................................253
13 LOCK MANDRELS ..................................................................................................................................... 257
13.1 INTRODUCTION .........................................................................................................................................................................257
13.1.1 General Descriptions.......................................................................................................................................................257
13.1.2 ‘D’ Collar Locks ................................................................................................................................................................262
13.3 BAKER .....................................................................................................................................................................................267
13.3.1 model ‘A’ Running Tool...................................................................................................................................................267
13.3.2 ‘Sur-Set’ Lock Mandrels ..................................................................................................................................................268
13.3.3 ‘Model ‘V’ ‘H’ and‘M’ Bypass Blanking Plug..................................................................................................................270
13.3.4 Model ‘MH’ Positioning Tool ..........................................................................................................................................272
13.3.5 Equalising Prong for Model ‘M’ Single Trip Bypass Blanking Plug...............................................................................273
13.4 CAMCO .................................................................................................................................................................................274
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 8 of 465

of 4658
13.4.1 Type ‘Z-6’ Running Tool ..................................................................................................................................................274
13.4.2 Type ‘PRS’ Pulling Tool ....................................................................................................................................................275
13.4.3 Type ‘C’ Series Lock Mandrel ..........................................................................................................................................276
13.4.4 Type ‘HPC-R’ Lock Mandrel.............................................................................................................................................277
13.4.5 Type ‘DB’ Series Lock Mandrel .......................................................................................................................................278
13.4.6 Blanking Plug...................................................................................................................................................................279
13.5 HALLIBURTON/OTIS .............................................................................................................................................................280
13.5.1 ‘X’ and ‘R’ Running Tool ..................................................................................................................................................280
13.5.2 ‘RXN’ Running Tool..........................................................................................................................................................281
13.5.3 Type ‘X’ Lock Mandrel.....................................................................................................................................................282
13.5.4 Type ‘XN’ Lock Mandrel ..................................................................................................................................................283
13.5.5 Type ‘R’ and ‘RN’ Lock Mandrel .....................................................................................................................................284
13.5.6 Type ‘RPT’ Lock Mandrel.................................................................................................................................................284
13.5.7 Type ‘X’ and ‘R’ Plug Chokes ...........................................................................................................................................286
13.5.8 Type ‘PX’ and ‘RR’ Plug Chokes ......................................................................................................................................287
13.6 PETROLINE ............................................................................................................................................................................288
13.6.1 ‘QX’ Running Tool............................................................................................................................................................288
13.6.2 Type ‘DU’ Pulling Tool .....................................................................................................................................................289
13.6.3 ‘QX’ Lock Mandrel ...........................................................................................................................................................290
13.6.4 ‘PT’ Equalising Assembly.................................................................................................................................................291
13.6.5 ‘Pump Open’ Plug ............................................................................................................................................................292
13.7 ASSEMBLY/DISASSEMBLY PROCEDURES ............................................................................................................................293
13.7.1 Safety ...............................................................................................................................................................................293
13.7.2 Assembly Procedure........................................................................................................................................................293
13.7.3 Disassembly Procedure ...................................................................................................................................................294
13.7.4 Handling...........................................................................................................................................................................294
13.8 RUNNING/PULLING PROCEDURES ......................................................................................................................................295
13.8.1 Safety ...............................................................................................................................................................................295
13.8.2 Selective Plug Running Procedure..................................................................................................................................295
13.8.3 Non-Selective Plug Running Procedure..........................................................................................................................296
13.8.4 Single Trip Pulling Procedure..........................................................................................................................................297
13.8.5 Two Trip Pulling Procedure.............................................................................................................................................298
14 KICKOVER TOOLS............................................................................................................................................................................302
14.1 INTRODUCTION ....................................................................................................................................................................302
14.2 CAMCO .................................................................................................................................................................................302
14.2.1 Type ‘OK’ Kickover Tool...................................................................................................................................................302
14.2.2 Type ‘OM’ Kickover Tool .................................................................................................................................................303
14.2.3 Camco Kickover Tool Operation .....................................................................................................................................303
14.3 TELEDYNE MERLA.................................................................................................................................................................305
14.3.1 ‘TMP’ Kickover Tool.........................................................................................................................................................305
14.3.2 ‘TP’ Kickover Tool ............................................................................................................................................................305
14.3.3 Merla Kickover Tool Operation.......................................................................................................................................306
14.4 ASSEMBLY/DISASSEMBLY PROCEDURES ............................................................................................................................308
14.4.1 Safety ...............................................................................................................................................................................308
14.4.2 Assembly Procedure........................................................................................................................................................308
14.4.3 Disassembly Procedure ...................................................................................................................................................309
14.4.4 Handling...........................................................................................................................................................................309
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 9 of 465

of 4658
14.5 RUNNING/PULLING PROCEDURES ......................................................................................................................................310
14.5.1 Safety ...............................................................................................................................................................................310
14.5.2 Running Procedure..........................................................................................................................................................310
14.5.3 Pulling Procedure ............................................................................................................................................................312
14.6 LATCHES................................................................................................................................................................................313
14.6.1 ‘BK’ Latch .........................................................................................................................................................................313
14.6.2 ‘BEK-2’ Latch....................................................................................................................................................................313
14.6.3 ‘RK’ Latch .........................................................................................................................................................................313
14.6.4 ‘RK-1’ Latch......................................................................................................................................................................313
14.6.5 ‘RKP’ Latch .......................................................................................................................................................................314
14.6.6 ‘R’ Latch ...........................................................................................................................................................................314
14.6.7 ‘RA’ Latch .........................................................................................................................................................................314
14.6.8 ‘M’ Latch ..........................................................................................................................................................................314
14.6.9 ‘T2’ Latch..........................................................................................................................................................................314
15 SHIFTING/POSITIONING TOOLS................................................................................................................. 319
15.1 SAFETY ..................................................................................................................................................................................319
15.2 BAKER ...................................................................................................................................................................................319
15.2.1 ‘D2’ Shifting Tool .............................................................................................................................................................319
15.3 CAMCO .................................................................................................................................................................................321
15.4 HALLIBURTON/OTIS .............................................................................................................................................................321
15.4.1 ‘B’ Positioning Tool..........................................................................................................................................................321
15.4.2 ‘BO’ Selective Positioning Tool .......................................................................................................................................324
16 WIRELINE FISHING ................................................................................................................................... 328
16.1 INTRODUCTION .........................................................................................................................................................................328
16.2 PREVENTION .............................................................................................................................................................................329
16.2.1 Preventing the wire break ..............................................................................................................................................329
16.2.2 Counter wheel assembly .................................................................................................................................................331
16.2.3 Pressure Wheels ..............................................................................................................................................................335
16.2.4 Hay Pulleys.......................................................................................................................................................................336
16.2.5 Stuffing Boxes/Packings..................................................................................................................................................338
16.2.6 Weight Indicators ............................................................................................................................................................340
16.2.7 Re-Charging Procedure ...................................................................................................................................................341
16.2.8 Wireline Angle Correction Factors .................................................................................................................................342
16.2.9 Safety ...............................................................................................................................................................................346
16.2.10 Areas to consider that may present added problems...................................................................................................346
16.3 GENERAL NO TES ........................................................................................................................................................................347
17 Fishing wire ............................................................................................................................................. 350
17.1 WIRE BROKEN AT SURFACE ..........................................................................................................................................................350
17.1.1 Wire Remains Visible.......................................................................................................................................................350
17.2 CASE I - WIRE BROKEN DOWNHOLE .............................................................................................................................................352
17.2.1 Amount Wireline Will Fall Back per 1,000 ft .................................................................................................................354
17.3 TOOLSTRING EQUIPMENT ...........................................................................................................................................................357
17.3.1 Stem .................................................................................................................................................................................357
17.3.2 Jars ...................................................................................................................................................................................360
17.3.3 Jar Up to Shear Pulling Tool............................................................................................................................................361
17.3.4 Below the Jar Up to Shear Pulling Tool ..........................................................................................................................362
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 10 of 465

of 4658
17.3.5 Wire Finder ......................................................................................................................................................................362
17.3.6 Wireline Grab ..................................................................................................................................................................363
17.4 CASE II - WIRE BROKEN DOW NHOLE ............................................................................................................................................364
17.5 BLIND BOX ...............................................................................................................................................................................365
17.6 CUTTER B AR .............................................................................................................................................................................367
17.7 CASE III - BLOWN UP THE HO LE ..................................................................................................................................................370
17.8 CONCLUSION........................................................................................................................................................................373
18 wireline fishing tools, equipment and operation procedures ...................................................................... 376
18.1 WIRE FINDER............................................................................................................................................................................377
18.1.1 Bell Shaped Finder ...........................................................................................................................................................377
18.1.2 Bowen Finder/Retriever ..................................................................................................................................................377
18.1.3 Scratcher Finder ..............................................................................................................................................................377
18.1.4 Running a Wire Finder ....................................................................................................................................................379
18.1.5 Bowen Wirefinder ...........................................................................................................................................................380
18.1.6 Wire Scratcher.................................................................................................................................................................380
18.1.7 Wire Finder Operating Technique ..................................................................................................................................382
18.2 WIRELINE GRABS..................................................................................................................................................................384
18.2.1 Preparing the Grab..........................................................................................................................................................384
18.2.2 Running the Grab ............................................................................................................................................................384
18.2.3 Running a Wireline Grab/Spear .....................................................................................................................................385
18.3 FISHING CLAMP .........................................................................................................................................................................386
18.4 GO-DEVIL ................................................................................................................................................................................387
18.5 KINLEY SNEPPER .......................................................................................................................................................................389
18.6 FLOPETRO L CABLE CUTTER .........................................................................................................................................................392
18.6.1 Running a Cutter Bar.......................................................................................................................................................394
18.6.2 Running an Interface Bar ................................................................................................................................................394
18.6.3 Centraliser Design ...........................................................................................................................................................395
18.7 RETRIEVAL OF FISH ....................................................................................................................................................................396
18.8 ‘JUC’ & ‘R’ SERIES PULLING TOOLS ...............................................................................................................................................398
18.8.1 Camco ‘JUC’ Series Pulling Tools ....................................................................................................................................398
18.8.2 Otis ‘R’ Series Pulling Tools .............................................................................................................................................402
18.9 CENTRE SPEAR ..........................................................................................................................................................................405
18.9.1 Stripping Wire..................................................................................................................................................................406
18.10 BOXING OFF WIRE ....................................................................................................................................................................408
18.11 HOW TO CALCULATE OPTIMUM BLIND BOX SIZE ..............................................................................................................................409
18.11.1 Blind Box Calculation Example .......................................................................................................................................409
18.11.2 Retrieving a Stuck Toolstring ..........................................................................................................................................410
18.11.3 Fishing for KNOWN/unidentified objects.......................................................................................................................410
18.12 FISHING FOR TOOLS ....................................................................................................................................................................411
18.12.1 Fishing for Tools with a Fishneck....................................................................................................................................411
18.12.2 Fishing For Tools without a Fishneck .............................................................................................................................411
18.13 LEAD IMPRESSION BLOCK....................................................................................................................................................412
18.13.1 Running Lead Impression Block (LIB) .............................................................................................................................414
18.14 MAGNET ..................................................................................................................................................................................415
18.15 PCE ALLIGATO R GRAB ...............................................................................................................................................................416
18.16 OVERSHOTS ..............................................................................................................................................................................418
18.16.1 ‘O’ Bannon Overshot .......................................................................................................................................................418
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 11 of 465

of 4658
18.17 FLOPETRO L RELEASING OVERSHO T ..............................................................................................................................................420
18.18 PETROLINE HEAVY DUTY PULLING TOOL .......................................................................................................................................422
18.19 PCE BULLDOG SPEARS ...............................................................................................................................................................424
18.19.1 Conventional Spear .........................................................................................................................................................424
18.20 RELEASABLE COLLET TYPE BULLDOG SPEAR ..................................................................................................................................426
18.21 FISHING PROCEDURE WHEN WIRELINE IS PULLED OUT OF ROPE SOCKET .......................................................................428
19 BRAIDED LINE EQUIPMENT .................................................................................................................................................429
19.1 GREASE INJECTION SYSTEM.................................................................................................................................................429
19.2 GREASE INJECTION HEAD ....................................................................................................................................................429
19.2.1 Grease Seal ......................................................................................................................................................................429
19.2.2 Construction ....................................................................................................................................................................431
19.2.3 Flow Tubes .......................................................................................................................................................................434
19.3 GREASE INJECTION PUMP ...................................................................................................................................................436
19.3.1 Grease System .................................................................................................................................................................436
19.3.2 Pneumatics ......................................................................................................................................................................437
19.4 DUAL BOPS............................................................................................................................................................................438
19.5 SAFETY CHECK UNION..........................................................................................................................................................439
19.6 BRAIDED LINE ROPE SOCKET ...............................................................................................................................................440
19.6.1 Overload Release Rope Socket .......................................................................................................................................440
19.6.2 Plain Rope Socket ............................................................................................................................................................440
19.6.3 Releasable Rope Socket ..................................................................................................................................................440
19.7 FISHING CONDUCTOR LINE/BRAIDED LINE W/BROKEN STRAND ......................................................................................443
19.8 BRAIDED LINE FISHING.........................................................................................................................................................445
20 bailers ..............................................................................................................Error! Bookmark not defined.
20.1 HYDROSTATIC BAILERS ...............................................................................................................................................................449
20.2 SAND BAILING ......................................................................................................................................................................450
20.2.1 Introduction .....................................................................................................................................................................450
20.2.2 Sand Bailers .....................................................................................................................................................................450
20.2.3 Otis Drive Down Bailer ................................................................................................................................................... 452
21 HYDRATE FORMATION & PREVENTION.........................................................................................................................452
21.1 FORMATION OF HYDRATES .........................................................................................................................................................453
21.2 HYDRATE PREDICTION................................................................................................................................................................453
21.3 HYDRATE PREVENTION...............................................................................................................................................................455
22 FORMULAE AND CONVERSION FACTORS COMMONLY USED ...................................................................... 459
22.1 CONVERSION FACTORS........................................................................................................................................................460
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 12 of 465

of 4658

1 ORIGINS OF OIL AND GAS

1.1 INTRODUCTION
Petroleum (derived from the Greek “Petra” for rock and the Latin “Oleum” for oil) is obtained from
the fluids contained in underground reservoirs.
The hydrocarbons contained in these fluids have had their origins in the residues of plant and
animal life, which were washed into sedimentary basins and buried through time. Subjected to
abnormal temperature and pressure gradients, the fats and proteins in these residues are
probably decomposed anaerobically (without oxygen) in the source rock to form the hydrocarbons
known generically as gas, condensate, or black oil.
The formation of these hydrocarbons is invariably accompanied by volume changes with high
increases in local pressure. These pressure increases probably initiate microfractures in the
sedimentary rock, thereby allowing the hydrocarbons to migrate along potential gradients until
they surfaced, or were caught in traps.
Most traps are structural anticlinal or fault traps, which are common to the majority of
sedimentary basins. Three-dimensional containment is established by an impermeable seal above,
around the sides, and by the buoyancy of the hydrocarbons on underlying water.
This section contains a discussion of the Organic Theory of Petroleum, which is the widely
accepted version by the scientific world, with a brief overview of geological structures which form
petroleum reservoirs.

Figure 1.1 - Organic Theory of Petroleum

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 13 of 465

of 4658
1.2 COMMERCIAL OIL FIELDS
In order for an oil and gas field to exist, four basic conditions must have been met:
A source from which hydrocarbons originated, with suitable environmental conditions that
changed the source material into petroleum.
A porous rock bed laid down, through which the petroleum could migrate to its reservoir
rock.
A suitably shaped trap formed under which the petroleum accumulated.
An impervious cap or seal rock overlaid causing the trap.

To ensure that a field is commercially viable, the reservoir rock must in addition exhibit three
further essential characteristics:
Continuity between pore spaces or permeability. There must be some degree of continuity
between void spaces so that reservoir fluids can flow through long distances under
very small pressure gradients.
Hydrocarbons must be of low enough molecular weight and, therefore, viscosity to allow
flow to occur.
Must have an organic content greater than 1%

1.3 RESERVOIR DRIVE MECHANISMS

Ideally in an offshore oil field, the hydrocarbons are recovered from the reservoir pore spaces by
exploiting a drive mechanism, precluding the need for artificial methods. Drive mechanisms have
two classifications:
Internal drive using the internal energy of the reservoir configuration.
External drive, which involves the invasion of the pore spaces by a replacement fluid.

1.3.1 Internal Drive

This is known as primary recovery, which includes three drive mechanisms:
Depletion or internal gas drive.
External gas cap drive.
Water drive.

1.3.2 Depletion Drive

The compressibility of oil and water is relatively small. As soon as production commences, it is
accompanied by a rapid drop of pressure in the producing zone which soon reaches the bubble
point of entrained gas, (refer to Figure 1.2). Initially, this gas is dispersed, but it rapidly expands
and assists in dispelling the oil. Eventually, however, the gas will start to form a gas front, which,
having more mobility than the oil, will increase the production gas to oil ratios. This depletion or
internal gas drive is characterised by a rapid decline in reservoir pressure and by the recovery of
only a small percentage of the oil in situation, e.g. 5 to 20 % maximum.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 14 of 465

of 4658
1.3.3 External Gas Cap
Where the oil has a gas cap, the gas cap pressure together with the pressure of gas in solution
tends to maintain pressure in the reservoir much longer than depletion drive, (refer to Figure 1.2).
Therefore, gas cap reservoirs have higher recovery rates e.g. 20 to 40%.
1.3.4 Water Drive
Water drive is characterised by large local deposits of water which expand as pressure is reduced
in the reservoir, (refer to Figure 1.2). Eventually, recovery will decrease due to the greater mobility
of the water front which eventually breaks through to the wellbore with increased water to oil
ratios. Nonetheless, water drive is the most efficient of all the drive mechanisms and can produce
recovery rates as high as 60 %.
All three-drive mechanisms may be present to varying degrees at the same time although one will
predominate.
1.3.5 External Drive
If a fluid is injected into a well so that the volumetric rate of fluid replacement is equal to the
volumetric rate of fluid extraction, then the average reservoir pressure will tend to remain
constant. Injection stimulates secondary recovery.
Depending on the type and configuration of the reservoir, pressure can be maintained therefore
by:
Gas injection
Water injection
Miscible and immiscible fluid injection.

In general, gas is injected into the crest, and water injection into the base or periphery of the
reservoir. Particular consideration must be given to the quality of the injection fluids, compatible
with existing reservoir fluids, filtered to prevent formation plugging, viscose which should be
significantly higher than formation water, variations in reservoir permeability, and injection rate. If
the injection rate is excessive, the water front may advance unevenly, thus giving rise to early
water breakthrough, or to unstable coning round the borehole.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 15 of 465

of 4658
1.4 RESERVOIR DRIVE MECHANISMS

1.4.1 Introduction
"Seeing" with sound is a familiar concept. Bats and submarines do it and so does a blind man with
a cane. In total darkness, we can sense whether we are in a closed or open space by the echoes
from our footsteps.
Seismic exploration, in principle, is nothing more than a mechanized version of the blind person
and his cane. In place of the tapping cane, we have a hammer blow on the ground, or an
explosion in a shallow hole, to generate compressional, or sound, waves. (Seismic methods also
work with shear waves as well.) We "listen" with geophones, spring-mounted electric coils moving
within a magnetic field, which generate electric currents in response to ground motion. Careful
analysis of the motion can tell us whether it is a direct surface-borne wave, one reflected from
some subsurface geologic interface, or a wave refracted along the top of an interface. Each of
these waves tells us something about the subsurface.

Seismic Refraction
Profiling
OUTLINE

The seismic refraction method is

based on the measurement of the
travel time of seismic waves
refracted at the interfaces between
subsurface layers of different
velocity. Seismic energy is provided
by a source ('shot') located on the
surface. Energy radiates out from the
shot point, either travelling directly
through the upper layer (direct
arrivals), or travelling down to and
then laterally along higher velocity
layers (refracted arrivals) before
returning to the surface. This energy
is detected on surface using a linear
array of geophones. Observation of
the travel-times of the refracted
signals provides information on the
depth profile of the refractor.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 16 of 465

of 4658
Shots are deployed at and beyond both ends of the geophone spread in order to acquire refracted
energy as first arrivals at each geophone position.
Data are recorded on a seismograph and later downloaded to computer for analysis of the first -
arrival times to the geophones from each shot position. Travel-time versus distance graphs are
then constructed and velocities calculated for the overburden and refractor layers through
analysis of the direct arrival and T-minus graph gradients.

Depth profiles for each refractor are produced by an analytical procedure based on consideration
of shot and receiver geometry and the measured travel-times and calculated velocities. The final
output comprises a depth profile of the refractor layers and a velocity model of the subsurface.
The primary applications of seismic refraction are for determining depth to bedrock and bedrock
structure. Due to the dependence of seismic velocity on the elasticity and density of the material
through which the energy is passing, seismic refraction surveys provide a measure of material
strengths and can consequently be used as an aid in assessing rippability and rock quality. The
technique has been successfully applied to mapping depth to base of backfilled quarries, depth of
landfills, thickness of overburden and the topography of groundwater.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 17 of 465

of 4658

Figure 1.2 – 4D Seismic Array

Because of the greatly improved seismic resolution of 4D seismic imaging, there has been an effort
to reduce the cost of 4D data acquisition and shorten the time it takes to acquire and process the
large volumes of data acquired. In the past it could take up to 24 months to process the recordings
from a 4D survey. Acquisition time has been cut by specially designed survey vessels deploying up
to ten multiple streamers at a time, or by using multiple vessels. These techniques allow a swath
of seismic data to be acquired in the same time it previously took to record a single
2-dimensional line. Specially designed paravanes steer the cables away from each other. Their
design reduces the drag of the streamer array, which ordinarily would be sufficient to stop even
quite a powerful vessel. Modern streamers have multiple global positioning system (GPS) sensors
that constantly record the position of the streamers relative to the vessel and the earth.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 18 of 465

of 4658
1.5 DRILLING AND CASING
Prior to a well being ‘spudded in’, a conductor (large casing) is placed at the surface to provide a
starting point for drilling operations.
Large Wells A cellar may be constructed and the conductor driven into the ground with
a pile driver. Alternatively, a post hole type boring rig may be used to make
a hole in which the conductor can be cemented.
Offshore The conductor is installed in ‘slots’ designed into the platform structure.

The well is drilled in stages and ‘cased’ to prevent hole collapse and the movement of formation
fluids into the wellbore, and vice versa. The number and size of casings is determined by the final
well depth, formation conditions, and final well pressure and service (oil or gas, single or dua l
etc.). Common sizes have been chosen for this diagram to serve as a sample illustration.
This diagram shows a typical ‘three-casing’ offshore well. The choice of how much cement
‘overlap’ in each casing is determined by the formation conditions and well location. A good
cement bond between the formation and casing is essential to prevent the movement of fluids
between the producing zones or to the surface. This is usually checked with the CBL (Cement
Bond Log) run on electric line before continuing with the next stage of drilling/completing a well.
Care is taken at all phases of drilling to ensure that the surface facilities are isolated from the
formation pressure by the density of the drilling mud (created hydrostatic pressure in the well to
balance formation pressure) and the use of Blow-Out Preventers (BOP’s). These are mounted
immediately below the rig floor on land wells and jack-up rigs. On semisubmersible rigs and
subsea completions, the BOP stack is mounted on a template on the seabed.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 19 of 465

of 4658
1.6 THE WELLHEAD
The installation sequence of the components shown on this drawing is as follows:
Note: This is not a complete procedure, but an explanation of the diagram only.
The cellar is prepared (onshore) if required.
The conductor is installed by surface drilling or pile driving in preparation for the drilling rig.
The well is spudded in and drilled to accept the surface casing.
The surface casing is run and cemented into place.
The Casing Head Housing (CHH) is attached to the surface casing.
Drilling continues for the intermediate casing.
The intermediate casing is run and the casing hanger is landed in the CHH.
The intermediate casing is cemented.
The Casing Head Spool (CHS) is installed into the CHH.
Drilling continues for the production casing.
The production casing is run and the casing hanger landed into the CSH.
The production casing is cemented.
In some cases a ‘Liner’, supported by a ‘Liner Hanger’ may be run and cemented back to the
top of the ‘Liner Hanger’.
The Tubing Head Spool (THS) is made up onto the CHS.
The well may be perforated by electric line ‘casing guns’, if required at this point (optional).
Tubing and completion components are run and spaced out.
The tubing hanger is attached to the tubing and landed in the THS.
At this point packers may be set.
A Back Pressure Valve (BPV) is installed in the tubing hanger (sometimes by wireline).
The drilling BOP’s are removed and the Xmas tree nippled up.
If the well was not perforated prior to running the tubing, it may be perforated now by the
Tubing Conveyed Perforating (TCP) guns or the ‘through tubing guns’ run on electric
line.

Note: No reference has been made to BOP sizes or installation of wear bushings,
and similar details etc.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 20 of 465

of 4658
1.7 THE WELLHEAD

We do Why not Or this?

this this?

20” Casing

16” Casing

12 ¾ ” Casing
Packer

5 ½ ” Tubing

7” Lines

Figure 1.3 - The wellhead

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 21 of 465

of 4658
lf it were possible we would drill the same size hole from top to bottom. However this is not
usually possible.
The well will pass through weak zones which need supporting before drilling can continue.
The well probably also passes through zones of differing pressure or permeability where the
driller uses different mud weights.
Prior to penetrating the reservoir the driller will set casing so that if a kick occurs the steel
lined hole can withstand the likely pressure and erosive flow.
The liner is a length of casing that is hung off deep in the well rather than returning to the
surface. Casing is likely to represent 25% of the cost of a well.
This saves on the cost of steel pipe and also leaves room for a larger diameter production
string.
The inner most casing string – known as the production casing (in this case 12.750 ins) is
designed to withstand the maximum pressure likely to be encountered in the well.
The wall thickness for the larger diameter casing strings would be impracticable if they had
to withstand the full producing and kill pressures.

Vital information on the type of rock drilled and the fluids it contains often needs to be
obtained either while actually drilling, or after drilling before running casing. This is
obtained by running electronic measuring devices into the well - either while drilling
(as part of the drillstring) or after drilling on "wireline".
The various types of measurement include: (1) electrical resistivity of fluids within the rock;
(2) the speed of sound through the rock; (3) reaction of the rock to gamma ray
bombardment; (4) production of gamma rays from fluids within the rock due to
neutron bombardment; and (5) natural gamma radiation of the rocks. The data
obtained give indications of rock type and porosity and the presence of oil or gas.
Other devices measure hole diameter, dip of strata and the direction of the hole. Sidewall
corers which punch or drill out small cores of rock, geophones for well velocity surveys
and seismic profiling are also lowered into uncased wells. In deviated wells
approaching the horizontal, flexible high-pressure steel coiled tubing may be used to
carry wireline logging tools and for performing wellbore maintenance operations.
If oil or gas has been detected in a well, a tool is lowered on a wireline to measure fluid
pressures and collect small samples. If the flow rate of the well needs to be measured,
a "well test" is carried out. This involves running production tubing with flow control
valves and isolation packers into the well, then flowing the hydrocarbons to surface
through the high pressure pipework containing pressure recorders and flowmeters.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 22 of 465

of 4658

1.7.1 Developing a Discovery

When promising amounts of oil and gas are found in an
exploratory well, a programme of detailed field
appraisal may begin. The size of the field must be
established, and the most efficient production method
worked out in order to assess whether it will repay,
with profit, the huge costs of offshore development
and day-to-day operation. Appraisal may take several
years to complete and is itself very costly.

Figure 1.4 - Offshore Production Field after a successful discovery

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 23 of 465

of 4658

1. Start 121/4-in. section Deviated Wells are not

2. End of build always as depicted previously
3. Start turn
4. TD 121/4-in. section
5. End of 81/2-in. hold
6. End of 81/2-in. drop
N
7. TDf 81/2-in. hole 30-in.
 185/8-in.
True vertical depth, m

133/8-in. 0
North Sea -500
-1,000
Norwegian
-1,500
Sector
-2,000
TD 7,255m
-2,500
95/8-in. 7x51/2-in. hole -3,000
0 Tapered liner
-500 -250
-1,000 -750
-1,500 -1,250 East, m

121/4-in. hole
-2,000 -1,750
North, m -2,500 -2,250
-3,000 -2,750
Tandem run -3,500 81/4-in. hole

Tandem run

(planned)
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 24 of 465

of 4658

No well is perfectly vertical.

Consider inclination and radius of bends when designing a completion.
Holes inclined at angles greater than around 50 degrees offer too much friction to allow
tools to be lowered. In these situations access is made with either a wireline tractor,
which pulls the wire down the well or coiled tubing. Both options are more expensive
than conventional wireline.
Friction is greater in a gas well.
Avoid positioning equipment at doglegs (sharp corners) since wireline work is hampered
Furthermore wire rubbing the polished bore (the seal surface) on landing nipples at doglegs
can cut a groove. Making, for example, a wireline retrievable SCSSV inoperable.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 25 of 465

of 4658

COMPLETION EQUIPMENT
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 26 of 465

of 4658

2 COMPLETION EQUIPMENT
In general, a well completion should provide a production conduit which:
Maximises the safe recovery of hydrocarbons from a gas or oil well throughout its
producing life.
Gives an effective means of pressurising selected zones in water or gas injection wells.

Downhole accessories used should be designed to provide the safe installation and retrieval of the
completion, and flexibility for sub-surface maintenance of the well using wireline, coiled tubing or
other methods.
Different types of wells present distinct design and installation problems for engineers. Most
completions are just variations on a few basic design types and, therefore, in the majority of cases,
the equipment used is fairly standard. However, there is a move to more versatile and complex
equipment as used, for example in Smart Wells, but that is beyond the scope of this manual. An
overview of the equipment commonly used in single and dual string completions is given in the
following sections.
The detailed operation of some the items such as sliding side doors (SSDs), side pocket mandrels
(SPMs) are discussed later in this manual, whereas packers will not be covered in this manual in
any great detail. However, the relative location of these tools in a completion and their functions
in intervention work or workovers will be addressed.

Figure shows schematic drawings illustrating the location of equipment in a generic oil well
completion.
In order ensure compatibility between the manual and course lecture, the completion description
will start from the bottom of the completion and work ‘uphole’.
SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 27 of 465

of 4658

Figure 2.1 – Generic Completion Schematic

SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 28 of 465

of 4658

Figure 2.2 - Generic Oil well Completion

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 29 of 465

of 4658
2.1 WIRELINE RE-ENTRY GUIDE
A wireline entry guide is used for the safe re-entry of wireline tools from the casing or liner back
into the tubing string. It attaches to the end of the production string or packer tailpipe assembly
and, where possible, has a chamfered lead in with a full inside diameter.
Wireline re-entry guides are generally available in two forms:

2.1.1 Mule-Shoe
This type of guide would be second choice on any completion design. Essentially it has the same
function as the Bell Guide but incorporates a large 45° angle cut on one side of the guide, (refer to
Figure a). It would only be used when the completion tailpipe has to be run into another packer, or
past a Liner Hanger. Should the guide hang up on a casing item such as a liner or packer top while
being run, rotation of the tubing will cause the 45° shoulder to ‘kick’ into, and enter the liner or
packer. This item has a very limited re-entry chamfer, and has been known to cause severe re-
entry difficulties for toolstrings in deviated Wells.

2.1.2 Bell Guide

This guide has a 45° lead in taper to allow re-entry into the tubing of wireline and Coiled tubing
tools, and would always be the ‘first choice’ option. This type of guide, (refer to Figure b), is used
in completions where the end of the tubing does not need to pass through any ca sing obstacles
such as liner laps.

Figure 2.3 - Wireline Re-entry Guide

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 30 of 465

of 4658
2.2 TUBING PROTECTION JOINT
This is normally a single tubing joint, short joint or pup joint and is used to prevent downhole
gauges from buffeting in the flow stream. The protection joint is installed directly below the gauge
hanger landing nipple in the tailpipe and must be long enough to accommodate the longest BHP
toolstring that may be run.

2.3 WIRELINE LANDING NIPPLES

Landing nipples, (Refer to Figure ), are short profiled tubulars installed in the tubing string to
accommodate wireline retrievable flow control devices. These can seal within the nipple bore if
required, dependent upon the tool's function. The most common tools run are plugs, chokes, and
pressure and temperature gauges. The main features of a landing nipple are:
Locking groove or profile
Polished seal bore
No-Go shoulder (only on nipples that rely on a shoulder for device location).

Landing nipples are supplied in ranges to suit most tubing sizes and weights with API or premium
connections and are available in two basic types:
No-Go or Non-Selective (or Selective by a Top or Bottom Shoulder).
Selective.

2.3.1 No-Go or Non-Selective

The non-selective nipple receives a locking device that uses a No-Go for location purposes. This
requires that the OD of the locking device is slightly larger than the No-Go diameter of the nipple.
The No-Go diameter is usually a small shoulder located below the packing bore (bottom No -Go)
but in some designs, the top of the packing bore itself is used as the No-Go. Only one No-Go
landing nipple of a particular minimum ID size should be used in a completion string.
The No-Go provides a positive location and are widely used in high angle wells where wireline tool
manipulation is difficult and weight indicator sensitivity is reduced.

2.3.2 Selective
In the selective system, the locking devices are designed with the same key profile as the nipples
and selection of the nipple is determined by the operation of the running tool and t he setting
procedure. The selective design is full bore and allows the installation of several nipples of the
same size and type.
Uses of landing nipples are to:
Plug tubing from above, below or from both directions for pressure testing.
Leak detection.
Install safety valves, chokes and other flow control devices.
Install bottomhole pressure and temperature gauges.
SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 31 of 465

of 4658

Figure 2.4 - Typical Wireline Landing Nipples

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 32 of 465

of 4658
2.4 PERFORATED JOINTS
In Wells where flowing velocities are high, a restriction in the tubing, such as a gauge hanger, can
cause false pressure and temperature readings. Vibrations in the tool can cause extensive damage
to delicate instruments. To provide an alternative flow path, a perforated joint is installed above
the gauge hanger nipple and allows unrestricted flow around the gauge. The perforated joint is
normally a full tubing joint that is drilled with sufficient holes to provide a flow area greater than
that in the tubing above.

2.5 PACKERS
A packer is a primary safety device used to provide a seal between the tubing and the casing which
allows Well Control. With a suitable completion string, this seal allows the flow of reservoir fluids
from the producing formation to be contained within the tubing up to the surface. This isolates
the production casing from being exposed to well pressure and corrosion from well effluents or
injection fluids.
A packer is tubular in construction and consists basically of:
Case hardened slips to bite into the casing wall and hold the packer in position against
pressure and tubing forces.
Packing elements that seal against the casing.

Figure gives examples of typical packer installations and shows common types of packers.
In general, packers are classified in two groups:
Retrievable (Refer to

Figure )
Permanent (Refer to

Figure )

Packers may be further classified according to the number of bores required for production i.e.
Single One concentric bore through the packer for use with a single tubing
string.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 33 of 465

of 4658
Dual Two parallel bores through the packer for use with two tubing strings.

Triple Three parallel bores through the packer for use with three tubing strings.

A typical packer description, therefore, might be: 95/8“, dual 31/2“ x 31/2“, hydraulic-set retrievable
packer.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 34 of 465

of 4658
Retrievable Packers
These are often run into the wellbore on the production tubing string, but can also be set
individually on Wireline. As the name implies, retrievable packers can be recovered from the well
after setting by a straight overpull, usually around 40,000#, with the tubing.

Permanent Packers
These are installed in the wellbore either by Wireline or Coiled Tubing, or as an integral part of the
production tubing string. A permanent packer may also be considered as an integral part of the
casing. Older type permanent packers can only be removed from the well by milling operations.
However, more modern permanent packers can be retrieved by cutting the centre mandrel with a
chemical cutter, but these packers are not covered in this manual.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 35 of 465

of 4658
Completion Variations

Figure 2.5 - Examples of Packer Installations

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 36 of 465

of 4658

Figure 2.6 - Examples of Common Types of Retrievable Packers

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 37 of 465

of 4658

Figure 2.7 - Examples of Common Types of Hydraulic Packers

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 38 of 465

of 4658
2.5.1 Setting Methods

Mechanical
Run on a workstring, it is set by manipulation of the tubing i.e. by applying compression or tension
in combination with rotation depending on the particular setting mechanism for that packer.

NOTE: Packers having rotation set/release mechanisms should not be used in

highly deviated wells since the application of tubing torque may not be
transferred downhole.

Hydraulic
Can be run on a workstring or on the tubing string. When the desired setting depth is reached, the
tubing is plugged below the packer with a check valve, standing valve or a wireline plug. Hydraulic
pressure is applied to the tubing to set the packer.

Electrically on Wireline
This is more commonly used with permanent packers, but retrievable packers, i.e. permatrieve,
are also set with this method. The packer is attached to a wireline setting adapter, connected to a
setting gun on the end of the wireline and run in the wellbore. On reaching the desired depth an
electrical signal transmitted to the gun activates an explosive charge and, through a hydraulic
chamber, provides the mechanical forces to set the packer.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 39 of 465

of 4658
2.5.2 Retrievable Packer Accessories
Travel Joints (Telescoping or Expansion joints)
A travel joint is used to compensate for tubing movement due to temperature and/or pressure
changes during treating or production and is used with retrievable packer systems. Figure shows a
travel joint commonly used on the short string in dual string completions.

Figure 2.8 - Travel Joint

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 40 of 465

of 4658
2.5.3 Permanent Packer Accessories
An important aspect in a completion with a permanent packer is the tubing/packer seal. As the
packer in effect becomes part of the casing after it is set. The tubing must connect to the packer
by a method that allows it to be released. This connection, whether it is a straight stab in, latched
or otherwise, must have a seal to isolate the annulus from well fluids and pressures. This seal
usually consists of a number of seal elements to cater for some wear and tear.
These seal elements are classified into two groups, ‘premium’ and ‘non-premium’. The premium
group is used in high temperature and/or severe or sour well conditions i.e. H 2S, CO2 etc. These
are normally ‘V’ type packing stacks containing various packing materials resistant to the particular
environment. The non-premium seals are for low to medium temperature and/or sweet service
and can be either ‘V’ type packing stacks or moulded rubber elements.

Locator Tubing Seal Assemblies

Locator tubing seal assemblies and Tubing Seal Extensions, (refer to Figure a and Figure b), are
fitted with a series of external seals providing an effective seal between the tubing and packer
bore. They also have a No-Go type locator for position determination within the packer. Locator
seal assemblies are normally spaced out so that they can accommodate both upward and
downward tubing movement induced by changes in temperature, pressure and ballooning.

Seal Bore Extensions

A seal bore extension is used to provide additional sealing bore length when a longer seal
assembly is run to accommodate greater tubing movement. The seal bore extension is run below
the packer and has the same ID as the packer.

Anchor Tubing Seal Assemblies

Anchor tubing seal assemblies, (refer to Figure c and Figure d), are used where it is necessary to
anchor the tubing to a permanent packer while retaining the option to unlatch when required.
Anchor latches are normally used where well conditions require the tubing to be landed in tension
or where insufficient weight is available to prevent seal movement.

Polished Bore Receptacles (PBRs)

A PBR is simply a seal receptacle attached to the top of a permanent packer or liner hanger packer
in which the seal assembly lands. As the PBR bore can be made larger than the packer, this
provides a larger flow area through the seal assembly, (Refer to Figure ).

Tubing Seal Receptacles

A TSR is an inverted version of a PBR whereby a polished OD male member is attached to the top
of the packer and the female (or overshot) is attached to the tubing. The seals are contained in the
female member so that they are recovered when pulling the tubing, (refer to Figure ).
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 41 of 465

of 4658

Figure 2.9 - Permanent Packer Seal Accessories

SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 42 of 465

of 4658

Figure 2.10 – Polished Bore Receptacle

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 43 of 465

of 4658

Figure 2.11 – Extra Long Tubing Seal Receptacle

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 44 of 465

of 4658
2.6 SLIDING SIDE DOORS
Sliding Side Doors (SSDs) or Sliding Sleeves are installed in the tubing during well completion to
provide a means of communication between the tubing and the annulus, or across zones that may
be selectively produced when the sleeve is moved to the open position, (refer to Figure ).
SSDs are used to:
Bring a well into production after drilling or workover by circulating the completion fluid
out of the tubing, and replacing it with a lighter underbalanced fluid.
Kill a well prior to pulling the tubing in a workover operation.
Provide selective zone production in a multiple zone well completion.

The application of SSDs as a circulation device means they must be positioned as close as possible
to the packer, normally within 100ft.
Used for selective zonal production, a number of SSDs can be installed in a single completion string
between isolation packers and selectively opened or closed by wireline or coiled tubing methods.
Coiled tubing is generally used in high angle or horizontal wells where wireline tools cannot be
jarred effectively.
SSDs are available in versions that open by shifting an inner sleeve either, upwards or downwards,
by the use of an appropriate shifting tool. When there are more than one SSDs in a well, the
sleeves may be opened and/or closed with selective shifting tools without disturbing sleeves
higher up in the string.

CAUTION: Tubing and annulus pressures must be equalised before an SSD is opened to
prevent wireline tools being blown up or down the tubing.
A common fault with SSDs is that seal failure usually leads to a workover, although a pack-off can
be installed as a temporary solution. The top sub of the SSD incorporates a nipple profile, and the
bottom sub has a polished bore. This enables the installation of the pack-off, sometimes also
termed a straddle.

2.7 FLOW COUPLINGS

Flow couplings, are heavy-walled tubulars, which are installed above, and sometimes below, any
completion component which may cause flow turbulence such as wireline nipples, SSDs, Sub-
Surface Safety Valves etc. and delay the effects of internal erosion, thus prolonging the life of the
completion.
They may be manufactured from harder materials and have a thicker external wall thickness so
that, if erosion is experienced, the flow coupling will still maintain pressure integrity over the
projected life of the well.
In higher velocity wells, such as high pressure gas wells or injection wells, It is common practice to
have a flow coupling placed above and below restrictions.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 45 of 465

of 4658
2.8 BLAST JOINTS
Blast joints are installed opposite perforations (non-gravel packed) where external cutting or
abrasive action occurs due to produced well fluids or sand. They are heavy-walled tubulars
available usually in 10, 15, and 20ft. lengths.
They should be long enough to extend at least 4ft. on either side of a perforated interval for a
safety margin.
SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 46 of 465

of 4658

Figure 2.12 - Sliding Side Door (SSD)

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 47 of 465

of 4658
2.9 SIDE POCKET MANDRELS
The Side Pocket Mandrel system was originally designed for gas lift completions. They provide a
means of injecting gas from the casing-tubing annulus to the tubing via a gas lift valve. However in
recent times, they have also been commonly used in place of an SSD as a circulating device,
because seal failure can be rectified by pulling the dummy gas lift valve (or kill valve) with wireline
and replacing the seals.

SPMs are installed in the completion string to act as receptacles for the following range of devices:
Gas lift valves
Dummy valves
Chemical injection valves
Circulation valves
Differential dump kill valves
Equalising valves.

It is essential to understand the operation of the device installed in a SPM before conducting any
well intervention, as it may affect well control. Refer to Figure for a typical SPM and Figure for
types of valves.

2.9.1 Gas Lift Valves

There are many different designs of gas lift valves for various applications. They range from simple
orifice valves to pressure operated bellows type valves. However, they all contain check valves to
prevent tubing to annulus flow. These check valves may leak after a period of use and they should
never be relied on as barriers in a well control situation. These should be replaced with dummy
valves and the tubing pressure tested to confirm integrity.

2.9.2 Dummy Valves

These are tubing/annulus isolation valves. They are installed in place of the valves in order that the
completion tubing string can be pressure tested from both sides during installation or when well
service operations are required.

2.9.3 Chemical Injection Valves

The injection valve is designed to control the flow of chemicals injected into the production fluid
at the depth of the valve. A spring provides the force necessary to maintain the valve in the fail -
safe closed position. Reverse flow check valves, which prevent backflow and circulation from the
tubing to the casing, are included as an integral part of the valve assembly.
Injection chemicals enter the valve from the annulus in an open injection system. (This req uires
the annulus to be full of the desired chemical. An alternative method is to run an injection line
from surface to the SPM.) When the hydraulic pressure of the injected chemicals overcomes the
pre-set tension in the valve spring, plus the pressure in the tubing, the valve opens. Chemicals
then flow through the crossover seat in the valve and into the tubing.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 48 of 465

of 4658
2.9.4 Circulating Valves
A circulating valve is recommended to be installed in any SPM whenever a circulating operation is
to be carried out. The circulating valve is designed to enable circulation of fluid through the SPM
without damaging the pocket. The valve allows fluid to be dispersed from both ends allowing
circulation of fluid at a minimal pressure drop. Some valves permit circulation from the casing into
the tubing only and others to circulate fluid from the tubing into the casing only.
If a valve is not used when circulating, the pocket could flow cut and a workover would be
required to replace the SPM.

2.9.5 Differential Dump Kill Valves

Differential dump/kill valves are designed to provide a means of communication between the
casing annulus and the tubing when an appropriate differential pressure occurs. Below a pre-set
differential pressure, the valve acts as a dummy valve since it uses a moveable piston to block off
the circulating ports in the valve and the side pocket mandrel.
The differential pressure necessary to open the valve will depend on the type and number of shear
screws installed. The valve will only open when the casing annulus pressure is increased by the
differential (of the shear screw rating) above the tubing pressure. An increase in tubing pressure
above the casing annulus pressure will not open the valve. After opening, the piston is locked in
the up position and fluids can flow freely in either direction. The hydrostatic pressure from the
column of annulus fluid will kill the well and remedial operations can be planned.

2.9.6 Equalising Dummy Valves

The equalisation valve is designed to equalise pressure between tubing and casing and/or to
circulate fluid before pulling the valve from the SPM.
The valve has two sets of packing that straddle and pack off the casing ports in the SPM. The
tubing and annulus are isolated from each other until a pulling tool operates the equalising device.
Pressures equalise through a port before the valve and latch are retrieved.
SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 49 of 465

of 4658

Figure 2.13 - Side Pocket Mandrel (SPM)

SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 50 of 465

of 4658

Figure 2.14 - Types of SPM Valves

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 51 of 465

of 4658
2.10 SUB-SURFACE SAFETY VALVES (SSSV)
The applications of various sub-surface safety valve systems are shown in Figure .
The modern sub-surface safety valve has been developed from the earliest low technology
versions produced in the 1930's. The initial demand was for a downhole valve that would permit
flow during normal conditions, but would isolate formation pressure from the wellhead to prevent
damage or destruction. This valve would be installed downhole in the production string for use in
an emergency.
The valve that was developed was a Sub-Surface Controlled Safety Valve (SSCSV) which was a
poppet type valve with a mushroom shaped valve/seat system. Compared with today's valves, this
simple poppet type valve had several disadvantages; restricted flow area, tortuous flow paths, low
differential pressure rating and calibration difficulties. Despite these limitations the valve operated
successfully and other versions were developed with less tortuous flow paths such as the ball and
flapper valve. These valves have a long service record, and are commonly used today in such
areas as the Gulf of Mexico USA and Nigerian Niger Delta. They are also used in the UK North Sea
as an emergency valve on Wells where Control Line integrity has failed.
From this beginning, the Surface Controlled Sub-Surface Safety Valve (SCSSV) was developed in the
late 1950's. This moved the point of control from downhole to surface, (refer to
Figure ). This design provided large flow areas, remote control of opening and closing, and
responsiveness to a wide variety of abnormal surface conditions (fire, line rupture, etc.). Initial
demand for this valve was slow due to its higher cost and the problems associated in successfully
installing the hydraulic control line; hence its usage was low until the late 1960's.
The SCSSV is controlled by hydraulic pressure supplied from a surface control system, which is
ideally suited to manual or automatic operation, the latter of which pioneered the sophisticated
emergency shut-down systems required today. The versatility of the valve allows it to be used in
specialised applications as well as in conventional systems.
SCSSVs are available in two variants - Tubing Retrievable Safety Valves (TRSV) and Wireline
Retrievable Safety Valves (WRSV). SCSSVs are available with ball or flapper type closure
mechanisms.

NOTE: SCSSVs are set below any possible depth where damage could occur to the
valve from surface impact or explosion
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 52 of 465

of 4658
2.10.1 Types of Sub-Surface Safety Valves
Fail-safe Sub-Surface Safety Valves, whether directly or remotely controlled, are installed to
protect personnel, property and the environment in the event of an uncontrolled well flow (or
blow-out) caused by collision, equipment failure, human error, fire, leakage or sabotage. Whether
safety valves are required in a particular operating area, depends on the location of the Wells and
in some cases on company operating policy and/or government legislation.
In general, each application must be considered separately due to varied well conditions,
locations, regulations, depth requirements etc.
Table shows the various applications of WRSVs and TRSVs.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 53 of 465

of 4658

Figure 2.15 – Sub-Surface Safety Valve Applications

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 54 of 465

of 4658

Figure 2.16 - Example of Downhole Safety Valve System

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 55 of 465

of 4658

WRSV Applications TRSV Applications

General application: where intervention by General application: where larger flow area is
wireline is available desired for the tubing size

High pressure gas wells High volume oil and gas wells

Extreme hostile environments where well

fluids or temperature tend to shorten the Subsea completions
life of component materials

Multiple zone completions where several flow

High velocity wells with abrasive production
control devices are set beneath the TRSV

Greater depth setting capabilities

Table 2.17 - Sub-Surface Safety Valve Applications

2.10.2 Sub-Surface Controlled Sub-Surface Safety Valves

These valves are installed in regular wireline type nipples on a lock mandrel.

Pressure-Differential Safety Valves

This type of direct-controlled safety valve is a ‘normally open’ valve that utilises a pressure-
differential to provide the method of valve closure. Normally a spring holds a valve off-seat until
the well flow reaches a pre-determined rate.
This rate can be related to the pressure differential generated across an orifice or flow bean.
When this differential is reached or exceeded, a piston moves upwards against a pre-set spring
force closing the valve. Valves of this type are sometimes termed ‘storm chokes’.
There are three closing mechanisms available with these valves, i.e.:
Poppet
Ball
Flapper.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 56 of 465

of 4658
The valve is held open by a spring force that may be increased by adding spacers or changing the
spring. The relationship between flow rate and differential may be adjusted by changing the bean
size. The valve when closed will remain in this position until pressure is applied at surface to
equalise across it when the spring will return to the open position.

NOTE: Pulling Should Not Be Attempted Unless Pressures Have Been Equalised And
The Valve Is Open.

These valves are still in use today but also a derivative, the Injection Valve, which is normally
closed, is widely used in injection wells. This injection valve opens when fluid or gas is injected and
travels to the fully open position when the predetermined minimum injection rate is reached,
(refer to Sub-Section on Injection Valves).

Ambient Safety Valves

This type of direct-controlled safety valve is a fail safe closed valve which is pre-charged with a
calibrated dome (chamber) pressure prior to running. Ambient controlled valves will open when
the well pressure reaches the set point of the dome calibration. The valve will close when the
flowing pressure of the well, at the point of installation, drops below the pre-determined dome
pressure. Ambient type safety valves are also generally referred to as a ‘storm chokes’.
This type of valve is not limited by a flow bean which gives it a large internal diameter and, hence,
a large flow area making it suitable for high volume installations possibly producing abrasive fluids.
Ambient type safety valves are run with an equalising assembly to allow equalisation across the
valve should it close, and a lock mandrel to locate and lock the valve in the landing nipple.

NOTE: Both pressure differential and ambient controlled sub-surface safety valves
close on pre-determined conditions. They do not offer control until these
conditions exist. In addition, valve settings may change if flow beans
become cut. Surface controlled safety valves should be considered in such
cases.

Injection Valve
Injection valves are normally closed valves installed in injection wells. They act like check valves
allowing the passage of the injected fluid or gas but close when injection is ceased.
The closure mechanism is usually either, a ball or flapper type that opens when the differential
pressure from the injected medium equalises the pressure below the valve. As the injection rate is
increased to the pre-calculated rate, the differential acts on a choke bean and overcomes a spring
to move the mechanism to the fully open mode. If the injection rate is insufficient or fluctuating,
the mechanism will be damaged and possibly flow cut.
The flapper-type valve is the most popular as its operation is less complicated and is less prone to
damage if the injection rate is not high enough.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 57 of 465

of 4658
Bottom Hole Regulators
Bottom hole regulators are essentially throttling valves installed downhole to enhance the overall
safety in wells where high surface pressures or hydrate formation present problems. Bottomhole
regulators are designed to reduce surface flowline pressures to safe, workable levels and to keep
surface controls from freezing.
In gas wells, the pressure drop across a regulator will be downhole where the gas and surrounding
well temperature is higher than at surface. The higher gas temperature and surrounding well
temperature tend to prevent hydrate formation when a pressure drop occurs across the regulator.
In oil wells, the installation of a bottomhole regulator is used to liberate gas from the solution
downhole and lighten the oil columns to increase flow velocity.
The regulator has a stem and seat that are held closed by a spring and at a pre-set differential
pressure the valve opens.
If high reductions in pressure are necessary, more than one regulator can be installed, providing
stepped reductions reducing the risk of hydrate formation and flow cutting.

NOTE: An equalising sub should be installed between the lock mandrel and the
regulator to facilitate the equalisation of pressure.

2.10.3 Surface Controlled Sub-Surface Safety Valves

The SCSSV is a downhole safety device that can shut in a well in an emergency or provide a barrier
between the reservoir and the surface. As the name suggests, the valve can be controlled from the
surface by hydraulic pressure transmitted from a control panel through stainless steel tubing to
the safety valve.
The remote operation of this type of valve from the surface can also be integrated with pilots,
emergency shut down (ESD) systems, and surface safety control manifolds. This flexibility of the
surface controlled safety valve design is its greatest advantage.
In the simplest system an SCSSV is held open by hydraulic pressure supplied by a manifold at the
surface. The pressure is maintained by hydraulic pumps controlled by a pressure pilot installed at
some strategic point at the wellhead. Damage to the wellhead or flowlines causes a pressure
monitor pilot to exhaust pneumatic pressure. A low pressure line in turn causes a relay to block
control pressure to a three-way hydraulic controller. This results in hydraulic pressure loss in the
SCSSV control line. When this pressure is lost, the safety valve automatically closes, shutting off all
flow from the tubing.
There are two main categories of SCSSVs:
Wireline Retrievable SCSSV
Tubing Retrievable SCSSV.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 58 of 465

of 4658
Statistics have proven that the TRSV valve is more reliable than the WRSV and that the flapper is
more reliable than the ball mechanism, therefore the TRSV flapper valve is considered to be the
most reliable of all.
SCSSVs utilise only the ball or flapper type closure mechanisms.
Both categories are supplied with or without internal equalising features. The equalising feature
allows the pressure to equalise across the valve so it can be re-opened. Valves without this feature
need to be equalised by pressure applied at surface.
The equalising valve having more operating parts is less reliable than non-equalising valves,
however, with the latter, equalisation pressure is often difficult to provide and often more time
consuming.

Wireline Retrievable SCSSV

Wireline retrievable sub-surface safety valves are located and locked, using standard wireline
methods, in a dedicated safety valve landing nipple (SVLN). The SVLN is connected to a hydraulic
control line pressure source at the surface, normally by a 1/4” OD stainless steel tubing.
When the safety valve is set in the nipple, the packing section seals against the bore of the nipple
below the port. The packing section of the lock mandrel forms a seal above the port in the nipple.
Control pressure, introduced through the control line, enters the valve through the port in the
housing and allows pressure to be applied to open the valve. Figure shows a typical surface-
controlled, wireline retrievable safety valve.
Because a wireline retrievable SCSSV seats in a landing nipple installed in the production string, it
offers a much smaller bore than a tubing retrievable SCSSV for the same size of tubing. Frequently,
WRSVs have to be pulled prior to wireline operations being carried out below them, which have
strong implications on well safety.
Compared to a tubing retrievable SCSSV, the wireline retrievable SCSSV is easy to replace in the
case of failure. Introducing a planned maintenance schedule in which valves are regularly pull ed
and serviced can prevent most failures. However, during wireline entry operations there is also a
safety risk, and care must be maintained at all times.
The components that are required for the installation of a wireline retrievable SCSSV are:
Hydraulic control line
Control line protectors
Hydraulic control manifold
Wireline retrievable safety valve
Safety valve landing nipple
Locking mandrel
Wireline installation and retrieval tools for the locking mandrel.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 59 of 465

of 4658

Figure 2.18 - Typical Wireline Retrievable SCSSV (Ball Type)

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 60 of 465

of 4658
Tubing Retrievable SCSSV
Tubing retrievable safety valves operate by the same principle as wireline SCSSVs. The main
difference is that all components are incorporated in one assembly which is installed in the
completion string, (refer to Figure ). Some later models have rod pistons instead of concentric
piston designs.
They also have both equalising and non-equalising versions, and versions that enable the insertion
of a wireline valve inside the TRSV when the operating mechanism has failed. If the failure is due
to a leaking control line then this contingency measure is ineffective. In this case it may be possible
to run a ‘Storm Choke’ to continue production until it is possible to conduct a workover.
To enable the installation of the insert valve, the tubing retrievable valve needs to be ‘locked
open’ or ‘locked out’. However the reduced internal bore may adversely affect production rates.
The components required for a TRSV safety system are:
Hydraulic control line
Control line protectors
Hydraulic control manifold
Tubing retrievable safety valve.

and additionally for insert capability:

Wireline safety valve
Locking mandrel
Wireline installation and retrieval tools for the locking mandrel
Lock-out tool for the tubing retrievable valve.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 61 of 465

of 4658

Figure 2.19 - Typical Tubing Retrievable SCSSV (TRSV) Flapper Type

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 62 of 465

of 4658
2.10.4 Safety Valve Leak Testing
Leak tests are performed immediately after Sub-Surface Safety Valves are installed. A typical leak
test involves closing the production, kill and swab valves on the Xmas tree and bleeding off the
control line pressure to the Sub Surface Safety Valve. Tubing pressure is bled off slowly above the
valve to zero for a tubing retrievable valve and in 100psi. (6.9bar) stages for a wireline retrievable
valve.
The system is closed in again and tubing pressure monitored. If there is a rapid build -up, a major
leak is indicated or improper functioning of the valve; in this case the valve should be cycled and
the test repeated. After a specified shut-in period the tubing head pressure should be below a
maximum allowable pressure as specified by the operator’s leak off criteria. Many operators
apply an API standard.

NOTE: The API Standard allows some leakage through downhole Safety Valve, which is why
some companies do not consider them to be Barriers.
Permitted Leakage;
Gas Leakage allowed - upto 900scft/hr (25.5m³/hr)
Fluid Leakage allowed - upto 6.3gal/hr (0.4m³/hr)

NOTE: It is extremely important that pressure data is fully and accurately recorded.

After initial installation, leak tests should be carried out periodically; this accomplishes three
functions:
To test the integrity of the seal in the safety valve.
To test that the lock mandrel in a wireline retrievable valve is still properly locked.
To cycle the valve to prevent 'freezing' in wells where they have been sitting in either
fully open or fully closed position for extended periods of time.

NOTE: Authorised personnel should conduct all the above tests on all Sub-Surface
Safety Valves.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 63 of 465

of 4658
2.10.5 Annulus Safety Valves
The sub-surface safety valves discussed so far, i.e. tubing retrievable and wireline retrievable, only
provide control on the tubing. In these systems, no annular flow control exists.
Annulus safety valve systems are usually associated with completions where artificial lift or
secondary recovery methods are employed e.g. gas venting in electric submersible pump (ESP),
hydraulic pump, and gas lift installations. Their application is to remove the potential hazard of a
large gas escape in the event there is an incident where the tubing hanger seal is breached.
There are a number of designs on the market and the variety of modes of operation is too wide to
be covered in this document, however the basic concepts are the same. With any annulus system,
there must be a sealing device between the tubing and the casing through which the flow of gas
can be closed off. This is generally a packer type installation, but may also be a casing polished
bore nipple into which a packing mandrel will seal. In the sealing device there is a valve
mechanism operated by hydraulic pressure similar to an SCSSV. The valve mechanism opens the
communication path from the annulus below to the annulus above the valve and is fail -safe
closed.
The closure mechanism may be a sliding sleeve, poppet or flapper device. Figure shows a typical
annulus safety valve.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 64 of 465

of 4658

Figure 2.20 - Typical Annular Safety Valve System

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 65 of 465

of 4658
2.10.6 Surface Control Manifolds
Surface control manifolds are designed to provide and control the hydraulic pressure required to
hold an SCSSV open. The manifold has one or more air powered hydraulic pumps to maintain the
hydraulic operating pressure for the safety valve.
The hydraulic pressure is through a three-way control valve, which is controlled by remote
pressure pilots and fire sensors. Pilot, sensor or manual activation removes the hydraulic pressure,
closing the safety valve.

NOTE: Activation can occur from the operation of remote-control pressure sensing
pilots, fusible plugs, plastic line, sand probes, level controllers or emergency
shutdown (ESD) systems.

Surface control manifolds are generally supplied as complete systems containing a reservoir,
pressure control regulators, relief valves, gauges, and a pump with manual override.
Manifolds, in combination with the various pilot monitors, have many different applications, e.g.
controlling multiple Wells using individual control, multiple Wells using individual pressures and
any combination of these.
Other additional features have been incorporated into surface control manifolds when the system
is integrated with other pressure-operated devices. A control panel, designed to supply hydraulic
pressure to a surface safety valve (SSV) and hydraulic pressure to an SCSSV, contains circuit logic
for proper sequential opening and closing of the safety valves, i.e.
Sequential closing:
SSV first
SCSSV second.

Sequential re-opening:
SCSSV first
SSV second.

Sequential logic is incorporated to increase the service life of hydraulic master valves and SCSSVs
to prevent SCSSVs becoming flow cut by high velocity wells.
Improvements have also been made in the monitoring systems, e.g.:
Sand erosion probes installed on a flowline to monitor sand flow production.
Quick exhaust valves, which allow rapid exhausting of control line pressure, to speed up
valve closures.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 66 of 465

of 4658
2.10.7 Control Lines
The conduit, which supplies the hydraulic fluid to the SCSSV, is termed the ‘control line’. The
control line is normally 1/4“ OD tubing attached between the sub-surface valve (TRSV) or nipple
(WRSV) and the tubing hanger. It is attached with compression fittings, and clamped to the
outside of the tubing.
The method of porting through the hanger to the control manifold is dependent on the type of
wellhead and hanger system being used. Some systems on land wellheads are simply fed out
through a port with a packing element (often a tie-down bolt hole) that is tightened to seal around
the outside of the tubing. Other systems have drilled ports through the hanger, into which the
control line is fitted again by a compression fitting, and the spool sealed off from the annulus and
the Xmas tree bore by concentric weight set or pressure energised seals.
Subsea wellheads have different methods of termination so the tree can be installed without diver
assistance.
The control line material is selected to meet the environment in which it is to be installed and
must be compatible with the safety valve and the hanger materials to avoid corrosion caused by
electolosis (Dissimilar materials). There is a large choice of control lines materials from 316ss for
sweet service to Inconel and Elgiloy alloys for more demanding service. They are also supplied in
hard durable plastic coatings for added protection from corrosion and against crush ing damage
during installation, which at one time was one of the major problems during completing. Two lines
can be encased for operation of dual-control line safety valves.
Control lines are held flat to the tubing by control line protectors usually placed across a coupling
or connection and sometimes also in the middle of a joint. The protector has a slot into which the
control line plastic outer coating fits. Simple banding can be used but it is not strong and is easily
ripped off. Protectors are now metal clamp types as earlier rubber versions were easily detached
and caused major problems while retrieving the completion string.

2.10.8 Tubing
The purpose of using tubing in a well is to convey the produced fluids from the producing zone to
the surface, or in some cases to convey fluids from the surface to the producing zone. It should
continue to do this effectively, safely and economically for the life of the well, so care must be
taken in its selection, protection and installation.
The tubing must retain the well fluids and keep them out of the annulus to protect the casing from
corrosion and well pressure which may be detrimental to future well operations such as
workovers.
Tubing connections play a vital part in the function of the tubing. There are two types of
connection available today; API and premium connections. API connections are tapered thread
connections and rely on thread compound to affect a seal whereas the premium thread has at
least one metal-to-metal seal. Premium connections are generally used in high pressure wells.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 67 of 465

of 4658
Tubulars up to and including 4 /2“ are classified as tubing, over 41/2“ is casing. In large capacity
1

wells, casing size tubulars are often installed as the production conduit.
Tubing selection is governed by several factors. Anticipated well peak production rate, depth of
well, casing sizes, well product, use of wireline tools and equipment, pressures, temperatures, and
tubing/annulus differential pressures are among those which must be considered.
To meet various completion designs, there is a wide range of tubing sizes, wall thickness (weights)
and materials to provide resistance to tubing forces and differing well environments. The best
tubing selection is the cheapest tubing which will meet the external, internal and longitudinal
forces it will be subjected to, and resist all corrosive fluids in the well product.
Tubing in the main is supplied in accordance to API specifications which has a range of materials to
resist most of the potential corrosive well conditions but today where deeper high pressure sour
reservoirs are being developed, the API range is not suitable. To fill this gap in the market steel
suppliers provide propriety grades. These grades are usually high chrome steels designed for
various high temperature and sour well conditions up to 24% chrome.
For ease of identification, tubing is colour coded to API specification. Some specialist supplier's
steels are not covered by the code and provide their own specific codes. Refer to these codes to
ensure the tubing is according to requirements.

2.10.9 Tubing Hangers

Bowl Type Tubing Head/Mandrel Type Tubing Hanger

A Tubing Head/Tubing Hanger combination unit is attached to the uppermost casing head on the
wellhead. The main functions of this unit are to:
Suspend the tubing
Seal the annular space between the tubing and the casing
Lock the tubing hanger in place
Provide a base for the wellhead top assembly (Xmas Tree)
Provide access to the annular space (‘A’ annulus).

Suspension of the tubing is accomplished usually by threads, slips or any other suitable device, i.e.
rams.
The tubing head consists of a spool piece type housing where the internal profile of the top
section is a straight or tapered cylindrical receptacle (bowl) into which the tubing hanger is landed,
suspending the tubing and sealing off the volume between the tubing and the casing. A tapered
mandrel type tubing hanger system is shown in
Figure .
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 68 of 465

of 4658
The important features of tubing hanger spools are:

Top and Bottom

Connections the size and pressure ratings of these connections (usually flanged) must be
compatible with the size and pressure rating of the joining connections.
Upper Bowl provides the seal area for various tubing hangers and a load shoulder to
support the production tubing.
Lower Bowl this is provided to house some type of isolation seal.
Set Screws or hold-down screws are found in most tubing heads and have two important
functions.
Retain the tubing hanger and prevent any upward tubing movement
due to pressure surges.
Activate (energise) the body seals on the tubing hanger.

Outlets these provide access to the annulus (e.g. for pressure monitoring or gas lift)
during production.
Test Port permits the pressure testing of the hanger seal assembly, lockdown screw
packing connection between flanges, and the secondary (isolation) seal.

The important features of tubing hangers are:

Landing Threads these are the uppermost threads on the hanger and they must support the
entire weight of the tubing string during landing operations.
Bottom Threads these must support the entire weight of the tubing string and seal the
producing conduit from the tubing/casing annulus.
Sealing Area these provide compression type sealing between the outside diameter of the
hanger body and the inside diameter of the hanger bowl. Sealing is
accomplished by energising elastomer seals or metal-to-metal seals by the
action of tubing weight on various load-bearing surfaces.
Tubing hangers are sized according to the upper bowl of the tubing head and
the tubing size the hanger will be supporting. Thus, a 7” x 2 7/8” tubing hanger
means a 27/8” production string suspended from a tubing head 7 1/16” top
bowl.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 69 of 465

of 4658
Ram Type Tubing Head
Ram Type Tubing Heads find their application in completions where manipulation of the tubing is
necessary to locate and latch into a packer and to maintain tension in the tubing when landed.

Figure shows a ram type tubing head that comprises a housing with two side outlets in which are
located retractable rams. These rams, when closed, support the hanger nipple, which is screwed
on to the top of the tubing string. A seal assembly provides the seal between the annulus and the
tubing, which is located around the hanger nipple above the rams.
With the ram type tubing hanger installed on the wellhead and the packer set, production tubing
is run and spaced out so that the final position of the hanger nipple is that distance below the
tubing head corresponding to the amount of stretch required to give the appropriate tension. The
tubing is latched into the packer and tension applied to the tubing so that the hanger nipple is just
above its final hang off position. The rams are closed, the tubing weight is set on the rams and the
handling string removed. The seal assembly is then installed, bolted down, and the seal system
energised by the injection of plastic packing. Finally, the BOPs are removed and the Xmas Tree
installed.

NOTE: Like mandrel type hangers, landing nipple hangers are provided with a top
thread for the landing joint, an internal left hand thread or wireline profile
for the installation of a back pressure valve, and can be supplied with
extended necks to facilitate secondary sealing. Also, ram type tubing heads
are available with control line outlets to allow an SCSSV to be incorporated
in the tubing string.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 70 of 465

of 4658

Figure 2.21- Cameron ‘F’ Tubing Head and Hangers

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 71 of 465

of 4658
The disadvantages of ram type tubing hangers are:
After long service periods, it may be difficult to re-open the rams
The tubing pick-up weight must be overcome prior to opening the rams otherwise the
rams will be difficult to open
They are bulky, heavy and expensive.

Figure 2.22 - Cameron Single Ram Tubing Head (‘SRT’)

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 72 of 465

of 4658
Multiple Tubing Heads/Hangers
The purpose of a multiple completion is to produce reservoirs simultaneously without any
pressure or reservoir fluid combining during the transfer of fluid from the production zones to the
production facilities.
For multiple string completions two or three segments, one for each production string, are used to
form a hanger assembly which, when installed in the appropriate tubing head, resembles a
mandrel type tubing hanger. Figure shows a tubing hanger spool arrangement for use in a dual
completion. An important characteristic of this tubing hanger is the support wedges (or in other
heads support pins) used to guide and align the two segmented hangers in their proper positions
in the upper bowl. The segmented hangers are locked in place with the tie-down screws. A
disadvantage of this type of hanger is that seals are often damaged while installing the second
segment.

NOTE: Segmented hangers are available to accommodate a backpressure valve and

are also manufactured with control line outlets to allow an SCSSV to be
installed in the production tubing.

Figure 2.23 – Tubing Hanger Spool

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 73 of 465

of 4658
2.11 WELLHEADS
2.11.1 Tubing Heads
At the drilling stage, casing is run and cemented in a well to line the well to protect against
collapse of the borehole, to prevent unwanted leakage into or from rock formations and to
provide a concentric bore for future operations. Various strings of casing are run, i.e. conductor,
surface string (which provides a base for the wellhead) followed by one or more intermediate
strings depending on the target depth and expected conditions in the well. At the completion
stage, production tubing is run to act as a flowline between the formation and surface. Unlike
casing, production tubing is not cemented in the hole so the entire tubing weight must be
supported by a suspension system suitably installed in a tubing head. The tubing head is
positioned on top of the uppermost casing head of a well and is used to suspend the production
tubing and to produce an effective seal between tubing and casing.
Tubing heads are composed of a body, a hanger-sealing device (tubing hanger), and a mechanism
that retains the hanger.
Figure shows a typical modern compact wellhead.
The wellhead equipment installed on top of the tubing head serves to control and directs the flow
of well fluids from the production tubing string. Surface equipment may range from a simple flow
cross with stuffing box to an elaborate Xmas tree. Choice of surface tree depends on well fluid
production method (natural flow or artificial) and the wellhead pressure encountered. In general,
most surface trees are comprised of at least one master valve, at least two wing or flow valves
(one of which may be hydraulically operated), and one swab valve utilised in wireline operations.
(Refer to Figure ).
Wellhead equipment (spools, valves, chokes) are either screwed, flanged or a combination of
both. Wellheads with screwed connections are used for pressures not exceeding 1,000p si. (69
bar); those with screwed valves and chokes not exceeding 5,000psi. (345bar). However, most
operators specify flanged connections, even for low pressure wellheads since they are less
susceptible to leakage, easier orientated and, especially in the larger sizes, easier manipulated.

NOTE: API test pressures for all wellhead, including pressure control equipment
and downhole equipment, is twice the rated working pressure for
equipment up to 5,000psi and 11/2 times working pressure for 5,000psi and
above.

With regard to subsea wellheads, there is no API standard and manufacturers all have their own
specific design that includes some means of orientation in order to align the subsea tree inlets and
outlets to the flowlines or indeed in a subsea manifold system.
SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 74 of 465

of 4658

Figure 2.24 - Typical Compact Wellhead

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 75 of 465

of 4658

NOTES PAGE
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 76 of 465

of 4658

3 CHRISTMAS (XMAS) TREE

As already described, a Xmas Tree is an assembly of valves and fittings used to control the
flow of tubing fluids at surface, provide access to the production tubing and on some subsea
completions to provide access to the annulus string. In general, a Xmas Tree is essentially a
manifold of valves, installed as a unit on top of a tubing head or subsea wellhead.
The range of trees available is wide, and are not all addressed in this manual. However the valve
layout of surface Xmas trees is similar throughout and typically contains the following valves and
features:

Lower Master Valve (LMV)

The Lower Master Valve is utilised on all Xmas trees to shut in a well. This valve is usually operated
manually. As its name implies, the master is the most important valve on the Xmas tree. When
closed, this valve should keep the well pressure under full control and therefore should be in
optimum condition - it should never be used as a working valve.
In moderate to high-pressure wells, Xmas trees are often furnished with a valve actuator system
for automatic or remote controlled operation (i.e. surface safety valve system). This is often a
regulatory requirement in sour gas or high-pressure wells.

Upper Master Valve (UMV)

The Upper Master Valve is used on moderate to high pressure wells as a emergency shut-in
system where the valve should be capable of cutting at least 7/32“ braided wireline. This valve can
be actuated pneumatically or hydraulically. The UMV valve is a surface safety valve and is normally
connected to an emergency shut-down (ESD) system.

Flow Wing Valve (FWV)

The Flow Wing Valve permits the passage of well fluids to the choke valve. This valve can be
operated manually or automatically (pneumatic or hydraulic) depending on whether a surface
safety system is to be included in the production wing design.

Choke Valve
The Choke Valve is used to restrict, control or regulate the flow of hydrocarbons to the production
facilities. This valve is operated manually or automatically and may be of the fixed (positive) or
adjustable type. It is the only valve on the Xmas tree that is used to control flow. It is sometimes
located downstream at the production manifold.

NOTE: All other valves used on Xmas trees are invariably of the gate valve type
providing full bore access to the well. These valves must be operated in the
fully open or closed position.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 77 of 465

of 4658
Kill Wing Valve
The Kill Wing Valve permits entry of kill fluid into the completion string and also for pressure
equalisation across tree valves e.g. during wireline operations or prior to the removal/opening of a
sub-surface safety valve. This valve is usually manually operated.
Swab Valve
The Swab Valve permits vertical entry into the well for wireline (e.g. running BHP/BHT gauges,
tubing conditioning) or for well interventions such as coiled tubing operations and logging. This
valve is operated manually.

Xmas Tree Cap

The Xmas Tree Cap provides the appropriate connection for well control equipment when
conducting well interventions and is installed directly above the swab valve.
The Xmas Tree cap normally includes a quick union type connection and should be strong enough
to support the well control equipment. The bore of the cap flange should be compatible with the
tree and permit the running of service tools. Sometimes the cap is removed and replaced by
tertiary well control equipment. (e.g. Shear Seal)

Figure 3.1 - Typical Surface Xmas Tree

SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 78 of 465

of 4658

Figure 3.2 -Example Composite Xmas Tree

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 79 of 465

of 4658
3.1 PRECAUTIONS WHEN OPERATING TREE VALVES
Do not overtighten manual tree valves during opening or closing. Many types have a shear pin
between the handle and stem, which will shear if excessive force is applied. This is designed to
protect the valve’s internal components.
NEVER USE THE MASTER VALVE TO SHUT A FLOWING WELL, except in an emergency. Use the
swab or wing valves. Each time the gates of the valve shut in a flowing well, the increase in
velocity of the well fluids during the closing action can cause wear across the seal faces. It is much
easier and safer to replace the seats and gates in valves further upstream, rather than the master
valve in the tree.
Count the number of turns on manual valves when opening them, so that you know how many
turns are required when closing. This is a standard check to ensure against trapping the
toolstring or wire in the tree, in the event that the tools have not been raised fully into the
lubricator.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 80 of 465

of 4658

NOTES
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 81 of 465

of 4658

NOTES
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 82 of 465

of 4658

4 SAFETY ONSHORE/OFFSHORE

Figure 4.1 - Wireline Surface Equipment Rig-up

4.1 ZONE SYSTEM

Zone 0 – (Yellow area) – Area in which flammable gases could be expected to occur on a
regular basis.
Zone 1 – Area in which flammable gases could be expected to occur occasionally.
Zone 2 – Area in which flammable gases would rarely occur.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 83 of 465

of 4658
4.2 CONTROL OF SUBSTANCES HAZARDOUS TO HEALTH (COSHH)

4.2.1 Ill Health and Hazardous Substances at Work

Every year exposure to hazardous substances at work affects the health of many thousands o f
people. The results can be discomfort, pain, time off work and, all too often, premature retirement
and early death. Some common examples are:
Long term disability from lung disease following years of work in industry conditions.
Injuries to hands and eyes from contact with corrosive liquids.
Death or injury from exposure to toxic fumes - damage can be caused by the fumes and by
falling after losing consciousness.

Apart from the pain and suffering, there is also a high economic price to be paid for all this
occupation ill health. The workers and their families lose earnings. Employers lose money from
reduced productivity and lost production. Accidents cause disruption. Prosecutions and civil
actions can be very expensive. The nation as a whole has to pay for the sickness benefit and Health
care involved.
4.2.2 COSHH Regulations
The COSHH Regulations provide a framework to help protect personnel in the workplace against
health risks from hazardous substances. Some examples of such substances were given above.
There are many others. They may be used directly in the work, like paints, cleaning materials and
chemical reagents, or they may arise from the work, like dusts, fumes and waste products. Others
occur naturally, such as fungal spores in agriculture.
COSHH lays down a sensible step-by-step approach to the necessary precautions. It sets out
essential measures that employers, and sometimes employees have to take, but it is better to look
at COSHH as a useful tool of good management. In a recent HSE survey, employers who put real
effort into making COSHH work reported many benefits from doing so. For example, they had
saved money from tighter control over the use and storage of materials, through staff training on
COSHH and led to better understanding of health & safety, improved morale and industrial
relations.
All employers have to consider how COSHH affects their business. Many are able to comply with
the regulations with little trouble, while others whose work involves greater risks have more to
comply with.

4.2.3 Hazard and Risk

The words hazard and risk are used often in this section. They have special meanings in the
regulations and guidance about substances at work. The difference between them is important for
a correct understanding of COSHH.
4.2.4 Hazard
The hazard presented by a substance is its potential to cause harm. It may cause coughing,
damage to internal organs or even cause death. Some substances can cause harm in several ways,
by breathing, swallowing or absorption through the skin.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 84 of 465

of 4658
4.2.5 Risk
The risk from a substance is the likelihood that it will cause harm during use. This depends on:
The hazard presented by the substance
How it is used
Control of exposure
Quantity exposed to
Length of exposure
Personal vulnerability.

There can be a substantial risk even from a substance that is not particularly hazardous, if
exposure is excessive. With proper precautions, however, the risk of being harmed by even the
most hazardous of substances can be very small.
In the offshore oil and gas industry wireline personnel will be exposed to various chemicals at
some time. It is essential that assessment/chemical data sheets be available prior to work
commencing.

4.2.6 Complying with COSHH

Complying with COSHH involves:
Assessing the risks to health arising from your work
Deciding what precautions are needed. Work must not be carried out, which may expose
employees to hazardous substances unless both the risks and necessary precautions
have been assessed, it will be unlikely that the correct precautions have been taken
Preventing or controlling the risks. The advice in this leaflet, and in the other guidance it
refers to, will help you get the assessment right, but remember that even a perfect
assessment achieves nothing unless its conclusions are put into practice
Ensuring that control measures are used and maintained properly, and that any safety
procedures that have been laid down are followed
Monitoring the exposure of workers to hazardous substances and carrying out appropriate
health surveillance, where necessary
Informing, instructing and training employees about the risks and the precautions required

4.2.7 Assessment
Assessment means identifying the hazards, weighing up the risks and deciding what further action
is required.
Only by such a systematic approach can it be ensured the protection of the health of personnel
who may be harmed by work activities. Piecemeal efforts are likely to be costly and waste effort
without achieving the correct results.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 85 of 465

of 4658
4.2.8 Who Carries Out the Assessment
The responsibility for the assessment rests with safety management even when others do some or
even most of the work of preparing the assessment. Whoever carries out the assessment will need
to:
Have access to the COSHH Regulations and appropriate Approved Codes of Practice.
Understand the requirements of those Regulations and Codes of Practice.
Have the ability and authority to get all the necessary information and to make correct
decisions about the risk and the precautions needed.

If it has been concluded that there is no likelihood of risk to health, or any risk is insignificant, the
assessment is complete and no further action is needed (until review of the assessment). If it is
concluded that there are risks to health, it has to be decided what else is needed to comply fully
with the regulations.

4.2.9 Recording and Reviewing the Assessment

Unless assessment is so simple that it can easily be recalled and the conclusions explained at any
time, it should be put it in writing. Sufficient information should be included to show how
decisions about risks and precautions were arrived at and to make it clear to your employees and
others what role they have to play in the precautions.
The assessment should be reviewed regularly, at intervals of no less than 5 years duration,
whenever there is reason to believe that it is no longer valid or where there has been a significant
change in the work. It should be stated in the assessment when the next review is intended.

4.3 H2S GAS

4.3.1 Dangers of H2S Gas

There is always a risk that wireline personnel may be exposed to H 2S contained in well fluids. It is
vitally important that company personnel understand the operating procedures to prevent
exposure and the consequences of any exposure. To help understand the risk, there follows a
description of the properties and dangers of exposure to H2S.
Properties and dangers of H2S gas:
H2S is a highly toxic (as dangerous as cyanide), flammable, colourless gas heavier than air
with the odour of rotten eggs.
Even very low concentrations impairs the sense of smell, quickly causes unconsciousness and
kills.
Be aware of the hazards and the proper precautions to avoid its effects.
H2S concentrations greater than 10 parts per million are dangerous.
H2S dangerously corrodes equipment not designed for H2S (sour) service.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 86 of 465

of 4658

4.3.2 Where H2S May be Found

At any well site.
In the yard, when breaking down equipment even if the equipment has come from sweet
field due to the effects of sulphate reducing bacteria.
In laboratories.

4.3.3 Precautions against H2S

In the absence of any other information, always assume H 2S is likely to be present. In areas
where there is a risk of H2S being present, either portable or fixed H2S detection
equipment must be used.
In well test operations a check for H2S will be carried out and reported as soon as reservoir
fluids reach surface. Regular subsequent checks will be carried out and reported.
Should the presence of H2S be established, supervisors must be informed so that action can
be taken to control the risk.
Persons in areas of risk must withdraw to a safe area, generally upwind in an elevated
position.
In established H2S areas, breathing apparatus and resuscitators must be available.
Personnel must familiarise themselves with the locally available breathing apparatus and
resuscitators.

PPM %
1 .0001 Can Smell.
10 .001 Allowable exposure - 8 Hours.
Danger
Level 100 .01 Kills smell in 3-15 mins - burns eyes
and throat.
500 .05 Loses sense of reasoning and balance.
Respiratory disturbances in 2-15
minutes.
700 .07 Becomes unconscious quickly.
1000 .1 Unconscious at once. Permanent brain
damage may result.
Table 4.2 -Toxicity Table

4.3.1 Control
As with other hazardous substances, safe working with H 2S is controlled by the Control of
Substances Hazardous to Health (COSHH) Regulations. Company Health and Safety System N0. 802
- Hydrogen Sulphide, details the procedures that have to be followed to control exposure to H 2S.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 87 of 465

of 4658
4.4 MANUAL HANDLING

4.4.1 Lifting Techniques

AVOID UN-NECESSARY INJURY, GET INTO THE KINETIC LIFTING HABIT.
Here are some important points, using a basic lifting operation as an example.
a) Stop and think
Plan the lift. Where is the load to be placed? Use appropriate aids if
possible. Do you need help with the load? Remove obstructions such as
discarded wrapping materials. For a long lift, such as floor to shoulder
height, consider resting the load mid-way on a table or bench in order to
change grip.

b) Position the feet

Feet apart, giving balanced and stable base for lifting (tight skirts and
unsuitable footwear make this difficult). Leading leg as far forward as is
comfortable.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 88 of 465

of 4658
c) Adopt a good posture
When lifting from a low level, bend the knees. But do not kneel or
overflex the knees. Keep the back straight (tucking in the chin helps).
Lean forward a little over the load if necessary to get a good grip. Keep
the shoulders level and facing the same direction as the hips.

d) Get a firm grip

Try to keep the arms within the boundary formed by the legs. The best
position and type of grip depends on the circumstances and individual
preference; but it must be secure. A hook grip is less tiring than keeping
the fingers straight. If you need to vary the grip as the lift proceeds, do it
is smoothly as possible.

e) Keep close to the load

Keep the load close to the trunk for as long as possible. Keep the heaviest side of the load next to
the trunk. If a close approach to the load is not possible, slide it towards you before trying to lift.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 89 of 465

of 4658
f) Don’t jerk
Lift smoothly, keeping control of the load.
g) Move the feet
Don’t twist the trunk when turning to the side.
h) Put down, then adjust
If precise positioning of the load is necessary, put it down first, then slide into the desired position.
i) Individual capability
For the working population the guideline weights will give reasonable protection to nearly all men
and between one-half and two-thirds of women. To provide similar protection to nearly all
working women, reduce the guideline weights by about a third.
Any operation involving more than twice the guideline weights should be rigorously a ssessed -
even for very fit, well-trained individuals working under favourable conditions.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 90 of 465

of 4658

CAUTION: The guidelines are not precise weights. Use them with caution. If in doubt,
make a more detailed assessment.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 91 of 465

of 4658
4.5 THE PERMIT TO WORK SYSTEM

4.5.1 Safe Working System

The purpose of the Permit To Work system (PTW) is to achieve a safe working environment by
providing management control over the various activities which may have hazardous interactions.
The system has four key features:
It limits the potentially harmful effects of the actions of the person doing the work, by
specifying safety precautions and setting limits to the duration and extent of the work
It allows those responsible for overall Installation safety to be aware of the various
hazardous activities and to take a systematic overview which identifies interactions
and allows priorities to be set for conflicting work tasks
It encourages formal and careful attention to safe systems of working, by requiring the
signature of specified individuals who must confirm that all hazards have been
identified and effective precautions taken
It encourages those responsible for overall site safety to plan the carrying out of tasks so
that minimal inconvenience and interference is caused to other tasks or production.

The PTW system requires the involvement of competent and responsible persons as well as the
application of particular safety measures in a controlled sequence. The PTW system ensures that
responsibility and accountability for safe working practices is passed in a logical sequence to those
responsible for the work being carried out at any given time, and ensures that specified effective
safeguards are provided.
4.5.2 Overview of the Permit To Work System
The PTW system requires the allocating of a task to one of the following categories:
Hot Work (Naked Flame)
Hot Work (Spark Potential)
Cold Work (Well Intervention)
Cold Work (General Operation)
No Permit Required.
Supplementary certificates may be required to augment the PTW when specialist activities are
performed in conjunction with a task. While separate from the PTW, they are clearly cross-
referenced on each document.
Confirmation of isolation
Entry.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 92 of 465

of 4658

4.5.3 Permits To Work

Hot Work (Naked Flame) Permit

a) Activities Covered
A Hot Work (Naked Flame) Permit is required if the task involves the use of a flame or other
source of ignition. For example:
Electrical welding
Flame cutting
Electrical induction pre-heating/stress relieving
Use of heat shrink blowers
Grinding.

b) Colour
The Hot Work (Naked Flame) Permit is red in colour.

c) Period of Validity
The Hot Work (Naked Flame) Permit is valid for a continuous period of up to 24 hours.
Revalidation is required every 12 hours or at a shift change.

d) Signatories
The Hot Work (Naked Flame) Permit must be approved by the Permit Officer or his appointed
deputy.

e) Copies
There are two copies of each Hot Work (Naked Flame) Permit. They are distributed as follows:
Original Performing Authority, for display at worksite
First Copy Permit office.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 93 of 465

of 4658
Hot Work (Spark Potential) Permit

a) Activities Covered
A Hot Work (Spark Potential) Permit is required if the task may produce or expose a possible
source of ignition. For example:

Use of non-certified electrical/electronic equipment (megger, avometer, battery drills,

power tools, etc.)
Opening live junction boxes
Use of air or hydraulic powered metal cutting, chipping or caulking tools
Use of electrical soldering irons
Use of explosives and perforating guns
Use of powered steel wire brushes
Dry grit/shot blasting
Use of battery powered camera with/without flash
Needle gunning.

b) Colour
The Hot Work (Spark Potential) Permit is green in colour.

c) Period of Validity
The Hot Work (Spark Potential) Permit is valid for a continuous period of up to 72 hours.
Revalidation is required every 12 hours or at a shift change.

d) Signatories
The Hot Work (Spark Potential) Permit must be approved by the Permit Officer or his appointed
deputy.

e) Copies
There are two copies of each Hot Work (Spark Potential) Permit. They are distributed as follows:
Original Performing Authority, for display at worksite.
First Copy Permit office.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 94 of 465

of 4658
Cold Work (Well Intervention) Permit

a) Activities Covered
A Cold Work (Well Intervention) Permit is required for a task which may not involve hot work but
still has a high risk potential. For example:
Well servicing/wireline/coiled tubing/ logging operations.

b) Colour
The Cold Work (Well Intervention) Permit is yellow in colour.

c) Period of Validity
The Cold Work (Well Intervention) Permit is valid for continuous period of up to 24 hours.
Revalidation is required every 12 hours or at a shift change.

d) Signatories
The Cold Work (Well Intervention) Permit must be approved by the Permit Officer or his appointed
deputy.

e) Copies
There are two copies of each Cold Work (Well Intervention) Permit. They are distributed as
follows:
Original Performing Authority, for display at worksite.
First Copy Permit Office.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 95 of 465

of 4658

Cold Work (General Operation) Permit

a) Activities Covered
A Cold Work (General Operation) Permit is required for work which does not fall into the
preceding categories of Permit, yet still requires to be covered by a Permit.
For example:
Brush painting operations
General maintenance
Erection and dismantling of scaffolds
Work on isolated electrical equipment
Installation of instrumentation pipework, cables and termination’s (no live tie-ins)
Wet shot/grit blasting
Any work affecting the integrity or availability of safety or emergency systems e.g., fire
pumps, fire mains, shutdown systems, fire and gas detection
Any repair, construction or overhaul work on communication systems or equipment
Persons(s) being in exposed locations e.g., outboard of handrails, underneath the
Installation, access to flare or derrick, or where persons may fall 2 metres or more
Pressure testing of plant and equipment
Any work inside enclosed or confined spaces including tanks, vessels or non -operational,
non-ventilated areas where hazardous concentrations of toxic or flammable gases,
fumes or vapours might arise or where the oxygen content of the air could be reduced
to below 20% by volume or an excess of oxygen may be present
Work involving use of certified personnel work baskets
Removal of handrails, gratings, ladders, etc.
Chemical cleaning
Handling of hazardous substances e.g., radioactive sources, toxic/corrosive chemicals,
asbestos, etc.
High pressure water jetting
Spraying of paint
Heavy lifts, e.g. over wellheads
Specialised rigging operations
Any out of the ordinary activity.

b) Colour
The Cold Work (General Operation) Permit is blue in colour.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 96 of 465

of 4658
c) Period of Validity
The Cold Work (General Operation) Permit is valid for a continuous period of up to 72 hours.
Revalidation is required every 12 hours or at a shift change.

d) Signatories
The Cold Work (General Operation) Permit must be signed by the Permit Officer or his
appointed deputy.

e) Copies
There are two copies of each Cold Work (General Operation) Permit. They are
distributed as follows:
Original Performing Authority, for display at worksite.
First Copy Permit office.

No Permit Required
a) Activities Covered
Under certain circumstances the Permit Officer may allow work to be carried out in his area of
control without the issue of a Permit. The discretion to use this facility lies entirely with the Permit
Officer. The decision must be taken only after deliberate consideration of the circumstances.
The Permit Officer may give a verbal instruction or use a Maintenance Request form to allow work
to be carried out by suitably competent persons.
The work must not be hazardous to either the person who carries it out or to anyone else, and the
Permit Officer must be satisfied that all reasonably practicable steps have been taken to ensure
the safety of those involved, and anyone else that the work might affect.
Activities covered may include:
Routine materials handling
Routine work in offices
General cold work inside workshops
Visual inspection of areas (not including confined spaces)
Operating or demonstrating portable fire-fighting equipment or life saving appliances during
drills or training.

b) Workshop Operations
At his discretion the Permit Officer may issue, in the form of a memorandum, standing orders to
cover operations in workshops. Such orders can be valid only for designated workshops and the
authorised use of permanent facilities provided in the workshops. The order should be
prominently displayed in the workshops to which it refers. The memorandum should include
specific precautions and conditions to be observed.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 97 of 465

of 4658
4.5.4 Supplementary Certificate

Isolation Confirmation Certificate

a) Activities Covered
Before a Permit to Work can be issued for a task it may be necessary for the equipment or plant to
be worked on to be isolated. The Isolation Confirmation Certificate (ICC) combines on one
document a record of all the isolations required for a task to proceed in safety. The equipment
may require isolation from:
Sources of electricity
Process fluids and pressure
Mechanical drive
Control systems.

The ICC ensures that the isolations are applied and documented in a thorough, systematic manner.

b) Period of Validity
The ICC is raised before the Permit to Work is issued, and it remains in force at least until the
Permit to Work is cancelled. The ICC will only be cancelled upon the cancellation declaration being
signed by the Area Authority.

c) Signatories
The ICC must be signed by the Permit Officer or his deputy and each of the involved Isolating
Authorities. The Permit Officer signs for isolations to be applied or removed and to certify that the
plant is available for return to normal operations.
The Isolating Authorities sign for each isolation they apply and remove.

d) Copies
There are two copies of each ICC. One copy is retained by the issuing Isolating Authority, the
second copy is given to the Permit Office.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 98 of 465

of 4658
Entry Certificate

a) Activities Covered
An Entry Certificate must be issued when it is necessary for personnel to enter vessels, tanks,
sumps, structural members and enclosed void spaces. Adequate safety precautions must be taken
to prevent anyone who enters these confined spaces from suffering harm or injury.
The purpose of the Entry Certificate is to certify the atmospheric conditions inside the confined
space and stipulate the level or precautions while work is being carried out. The Entry Certificate
does not permit any work to be carried out. The appropriate Permit to Work must be raised
before any task can be undertaken.
The Entry Certificate only allows visual inspection by the Authorised Gas Tester Level 1 to be done
within the space.

b) Period of Validity
The Entry Certificate is valid for an indefinite period subject to gas retest which will be carried out
at a maximum interval of 12 hours. The Permit Officer or Authorised Gas Tester may stipulate a
more frequent retest if conditions dictate.

c) Signatories
The Entry Certificate must be signed by the Permit Officer.

d) Copies
There are two copies of each Entry Certificate. They are distributed as follows:
Original Performing Authority, for display at worksite
First Copy Permit office.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 99 of 465

of 4658
4.5.5 Definition of Personnel and Responsibilities
Everyone involved on a site or Installation, including owners, employers, contractors and workers,
may have responsibilities under Permit to Work procedures. It is important that each individual
knows what his own responsibilities and duties are and carries them out properly.
Paragraph 10 Oil Industry Advisory Committee 'A Guide to Principles and Operations of Permit
to Work Procedures'.

a) Permit Officer (PO)

The Permit Officer is responsible for ensuring that written procedures and systems for Permits to
Work are in place. He is responsible for ensuring the competence of relevant personnel to carry
out the functions of the Permit to Work System.
The Permit Officer must approve all Hot Work (Naked Flame), Hot Work (Spark Potential), Cold
Work (Well Intervention) and Entry Certificates.
The Permit Officer may delegate the signing of Cold Work (General Operation) Permits.

b) Performing Authority
The Performing Authority is the senior person actually in charge of the task on a continuous basis,
who is present on the site during the work.
The Performing Authority is responsible for and signs the Permit to acknowledge that both he/she
and his/her men will:
Comply with the conditions specified on the Permit.
Use the protective equipment specified on the Permit.

The Performing Authority signs the Permit at the end of the task to certify:

The status of the task specified on the Permit.

That all his workforce has been withdrawn from the worksite.
That the worksite has been left safe and clean.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 100 of 465

of 4658
c) Isolating Authority
An Isolating Authority is appointed by the Permit Officer and is responsible for the application and
removal of isolations under an ICC. The Isolating Authority carries out his duties under the
instructions of the Permit Officer. His expertise in his particular discipline will enable him to advise
the Permit Officer as to the isolations required for an ICC or Sanction to Test. His discipline can be:
Mechanical
Electrical
Process
Control.

d) Permit Clerk (PC)

The Permit Clerk (PC) is appointed by the Permit Officer. He/she is responsible for maintaining an
up to date register of all active Permits and Certificates.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 101 of 465

of 4658
4.5.6 Procedure for Completing a Permit to Work Form
The detailed procedures involved in completing the various sections of the Permit to Work forms
are set out in the following subsections. The sequence of compiling a Permit to Work form is
summarised below.

Section
Action By Action to be Taken
Number

Ensures that Section 1 is completed giving sufficient

PERFORMING
1 information for subsequent personnel to assess the task. Dates
AUTHORITY
the anticipated time frame for the task then signs the section.

Indicates the hazard potential in the equipment, tools, work

2. PERMIT OFFICER
area and adjacent or associated work.

Specifies the type of protective clothing to be worn and

3. PERMIT OFFICER
equipment to be carried whilst the task is undertaken.

Lists the Supplementary Certificates raised in connection with

4. PERMIT OFFICER
the Permit.

5. PERMIT OFFICER Specifies whether or not scaffolding should be used.

PERMIT OFFICER Examines and signs to approve the Permit.

PERMIT OFFICER
Formal handover to Performing Authority, after worksite
6. AND PERFORMING
inspection for Red and Yellow Permits.
AUTHORITY

The Permit is entered into the Permit Office Register,

Permit
PERMIT CLERK Inhibitions instituted, and Permit Number entered on the
Registry
Permit form.

PERFORMING Statement of completion or non-completion of task and

7.
AUTHORITY worksite inspection with Permit Officer.

Acceptance by Permit Officer of state of completion task and

PERMIT OFFICER worksite inspection. Declaration that systems where applicable
can be returned to normal operation.

8. PERMIT CLERK Completes Permit Office Register.

It should be remembered that persons signing the Work Permit are acknowledging personal
responsibility for the standard of precautions being undertaken and the safe state of the
equipment and/or worksite.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 102 of 465

of 4658
4.6 GENERAL SAFETY

4.6.1 Safe Working Procedures/Practices

Each employee is responsible for their own actions and those of other personnel around them. A
safe approach to all aspects of your work is essential and should be made a habit.

Think and Plan Ahead

To be able to visualize potential hazards in all working environments, so as to prevent the
occurrence of undesirable or hazardous conditions and situations.

Housekeeping
Keep your work environment clean and tidy.
Respect and maintain the environment in which you work. Dispose of waste correctly.
Stairways, passages and escape routes must be kept clear at all times.

Personal Protective Equipment should be used as required and when appropriate.

Hard hats are an approved type.
Overalls or suitable work clothing.
Safety boots.
Eye protection.
Ear muffs.
Work gloves.

Hand Tools

Use the right tools for the task.

Inspect tools before use and report any damaged tools immediately.
Replace all worn parts or tools before use.
Portable power tools must only be used by trained competent personnel.
No electrical tools should be used in an explosive environment unless specifically rated for
such use.
Pneumatic power tools should be used in an explosive environment.
Do not leave tools lying in any place that may pose a hazard to others.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 103 of 465

of 4658
4.7 WIRELINE SAFETY
The wireline unit must always be safely located and properly secured to prevent movement
when a load is supplied.
The wireline unit must be a sufficient distance from the lubricator to enable the operator to
spool wire onto the drum without undue effort. This reduces damage to the rollers and
helps to even respooling.
There must always be at least two wireline personnel present on site during wireline
operations.
Wireline lubricators and BOP rams must be subjected to a pressure test and functional test
prior to wireline operations. (Discussed in Slickline Procedures).
Before using power packs, ensure that the hoses are properly connected to the correct
fittings. For electrical power packs, ensure the motor turns in the correct direction. The
power pack should not be started until the relevant permit has been issued.
The lubricator must be long enough to accommodate the longest toolstring which might be
pulled from the well.
The use of hay pulleys must be kept to a minimum and those in use must be in direct line of
sight of the operator.
Barriers and warning signs must be posted. PA announcements must be made as required to
warn all non-essential personnel to stay clear of the area.
Any hydraulic pumps used to actuate BOPs, the stuffing box etc, must be situated at a
location remote from the wellhead area.
During the period that the wireline is in the hole, all valves in line with the wellbore must be
secured open by a fail-safe system. A responsible person must supervise the remotely
operated control system during wireline operations at all times.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 104 of 465

of 4658
Wireline personnel must be aware of all equipment that has moving parts, including the
wireline drum, moving wire, depth encoder wheel and hay pulleys (particularly the
load cell hay pulley) to ensure that clothing, loose articles etc, do not become trapped
while the line is in motion.

NOTE: Wireline winch must not be operated with safety guards removed or
damaged.

During the period that the wireline is rigged up or in the hole, there must be no crane lifting
operations over, or in close vicinity to, the wireline.
A wireline clamp must be applied whenever the wireline is left static for any length of time
or when work is to be carried out on surface equipment with the wireline in the hole.
When carrying out maintenance on devices which contain springs, the following precautions
must be taken:
1) Work must be properly secured (e.g. in a vice).
2) No person shall be in line with equipment while it is being dismantled.
3) Extra care must be exercised when moving parts appear to be binding or
stuck.
When wireline work is suspended or completed, the well must be left in a safe condition.
The site must also be left in a safe and tidy manner.

a) Lifting Equipment
All lifting equipment used on installations will be certified and a copy of the certificate will be kept
on board. Refer to Operational Guidelines for further information

b) Pressure (Control Equipment)

All pressure control equipment, e.g. lubricator, BOPs, stuffing-box etc. must carry valid
certification and a copy of the certificate will be kept on board. Refer to Operational Guidelines for
further information.

c) Wireline Work in an H2S Environment

Hydrogen Sulphide (H2S) occurs naturally from the decay of organic matter containing sulphur and
is to be found in varying quantities within some oil wells. H 2S is a highly flammable and toxic gas. It
has a distinct smell of rotten eggs up to 20-30 ppm but as the concentration increases the odour
becomes sweetish and the gas diminishes the sense of smell so that at 150 ppm, no smell is
detectable. Therefore, smell is not a reliable guide to its presence.

Whenever wireline work is carried out on H 2S wells, extreme care must be taken.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 105 of 465

of 4658
The following points in particular should be noted:
A pre-work safety briefing must be held in which all departments concerned should be
involved, including, for example, Wireline, Safety, Drilling and Medical.
All persons involved in the work shall be conversant with H 2S procedures for recognition,
escape, and first aid treatment.
Barriers and warning notices must be erected and PA announcements made as appropriate.
A job site H2S monitor will be provided and personnel briefing in its use.
The responsible person planning the work and organising the worksite must be aware of
wind direction and prevailing weather conditions throughout the duration of the job.
A sufficient number of BA sets must be readily available at the worksite.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 106 of 465

of 4658

4.8 WIRELINE OPERATIONAL GUIDELINES

4.8.1 Surface Operations

Introduction
For the purpose of Wireline Operations, safety awareness can be broken down into four main
areas:
Planning
Rig-up and Rig-down Operations
Pressure Testing
In-hole Operations.
The well files and programme should be studied, all information about depths of sub -assemblies,
previous toolstrings, tubing string and sub-assembly IDs should be noted.
Abnormal conditions, tight spots, sand fills, waxing problems, deviation and kick-off points and
position of any previous fish should be identified and highlighted.
Sub-assembly size and type should be noted and Supervisors and Service Personnel must be
familiar with the completion and wireline equipment, SSDs, positioning tools, shear directions, etc.
Tubing ends should be located and the size and depth of the rathole noted.
Complete all the necessary company documentation, obtain all Work Permits, Isolation Permits,
Wireline Intervention Permits etc.
Inspect the Certification Documentation for the Wireline BOP, Lubricator, and Stuffing Box. Only
recently tested and certified equipment should be used. Do not commence any wireline work
without a correctly detailed well schematic in the wireline unit.
The job briefing by the wireline supervisor should describe, in detail, the objectives, the methods,
and the safety requirements. All operatives should indicate that they have fully understood the
brief and that all questions have been answered.

4.8.2 Equipment Location and Layout

Figure 13.1 illustrates a typical surface wireline equipment layout from the Drill Floor to the Pipe
Deck. However, this layout will vary from location to location and equip-ment requirements will
differ, i.e. when equipment is moved from offshore to a land location; the requirement for a
wireline mast, trucks and cranes all have to be considered.
Regardless of the equipment type/layout/location, all personnel must be conversant with basic
safety standards e.g. working dress code, cordoning off wireline areas, and the erection of warning
signs including those pertaining to hazardous zones, fire precautions and clear access; such safety
requirements are laid down in Company Policy. Personnel must also be familiar with the
appropriate emergency procedures.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 107 of 465

of 4658
Wireline units should be adequately anchored; even the heavier skid-mounted and truck-mounted
types should be securely anchored regardless of the operation being performed.
Wireline masts and lubricators should be guyed for stability and safety. Anchoring and guying may
require the use of chains, steel ropes, shackles, bulldog clips, steel bolts and nuts, load binders
(“come alongs”, Tirfor winches) and, where no anchor points exist, pickets and stakes. To ensure
safe operation, these items should be included in sufficient quantities in the back-up equipment to
be dispatched to the work site and certified where needed.

CAUTION: Large and heavy equipment is moved and lifted during rig-up and rig-down
and all personnel must use the correct equipment and remain alert to avoid
accidents. All non-essential personnel must be kept clear of the area and
new/trainee personnel assisting in the work must be fully briefed on the
operation before starting. All platform safety regulations must be fully
complied with, including work permit procedures.

4.8.3 Rig-up/Rig-down Considerations

The following list details the minimum safety requirements for Wireline Operations regardless of
the lifting system used:
The wireline winch must be secured to the deck by certified slings.
The wireline crew are responsible for rigging up/down the wireline lubricators and Chiksan
Lines using only the wireline hoists. The wireline crew have no responsibility for any
other rigging.
Diesel powerpacks must be as far as possible from the lubricator. Operator requires a Hot
Work Permit (HWP).
All hay pulleys must be in direct line of sight of the operator.
The lubricator should be long enough to accommodate the largest toolstring which might be
pulled from the well.
The correct BOPs are to be used, handles attached and hydraulic hoses correctly fitted.
Barriers and warning signs to be in position.
All non-essential personnel are to clear the area.
BOPs are to be stroked to check operation.
Lubricator must have been recently pressure tested.
Remote failsafe control must be in operation.
All production valves to be checked for correct position by production staff. All lubricator
bleeding to closed drain system only.
Determine hay pulley angle to ensure that the correct line pull is obtained.
Ensure that accurate CITHP is available.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 108 of 465

of 4658
4.8.4 Pressure Testing and Pressurising Lubricators
In general, wireline lubricators will be subjected to the following pressure tests:

Full workshop pressure testing; this is a test to verify the material strength. API recommend
1.5 times the manufacturer's maximum working pressure when new. Maximum
working pressure thereafter.
On-site pressure testing; this is a hydrostatic test to maximum expected CITHP + 500
[Link], or maximum CITHP onshore to verify pressure integrity every time the
equipment is rigged up.

NOTE: Some oil companies require annual NDT testing of wireline lubricators,
BOPs, etc. A current NDT certificate has to be produced prior to shipping.

In a workshop test, the lubricator sections are filled with water, sealed at each end with either a
male or female test cap, and installed in a test rig in a test cellar or similar protected location.
Pressure is then applied in stages until full test pressure is achieved (API specify full working
pressure plus 50% for all pressures up to and including 10,000 psi.); this is held for a specified time
before release. The date of the test and pressure applied are stamped on a metal band or tag
attached to the section, and the history card of the item updated.

NOTE: The lubricator section itself must NOT be stamped; it must be stainless steel
banded.

Contractor supplied lubricators should be subjected to a full pressure test before use; these tests
should be recorded on a chart and witnessed by a company representative. This should preferably
be carried out in base workshops where full, safe, test facilities exist. In addition, lubricators
should be tested following installation on the wellhead; normally the pressure will be the expected
CITHP plus a safety margin (See Company Operational Guidelines). During this test, all non-
essential personnel must be cleared from the area and operator(s) implementing the test must be
screened from the danger of flying debris should the lubricator structure fail.
Full pressure testing should always be carried out hydraulically; because of the apparent
incompressibility of the hydraulic test fluid, any rupture which occurs causes immediate loss of
pressure without the explosive dissemination of shock waves and possibly deb ris which would
occur if gas was used.
Following the installation of wireline tools and make-up to the wellhead, the lubricator is leak
tested. A 50/50 freshwater/glycol mixture by volume is adequate for the testing of lubricators only
if mono-ethylene glycol is used, but a 60/40 freshwater/glycol mixture by volume would be better.
The lubricator is normally pressure tested through the open Kill Wing Valve and up through the
Swab Valve which has been partially opened.

NOTE: Wellfluids must NEVER be used for pressure testing.

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 109 of 465

of 4658
It is important that the number of turns required to fully open the swab valve hand wheel is
known, especially in gas wells where hydrates could form and prevent correct valve operation. The
number of turns should always be counted and recorded and the swab valve is closed.
After a successful test, the pressure is bled back to anticipated CITHP plus 100-200 psi. The swab
valve is closed & the UMV is opened. The swab valve is then is opened slowly.
During pressure testing it must be realised that:
Additional equipment will be required e.g. a pump
The fluid must be compatible with the well content if it is to be discharged into the well on
completion of the test; i.e. a water and glycol mix.

NOTE: If water is used for pressure testing it should be realised that in a gas well it
could lead to hydrate formation, in an oil well it could form an emulsion.

NOTE: If water is the only test fluid available, it must either be mixed with glycol to
prevent hydrate formation or be drained off after the test. It must not be
discharged into the well. Ensure that the line to the wellhead is flushed with
water/glycol mix prior to testing the lubricator.

Diesel oil or condensate should not be used.

Care should also be taken to ensure that air is not introduced into the lubricator through a
leaking or partially immersed suction hose when filling the lubricator. Equally, care
should be taken to ensure that any trapped air is bled off.

NOTE: Trapped air should not be present during any hydrostatic pressure test,
regardless of the fluid medium. Apart from the safety aspects, satisfactory
test interpretation becomes more difficult.

NOTE: Should there be a leak, direct high pressure fluid impingement on the skin is
extremely hazardous.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 110 of 465

of 4658
4.8.5 Pressure Testing Wireline BOPs

Blind Rams
The BOP rams are closed and pressure is applied from below by de-pressurising the lubricator.
Pressure is maintained for five minutes. Any pressure build up in the lubricator may be observed
on a gauge or fluid may be observed escaping through an open needle valve fitted above the BOP.

Moulded Insert Rams or High Pressure Segment Type

These can be tested on a live well by running the checking tool string below the BOP, closing the
BOP on the wire, de-pressurising the lubricator, and checking for leaks. On a well with no pressure,
the rams/segments should be closed on a piece of the appropriate sized wire before the lubricator
is stabbed. Pressure can then be introduced below the BOP rams (e.g. via a pump -in tee) again
using a water/glycol mixture.
4.8.6 De-pressurising Lubricators
Following a wireline run, the lubricator will usually contain flammable and/or toxic gas and
therefore care must be taken when de-pressurising. The gas should be disposed of by venting
safely into the production process vent system or closed drain system. If this is not possible and
the gas has to be vented to atmosphere, care must be taken to ensure that there are no personnel
or ignition sources downwind. Whichever method is used and because of the large volume of gas
which may need to be discharged, venting must be a controlled operation.

NOTE: Patience is a virtue in this case. De-pressurisation takes as long as it takes

and one should never attempt to accelerate the process.

NOTE: Equipment must be earthed to prevent ignition by static electricity.

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 111 of 465

of 4658

NOTES
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 112 of 465

of 4658

NOTES
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 113 of 465

of 4658

5 WHAT IS WIRELINE?

5.1 INTRODUCTION
Through all stages of drilling, testing, completion and production, wireline procedures will be used
extensively for work-over, data gathering and operational requirements. Modern wireline
techniques and equipment have developed and improved enormously as the whole oil industry
itself has developed.
Originally, wireline was conceived as an early method of determining the depth of a well
accurately, by lowering a flat section, graduated steel tape into the well from a hand-operated
reel.
As depths increased, the difficulties associated with this technique grew until it was no longer safe
or practicable. The tape was replaced by a circular section of slickline or measuring line, which
allowed superior sealing properties when the survey was performed under well pressure.
The line was marked in equal increments and calibrated measuring wheels introduced. These
‘Veeder Root’ counters are very similar to those in use today. Larger diameter lines were
introduced as new demands on the line, such as removal of deposits; installation and removal of
flow control devices were made. The grade of solid steel line has progressed to the modern line in
use today of +25,000 ft. length and extremely high tensile strength.
Downhole equipment was now being designed with the greater wireline capability in mind. This
equipment included tubing plugs, to enable the tubing to be run and pulled under pressure,
bottom hole chokes for gas wells to prevent freezing of surface flow lines caused by choking at the
surface, running straight hole survey instruments, known as ‘sypho’ and operation of the first
regulated gas lift valve, known as the Nixon valve. The Nixon valve was opened by upward
movement of the slickline, controlled at the surface by timing devices. As the wireline was pulled
upward, tools attached to the lower end opened the valve, allowing the gas to enter the tubing
from the annulus. This early method of gas lift operations was followed by gas lift valves wh ich
could be removed and repaired or adjusted and reset by the use of wireline tools.
The wireline winch unit has developed from a hand-operated reel or motor, driven from the rear
axle of a car, to the modern skid-mounted, self-contained module, driven electrically, mechanically
or hydraulically and fully equipped with tools and wellhead equipment to safely service gas or oil
wells under pressure.
Wireline may be referred to by a number of names. Solid single strand line may be described as:
Slickline
Wireline.

Multistrand wirelines are usually described as braided line.

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 114 of 465

of 4658
As well depths have increased over the years since the first measuring lines were brought into use,
accompanied by increased working loads, it has become necessary to develop wireline having a
high strength/weight ratio.
There is a need for strength to accomplish the operation without the wire breaking, and a need to
keep the diameter of the wire as small as possible for the following reasons:
It reduces the load of its own weight.
It can be run over smaller diameter sheaves, and wound on smaller diameter spools or reels
without overstressing by bending.
It keeps the reel drum size to a minimum.
It provides a small cross-section area for operation under pressure.

The sizes of solid wireline in most common uses are: 0.092ins 0.108ins and 0.125ins diameter, and
are obtainable from the drawing mills in one-piece standard lengths of 18,000, 20,000, 25,000 and
30,000 ft.
However, due to advances in Wireline unit counterheads leading to more accurate depth
correlation, 0.142ins and 0.160ins wirelines are also obtainable for running heavier loads such as
packers and perforators.
The most popular material for wireline is improved plough steel (IPS), because of its high ultimate
tensile strength, good ductility, and relatively low cost. Experience indicates that improved plough
steel usually performs better than the more expensive special steel lines in low corrosive
conditions - although then it must be used with an appropriate inhibitor. For Sweet Wells IPS can
be used with inhibitor for high loads and long service. For Sour Wells IPS can be used with inhibitor
for high loads and short operating time.
When selecting or operating with wireline, various factors, such as the following, have been
considered:
Physical properties
Resistance to corrosion
Effect of bending
Total stress
Care and handling.

Due to the H2S content of many wells special materials such as the ‘SUPA’ range of wirelines have
been developed and manufactured by Bridon Wire, or stainless steel wirelines are used. Although
these are not as strong as IPS, they have an excellent resistance to H2S corrosion.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 115 of 465

of 4658
The following table shows the relative strengths of IPS. (Improved Plough Steel) wire and H 2S
resistant alloy wirelines: General Comparison of Grades.

Strength Relative General Corrosion

Steel Specifications
to API Resistance Rating

Carbon Steel - Bright API-9A API-9A Poor

Drawn Galvanised API-9A API-9A Better

Ultra High Tensile Bridon UHT 25% Higher Poor

Stainless - 304 Type Bridon API-9A Good

316 Type Bridon 10% Lower Better than 304

Supa 60 Bridon 15/20% Lower Excellent

Supa 70 Bridon 5% Higher Excellent

Supa 75 Bridon Similar Better than Supa 70

Table 5.1

Carbon Steel Wires to API-9A

The wire is supplied on steel reels in continuous lengths. Diameter tolerance + 0.001 inch. Torsion
in all cases in accordance with API-9A.
Recommende
Nominal Weight
Nominal Diameter d Minimum Minimum Breaking Load
per 1000 ft
Pulley

Dia Bright UHT Bright

inches lbs inches lbs lbf

0.092 22.69 11.25 1,547 1,980

0.108 31.11 13.00 2,120 2,720

0.125 41.80 15.00 2,840 3,640

Table 5.2
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 116 of 465

of 4658
Stainless Steel and Special Alloys
All stainless steel and Special Alloy wires are supplied on nylon coated steel reels in continuous
lengths, to the following Bridon specifications.
Diameter tolerance + 0.001 inches.
Ductility wraps on own diameter - 8 minimum.

Nominal Recommended Minimum Breaking

Load

Dia. Nett Pulley 304 316 Supa 60 Supa 70 Supa 75

Weight

per 1000 ft Diameter

inches lbs inches lbf lbf lbf lbf lbf

0.092 22.90 11.25 1,550 1,400 1,260 1,600 1470

0.108 31.55 13.00 2,100 1,850 1,720 2,100 2030

0.125 42.26 15.00 2,700 2,500 2,220 2,600 2526

Table 5.3

5.2 BENDING STRESSES

The bending stresses that the line is subjected to are the most common cause of breaking but are
generally the least considered. Bending occurs whenever a line deviates from a straight line
condition, such as when it passes over pulleys or reel drum, or when it is flexed by hand.
It is necessary to employ specific mechanical equipment, such as the reel drum, hay pulley,
stuffing box pulley and measuring wheel, when carrying out wireline operations. Each time the
line passes over a pulley it is subjected to two bending stresses - when it changes from a straight
to a curved path and again when it reverts to a straight path. It is subject to only one when it
leaves the reel drum. So, for each trip in and out of the well, the line probably suffers a minimum
of fourteen bending cycles.

Note: To minimise the effect of bending stresses on the wireline, if significant

jarring has been carried out, the downhole tool will be sheared off. An
amount of wire equal to the complete stressed area is normally cut and
discarded, and a new rope-socket is tied. Running in the Well, re-latching
will allow jarring to resume with a fresh area of wire around the pulleys.
This action will subject a different part of the wireline to bending stresses,
thus preventing a break due to wire fatigue. The partially pulley fatigued
wire is now in the straight line section of the wire below the Wellhead. This
wire will recover most of its original ductility.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 117 of 465

of 4658
5.3 RE-SPOOLING
The life span of any wireline can be extended by using correct spooling procedures. The new wire
should be spooled on to the unit drum with 250-400 lbs strain on it. Five to seven bedding wraps
of carefully aligned wire are recommended to provide a firm base. This also indicates during
subsequent wireline operations that only a small amount of wire remains on the drum if the wire
is used to this level.
With 0.125ins wire and larger, it is becoming common practice to spool the complete drum of wire
the same way as ‘bedding wraps’. This method of spooling will considerably reduce the possibility
of mechanical damage to the wire, which is often evident with the ‘criss-crossing’ method.
Correct procedures for spooling new wire on a reel are shown below to minimise stress in the line.
Always follow the natural curve of the wire.

Figure 5.4 - Re-spooling

5.4 HANDLING AND STORAGE

Although steel wireline has a high strength-to-weight ratio, it still requires proper handling and
storage. IPS should be stored with a lubricant covering over the surface of the wire (i.e. grease,
grease paper).
If not crated, wireline spools should be lifted with a nylon sling to avoid damage to the wire.
When a wireline job is completed, the wire should be lubricated and covered to protect against
corrosion. Oiling is preferable on used wirelines as grease can trap moisture/well fluids in the
drum giving it no chance to evaporate, thus increasing the risk of corrosion.
Alloy wire spools should also be kept covered, as they are not totally immune to corrosive/erosive
atmospheres.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 118 of 465

of 4658
5.5 GENERAL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
1) There is a certain amount of tension in a coil of wire, so when it is unfastened, care should
be taken to make sure that the leading end does not lash out. Ensure that the free end is
always under control.
Ensure that hard hats, safety boots/shoes, coveralls, safety glasses, gloves are worn.
Never carry out flame cutting or welding operations near reels of wireline. Heat or metal spray
coming in contact with the wire could change the condition of the steel significantly and
lead to early failure in use.
Throughout all wireline operations the immediate area around the path of the wire must be
cordoned off.
Damage and abuse may not always be obvious, or the significance be appreciated, and effects are
cumulative. There are three main categories:
Mechanical damage
Corrosion
Wire winding practice.

These are summarised in the following table under fault, cause, result and correction.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 119 of 465

of 4658

Fault and Causes Results Correction

Damage to reels: Wire snapping during Use sling when handling reels or use
unwinding. ramps. Do not drop.
Bending of flanges, distortion of
barrel. Caused by dropping.

Corrosion in store: Under worst conditions there All types of wire: store reels upright (on
will be pitting of the surface edge) on a level, solid base in dry,
Carbon steel wire is oiled but, and local reduction in covered conditions. If a permanent store
if stored uncovered, corrosion strength. Slight damage at is not available, support reels off the
will develop at varying rates this stage, which may be ground under waterproof cover. The
depending on climate. Alloy scarcely visible, could latter should be kept out of contact with
steels are for use under increase the risk of alloy wire the wire and fastened down just clear of
corrosive conditions but they corrosion in service. the ground to allow air to circulate and
are not completely immune minimise condensation.
and, where there are wind
blown salts, slight damage may
occur.

Corrosion in service: There may be development of When rewinding wire, wipe off well
surface pitting. At worst there contamination. If carbon steel wire reels
There are inevitable hazards of may be stress corrosion or are to be put back into store, re-oil the
well conditions and hydrogen embrittlement wire during rewind. Do not leave any
environment. causing brittle failure. wireline downhole for longer periods
than necessary.

Wire winding practice:

Wire damage may be caused at various stages in winding onto the service reel from the supply reel or in
rewind during use. To ensure good spooling, it is recommended that an intermediate capstan is used
between the supply reel and the wireline unit drum to develop a high line tension without risk of cutting
down. Practices are followed in the running of wirelines that have to strike a balance between operational
convenience and wireline life. To the user , some of the possibilities listed here may seem unlikely to
happen but they are given so that, if any should occur, their significance will not be ignored.

1. Uneven winds: Wire pulls down between Maintain a regular traverse of the wire
adjacent turns preventing free across the full width of the barrel to give
Variable tension and/or poor running, causing snags and uniform build up of layers. Course pitch
control or wire traversing the possibly wire breaks. and tension during winding onto the reel
barrel. will minimise the risk of the wire pulling
down.

2. Loops and bends: Overrunning with the risk of Whatever the method used to keep the
snarls forming in looped wire. wire under tension during winding, a
Insufficient braking on the Even if the snarl is brake on the supply reel is desirable so
supply reel. straightened out by hand, that too much slack wire does not appear
there can be a significant between the two reels.
reduction in strength. Overrun
wire may be pulled over a reel
flange and be sharply bent.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 120 of 465

of 4658
Fault and Cause Result Correction

3. Wire abrasion: Reduction in wire strength as Keep tension and always wind from ‘top’
a result of loss of cross- to ‘top’ of reels. In service, rewind on
Rubbing on the ground caused sectional area of steel. top of the reel. Angle of the wire during
by slack wire. Reduction in cross-sectional traverse and total traverse must be
area. controlled.
Rubbing on reel side caused by
incorrect traversing.

4. ‘Wild’ wire: Wire may be difficult to Always wind the wire in the direction of
control and lead to tangles its natural curvature. Never wind from
Cause by slack winding or by and snarling. the top of one reel to the underside of
reversing the natural curvature the other.
of the wire.

5. Wire indentation: Reduction in strength. Avoid excessive tension in winding and

excessive ‘jarring’ when operating
Caused by ‘cross-cutting’ downhole tools.
between layers of wire.

6. Friction on pulleys: Embrittlement of wire Avoid excessive ‘jarring’. Cutting the

surface. Shock loads can wire between uses minimises the chance
Possible during ‘jarring’. produce high surges out of all of cumulative damage.
proportion to the assumed
loads on the wire and may
cause failure.

7. Fatigue cracks: Wire failure, particularly if Ratio of pulley and wire diameter should
other factors noted above are preferably be 120:1 to reduce significant
Caused by repeated bending contributing. bending stresses.
under high stress.

Table 5.5
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 121 of 465

of 4658
5.6 WIRELINE INFORMATION (Courtesy of Bridon Wire)
5.6.1 Bridon Wireline
Wirelines are produced in a wide range from 0.066" to 0.160" diameter.
Various materials have been developed over the years to suit different applications and well
conditions.
5.6.2 API 9a and UHT
API 9a and UHT plain carbon steel wireline are the cheapest and most widely used product range.
A 0.108" API 9a wireline has a breaking load of 2,120 Ibs compared with a 0.108" UHT minimum
breaking load of 2,720 Ibs.
API 9a and UHT wireline will not undergo significant corrosion in chlorides downhole, but will rust
in storage if not cleaned.
API 9a and UHT will undergo severe embrittlement in the presence of H 2S and CO2. API 9a may be
used in low levels (i.e. 2 to 3 ppm H2O, 2% to 3% CO2) with a suitable inhibitor (e.g. Blacksmith's
polybutene multigrade), but UHT is not recommended at any concentration even with an inhibitor.
UHT wire, due to its high internal stresses, may be susceptible to age hardening at elevated
temperatures which may impair ductility.

5.6.3 304 Type (18%Cr. 9%Ni)

304 type stainless steel wireline was developed to operate in levels of H 2S and CO2 up to 30%, but
will undergo stress corrosion in the presence of chlorides. The minimum breaking load for a 0.108"
304 type wireline is 2,100 Ibs.
5.6.4 316 Type (17.5% Cr. 11.5% Ni. 2.5% Mo)
316 type stainless steel wireline will operate in the same concentrations of H 2S and CO2 as 304
type (i.e. 30%), and can also withstand chloride levels up to 2% to 3%. 0.108" 316 type wireline
minimum breaking load is 1,920 Ibs.
Due to the inherent susceptibility of the '300' series stainless steels to undergo stress corrosion
cracking in the presence of chlorides, a new range of 'Supa' alloys were developed with the benefit
of higher nickel content. These materials, being more highly alloyed, are therefore more
expensive.

5.6.5 Supa 60 (20% Cr. 25% Ni. 4.5%Mo)

Supa 60 wireline can perform in any concentration of H 2S and CO2, even in the presence of high
chlorides. The minimum breaking load of a 0.108" Supa 60 wireline is 1,720 Ibs.

5.6.6 Supa 70 (20%Cr. 17% Ni. 6.5% Mo)

Supa 70 has higher corrosion resistance than Supa 60, by virtue of its increased molybdenum
content. It has been known to operate successfully in 100% chloride and H2S environments, and
has a minimum breaking load of 2,100 Ibs (0.108").
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 122 of 465

of 4658
5.6.7 Supa 75(20%Cr. 25% Ni. 6.5% Mo)
Supa 75 is superior to Supa 70 in terms of corrosion resistance due to its higher nickel content. The
minimum breaking load for 0.108" Supa 75 wireline is 2,030 Ibs.
This is not where our range of wireline products ends. We are continually aiming to provide
improved performance materials for the gas and oilfield sector.

5.7 BRIDON SERVICE STRANDS

Service strands are available in the size range 3/16" to 5/16" diameter, conventional and Dyform in
various materials and constructions.
Dyform strand offers higher strength and smoother surface to reduce pressure leakage.
A 3/16" diameter Supa 70 / 75 conventional strand has a minimum breaking load of 1,960 kgs, and a
similar Dyform strand has a minimum 2,250 kgs breaking load.

5.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1) Each stainless steel and special alloy rod coil is examined for surface defects, grain size and
micro-structural quality.
2) Nitrogen bearing special alloy rods (Supa 70 / 75) are tensile tested.
3) All wirelines are 100% non-destructive tested by eddy current techniques.
4) Each finished wireline is checked for size, tensile, and either wraps or torsions.
5) In addition, plain carbon wireline is metallograpically examined for surface quality.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 123 of 465

of 4658
5.9 WIRELINE IN SERVICE

5.9.1 Wireline Termination

Bridon Ropes Limited receive many enquiries regarding the relative merits of the rope socket knot
and pear drop termination.
The rope socket knot typically consists of 3 components - the fishing neck, locking collar and
mandrel. The wireline is threaded through the fishing neck and locking collar, then wrapped once
around the groove in the mandrel. The free end of the line is then wrapped in a tight helix 5 to 6
times around its own diameter, and sheared off by twisting the wire in torsion. The line is then
pulled back into the fishing neck where the wire in the mandrel groove is pressed onto the locking
collar. The helical knot fits closely in the bore of the collar which rests on a strong co mpression
spring located within the fishing neck.
The pear drop termination generally consists of 4 components – the rope socket body with fishing
neck, tapered sleeve, tapered plug, and grub screw. The wireline is threaded through the rope
socket body and tapered sleeve. The free end is bent back on itself to form a pear drop loop
smaller in dimension than the tapered plug. The free end is cut to an appropriate length and the
wire located in the groove in the plug. The plug is secured in position on the wi re by the grub
screw. The line is then pulled back into the fishing neck where the tapered sleeve is mated to the
tapered plug and grips the wire, which stands proud in the groove.
Tests performed on these 2 types of termination have shown that the rope socket knot is only 62%
efficient for API 9a wireline, and 55% for stainless and Supa grades. The pear drop termination has
proved to be 96% efficient for API 9a, and 94% for stainless and Supa grades.
The advantages and disadvantages associated with the rope socket knot and pear drop termination
are:
Rope Socket Knot Pear Drop Termination

(a) Low strength of termination High strength

(b) Time consuming to perform Quick to perform
(c) Difficult to perform Easy to perform
(d) Twists / kinks may be introduced Less likely to introduce kinks

(e) Vice / clamp required which may No vice required

damage wire
(f) High tensile and large diameter wire Suits all sizes / grades of wire
increases difficulty of performing knot
Table 5.6
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 124 of 465

of 4658
5.10 JARRING AND THE MARTIN DECKER TYPE WEIGHT INDICATING SYSTEM

On a number of occasions, Bridon Ropes Limited has received complaints relating to the
premature wireline failure at loads of between 600 and 800 Ibs with 0.092” wire. Subsequent
investigations have invariably shown that the lines in question conformed to the required quality
standards and adequately met the specified minimum breaking load. In each instance, the
conclusion drawn from these investigations was that the wireline had failed in a tensile mode as a
result of shock overloading during the jarring operation
An investigation carried out by Bridon Ropes Limited reported the following findings:
1) Under slow, steady loading conditions Martin Decker type weight indicating systems, when
correctly damped, can register true line loads.
2) Excessive damping under slow, steady loading conditions may reduce the recorded loads.
3) The Martin Decker type system is too insensitive, even at the lowest degree of damping, to
record accurately a shock load condition.
4) No provision is made to record the maximum load by a separate free rotating secondary
needle.

5.11 TESTING WIRELINE IN SERVICE

Regular testing of wireline in service is strongly recommended in order to monitor the inevitable
deterioration in wire properties, and to prevent wireline failure downhole.
The recommended test for API 9a and UHT wireline is the torsion test. The basic principle of the
torsion test is that an 8" length of wire is twisted around its own axis until fracture occurs. The
fracture is classified as 'A', 'B' or 'C' (see Figures 4 and 5). A new wireline should give a minimum
of 19 torsions to failure with an 'A' type fracture. As the line is used, the torsional ductility will
gradually decrease. When less than 19 torsions are achieved, or a 'C' type fracture is obtained,
then the wire should be cut back and retested until ‘A ’ type breaks are achieved with a minimum
of 19 torsions.
Stainless and special alloy ductility cannot be measured using the torsion test. These alloys will
always exhibit a low number of twists to failure and 'A' type fractures, regardless of wire quality.
The best test for stainless wire quality is the wrap test. In this test the wire is wrapped in a tight
helix around its own diameter. A new wireline should withstand 8 + wraps without signs of surface
rupture.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 125 of 465

of 4658
5.12 WIRELINE FAILURE
The majority of wireline failure is attributed to incorrect material selection or operational error,
and generally fall into the following 10 categories:
5.12.1 Hydrogen Embrittlement
This may occur when the wireline is exposed to H2S or CO2 downhole. Both H2S or CO2 release atomic
hydrogen, H (CO2 by reacting with H2S to form carbonic acid + H), which enters the steel and
effectively 'locks' the micro-structure, thus increasing the tensile strength of the wire but reducing
the torsional ductility. As the wire is withdrawn from the well, it is brittle and prone to surface
cracking as it bends over the pulleys. After removal from the well environment, then eventually
the hydrogen leaves the steel and reverts back into the atmosphere. However, any micro-cracks
incurred during withdrawal from the well remain and may cause premature failure during
subsequent operations.

5.12.2 Age Hardening

This is a time-temperature dependent transformation potentially affecting UHT wireline due to
their high internal stresses.
It is known that UHT wireline are susceptible to age hardening at elevated temperatures, which is
why our wire drawing machines are internally water cooled and the temperature is carefully
monitored.
Ageing has a similar effect on the wire as hydrogen embrittlement. (i.e. The tensile strength
increases, but the torsional ductility is severely impaired.)
5.12.3 Fatigue
This type of failure is often encountered when operating wireline with small pulley diameters. We
always recommend a pulley to wireline diameter ratio of 120:1 to ensure a reasonable fatigue life
at normal working loads. It has been shown that under laboratory conditions, increasing the pulley
diameter from 8" to 14" increases the fatigue life of a 0.108" diameter Supa 70 wireline loaded to
25% of its breaking load from 4,800 to 8,000 cycles (i.e. by 65%).
We also advise cutting back lengths of wire to avoid localised fatigue when operating at fixed
depths.
5.12.4 Corrosion
This may occur downhole or in storage if the (plain carbon) wireline is not cleaned after use.
5.12.5 Corrosion Fatigue
This occurs when there is a combination of a corrosive environment and fatigue conditions.

5.12.6 Stress Corrosion

This is a potential hazard when operating stainless wireline under heavy loads in a chlori de
environment. The combination of an aggressive environment and high stresses may cause
catastrophic premature failure.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 126 of 465

of 4658
5.12.7 Tensile Overload
This is often experienced during heavy jarring. As explained earlier, the instantaneous shock load
applied is not registered by the weight indicator and consequently, the wireline is overloaded. We
recommend a safe working load of 70% of the breaking load of the wire during straight pull, with 50%
of breaking load when fast jarring.
5.12.8 Snarl
This occurs when the wire is bent and twisted at one point (i.e. when a kink forms under loss of
tension during respooling).

5.12.9 Mechanical Damage

This can occur in many ways (e.g. running off a pulley, jarring in a pulley, pinching in guide rollers,
or crushing of the reel).

5.12.10 Hydrodynamic Deformation

A number of wirelines have been returned for investigation exhibiting 'thinning' over a short length of
wire. Our examination has shown that this thinning has occurred by some form of deformation
process and not by scraping or wear. No tensile test has been known to produce this effect, and indeed
it is not possible to reproduce this effect in pure tension under normal conditions of temperature and
pressure.
Recent research has provided a theoretical model by which failure of this nature could be explained.
It has been shown that the wire can be deformed by up to 30% reduction in area, by passing it through
a molten polymer filled tapered tube of slightly larger diameter than the wire.
As the wire is pulled through the tube, shearing take place at the wire polymer interface. This
shearing action gives rise to a drag force, which generates hydrodynamic pressures of sufficient
magnitude (typically 45,000 psi) to deform the wire.
A similar mechanism is thought to occur under certain circumstances when operating a wireline (e.g.
during heavy jarring). The stuffing box (basically a chamber containing tightly packed glands and
pressurised grease) may act under certain combinations of wire velocity and axial load as the tapered
tube in the theoretical model outlined above, with the rubber performing the same function as the
molten polymer.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 127 of 465

of 4658
5.13 WIRELINE TORSION TESTER

5.13.1 Objective
To measure the number of twists an 8 inches long sample piece of wireline can withstand before
breakage occurs. Recording these results in a log allows a performance curve to be drawn showing
the lifespan of a wireline in relationship to its usage. This highlights the current enbrittlement in a
line prior to carrying out further wireline operations.
5.13.2 Procedure
1) Pull approximately 50 ft of wire from the drum, cut a small length and prepare a specimen
(see specimen configuration). (refer to Figure 5.).
2) Place the specimen through the jaws of the tester. Set the jaws at the appropriate marks
which provide the wire gauge length of 8 inches. between the jaws.
3) Tighten down the Allen holding screws sufficiently to hold the wire in place during the test.
(Refer to Figure 5.9).
4) Close the tester lid and secure the latch. (refer to Figure 5.).
5) Rotate the handle at a constant rate of approximately 60 turns per minute (60 rpm) until the
wire parts. Count and record the number of turns taken to part the wire and if the total of
rotations is not a whole number, round up if the part rotation is equal to or greater than a
half turn.
6) Unlatch and open lid, (caution - wire will be hot), remove the wire ends from the jaws and
inspect for a lean shear (see fracture analysis). Record the number of turns or rotations into
the log book and any relevant information from the analysis.
7) The torsion test should be carried out at the start of any wireline operations and thereafter
every time a new rope socket connection is made. It is also advisable to conduct a test at
rig-down, as this may give an indication of the effect of the well conditions on the wire.
Affected wire may show signs of recovery if left long enough, but could still be damaged. If
the number of rotations is less than operators or manufacturers guidelines, refer to wireline
test analysis.
8) The torsion test recordings should be entered into the log book along with the other
wireline history.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 128 of 465

of 4658

Ductility Tester
TORSION REQUIREMENTS OF THE API-9A SPECIFICATION
Nominal Wire Diameter 0.092 0.108 0.125
Minimum Number of Twists in 8 23 19 17
inches
Table 5.7

WARNING: ALWAYS WEAR EYE PROTECTION WHEN USING WIRE TESTER.

Date Wire Spooled Total Length 20,000 ft 0.108”

Date Type of No. of Footage No of Type of Wire Cut Balance

Job Runs Run Turns Break Off (ft) Remaining

13-11-05 Ball/ v 8 2,400 23 Good 50 19,950

Change

18-11-05 Gauge Rings 4 14,000 21 Good 50 19,900

+ Tag Fill

20-11-05 Set Plug 5 8,500 21 OK 50 19,850

TBG Test

9-12-05 Bailing 16 11,250 17 OK 500 19,350

12-12-05 Fishing 14 12,100 15 Good 300 19,050

25-12-05 Plugs For 8 10,800 13 poor 500 18,550

Completion

Recommen
ded Wire
Change

Table 5.8

The above chart is only for comparison purpose. In real life conditions wire would probably last
much longer
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 129 of 465

of 4658
5.13.3 Slickline Operation and Maintenance
To ensure the wireline performs effectively throughout its working life it is imperative it is kept in
optimum condition. For this purpose a log book should be kept showing up-to-date details of the
following:
Date wire spooled onto reel
Amount of wireline spooled on
Amount of bedding wraps
Length of exposure to well fluids
Type of well fluids
Depth of wireline operation
Maximum strain exerted on the wireline during the operation
Amount of wireline cut off after the operation
Amount of wireline remaining on the reel
Torsion test result at the cut off point, if applicable.
Operation
a) Ascertain whether the wireline on the drum is suitable for the working
environment expected. If H2S or CO2 is encountered with plough steel wireline, a
chemical inhibitor is recommended.
b) Ascertain from the log book whether there is sufficient wireline on the drum to
perform the deepest operation.
c) Torsion test the wireline prior to rigging up and after a run where re-tying the
wireline rope socket has been necessary.
d) Ensure the path of the wireline is unrestricted during all operations.
e) Minimise the amount of hay pulleys in the rig up to reduce bending stresses
through out the operation.
f) Use the recommended hay pulley diameters for the size and type of wireline in
service to reduce the bending and fibre stresses in the wireline.
g) The extent of jarring up operations should be restricted to 50% of the breaking
strain of the wireline if possible.
h) A line wiper is recommended to remove all well fluids from the wireline while
pulling out of the hole.
i) Apply a light coat of oil to the wireline while pulling out of the hole.
j) Ensure the wireline is protected with a film of oil during periods between
wireline operations.
SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 130 of 465

of 4658

Figure 5.9- Linetech Torsion Tester

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 131 of 465

of 4658
5.13.4 Torsion Test – Specimen Configuration
Unlike conventional torsion testers, this machine has been designed to test prepared wireline
samples of a specific length and configuration:

Figure 5.10 - Test Specimen Configuration

The reasons for selecting a wire sample of this configuration is that, in conjunction with the fixed
machine dimensions, a constant test gauge length of 8 inches is always achieved between the jaws
of the machine when the wire sample is clamped in position which ensures accurate testin g and
compliance with Section 3.10 of the API 9A specification.
The purpose of the right angled bends, formed on each end of the wire test piece, are to prevent
slippage of the wire in the jaws during rotational twisting. This technique permits the use of flat-
faced jaws, which minimise the likelihood of invalid tests due to sample damage and jaw failures.

Figure 5.11 - Wire in Flat Faced Jaw

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 132 of 465

of 4658
5.14 WIRELINE TEST ANALYSIS

5.14.1 Acceptance
If the number of turns is satisfactory, the test piece is deemed to have passed the test, irrespective
of the position of the failure. If the number of turns does not satisfy the requirements of the
specification and if failure is within 1/8 inches of the grips, the test shall be considered as invalid
and shall be repeated.
If, when making any individual test, the first specimen fails then two additional specimens shall be
tested. The average from any two will then be taken as the value to represent the wire. If these
also fail, 500 ft of wire will be pulled from the drum and the test repeated. On further failure of
the tests, a maximum of two more 500 ft lengths shall be removed and tests conducted. If after
this the wireline still fails the tests, the Wireline Supervisor should be informed in order to make a
decision on the disposition of the line.

5.14.2 Torsion Fracture Analysis

Few people appreciate the significance of the torsion test as a definitive wire quality arbiter for
carbon steel wirelines. It is not just the number of twists to failure that is important, but more
specifically, whether the material exhibits a "ductile" or a "brittle" primary fracture. In general,
three types of primary wire fracture may be encountered at the conclusion of a torsion test, these
are categorised as follows.
5.14.3 Fracture Classification
Grade ‘A’ Fracture without Secondary Breaks.
After testing, the sample should contain a single fracture
which is square ended break. There should be no evidence of
spiral splitting on the sample and no secondary fractures.
This type of fracture is characteristic in wire a suitable
condition for continued use. It is usually associated with a high
number of turns before failure.

Figure 5.12 - Ended Primary Fracture

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 133 of 465

of 4658

Grade ‘A’ Fracture with Secondary Breaks

Sometimes a grade ‘A’ fracture may be accompanied by a
secondary helical-shaped fracture. (Refer to Figure 5.). This
secondary fracture is a result of the instantaneous release of
stored energy when the primary fracture occurs. It is termed a
"recoil" fracture.
Although a recoil fracture indicates a slight reduction in torsional
strength and ductility, it can be discounted. The main concern is
the primary fracture and this is a true reflection of the wire
condition.

Figure 5.13 - Single Square-Ended

Primary Fracture with Secondary
Breaks

Grade ‘B’ Fractures

Although containing a square-ended break, a grade ‘B’ sample
primary fracture may be slightly stepped. (Refer to Figure 5.).
Secondary helical fractures may be present and slight spiral
splitting may also be in evidence.
This type of primary fracture is usually associated with a lower
number of turns before failure.

Figure 5.14 - Slightly Stepped Primary

Fracture
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 134 of 465

of 4658
Grade ‘C’ Fractures
The primary fracture will show a severely stepped or helical
type break, usually associated with secondary fractures. (Refer
to Figure 5.). Spiral splitting will almost certainly be present
along with localised twisting.
A secondary break is not usually present as the primary break is
associated with a low number of turns to failure.
This sample would be unacceptable for further use. Re-testing
would be required after spooling off approximately 500 ft of
wire.

Figure 5.15 - Single -Helical Spear Type

Fracture

5.14.4 General Guidance Notes

It should be noted that any torsion test performed relates only to the test piece and does not
guarantee the quality of the remaining length of wireline.
In the event of obtaining Grade ‘B’ or Grade ‘C’ type fracture characteristics two repeat tests shall
be performed. If the quality of a wireline is variable, it is permissible to cut off a length (say 200 ft)
and re-test. Two re-tests should both give Grade ‘A’ type fractures. This procedure may, if
necessary, be repeated since it is well known that the ductility of a wireline deteriorates more
rapidly at bottom hole temperatures.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 135 of 465

of 4658
5.14.5 Wrap Testing
Stainless steel lines cannot be torsion tested since 2 - 4 torsions will create a wire break.
Consequently, the only method of testing the ductility of stainless steel lines is the wrap test. A
wire which has survived some ten 360o wraps around its own diameter without fracture, or signs
of surface cracking has passed the test and is suitable for further use. Figure 5. & Figure 5..

Figure 5.16 - Stainless Steel Test Wrap

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 136 of 465

of 4658
5.15 WIRELINE FAILURES IN SERVICE
It is quite a common practice these days to limit jarring loads to approximately 50% of wireline
breaking strength, and yet wire breaks still happen. When this situation arises, it is advisable to try
and establish why the line has failed so that any faults are not repeated. The best possible clue as
to the cause of failure is to examine the type of break which will narrow the field to a smaller
number of possibilities. For example, a break caused by tensile overloading will generally create a
cup and cone type break with associated locally necked (thinned) areas within the vicinity of the
break.

Figure 5.17 - Classic Tensile Break

This would inevitably point the finger at operator error or fault in the weight indication system, or,
more likely, a little of both. Previous mechanical damage caused by something having been
dropped on the line could also cause that portion of line to part at less than normal tensile
strength, and still show the same cup and cone breaks.
It must be mentioned, that there is a very fine line between good wireline operation and operator
error especially when equipment failure is involved.
A break which shows a ragged end would point to a lack of ductility in the line, and is indicative of
either wire failure, or failure due to downhole conditions. If it is considered necessary to send a
wire sample back to the manufacturer for analysis, it is important to send a length of line of at
least 3 feet with the break on it, sealed in an airtight container.

NOTE: Do not wrap the sample with adhesive tape as this destroys evidence of
H2S.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 137 of 465

of 4658
5.14.6 3/
16 ins Braided Line
The conventional cable comprises 16 (9+6+1) strands; See Figure. 5.20. The core and the right - lay
inner wires are thinner than the left-lay outer wires. By using right and left lay the twisting
tendency of the wire under load is prevented.

Table 5.18 gives wireline data relating to conventional braided line.

Size dia. Flow Weight Rec. Min. Minimum Breaking Load

Tube Pulley Galvanised 316 Stainless Supa 60 Supa 70

Bore dia. Steel /Supa 75

ins. ins. lbs/1,000 ft ins. lbs. lbs. lbs. lbs.

3/16 0.196 71.1 12 4,960 3,990 3680 4,320
1/4 0.228 95.9 14 6,610 5,400 4960 5,842
7/32 0.261 125.5 16 8,640 7,030 6480 7,600
3/4 0.327 195.9 20 13,490 11,000 10120 11,660
Table 5.18 - Relative Strengths of Various Conventional Braided Wirelines

Electric line
Cable used on electric line units can be either mono-conductor, coaxial or multi-conductor braided
line and supplied for various service conditions. Each particular type has a range of sizes and
specific uses according to the required service or tool being run. Careful handling of electric line is
essential, especially with the smaller sizes and when rigging up, to prevent line damage and
penetration of the core insulation leading to subsequent loss of signal.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 138 of 465

of 4658
Some time ago Bridon introduced Dyform cable; See Figure 5.21. Around the single centre core are
nine thinner right-lay wires, the outer wires are also right-lay, but thicker. The finished cable is
pulled through a die, and by doing this the following improvements are made:
20% increase in breaking load, because there is more steel in the same diameter
Smooth external periphery and closer tolerance of outside diameter, reducing leakage at
the Grease Injection Head.
Higher crush resistance because of the increased steel content of the cable. Low twist
tendency because of the Dyform process.

Table 10.2 gives wireline data relating to Dyform braided line.

Size Flow Weight Rec. Min. Minimum Breaking Load

dia. Tube Bore Pulley dia. Galvanised 316 Supa Supa 70

Stainless 60 /Supa 75
Steel

ins. ins. lbs/1,000 ft. ins. lbs. lbs. lbs. lbs.

3/16 0.196 85.21 12 6,170 4,930 4,560 4,960
1/4 0.228 111.4 14 8,370 6,500 5,990 5,990
7/32 0.263 147.6 16 11,200 8,640 7,830 8,530
3/4 0.330 231.5 20 17,540 13,550 12,080 13,380
Table 5.19 - Relative Strengths of Various Dyform Braided Wirelines

Figure 5.20 - Braided Wirelines

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 139 of 465

of 4658
5.16 GENERAL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
There is a certain amount of tension in a coil of wire, so when it is unfastened, care should be
taken to make sure that the leading end does not lash out. Ensure that the free end is always
under control.
The use of safety glasses and protective gloves is recommended at all times.
Never carry out flame cutting or welding operations near reels of wireline. Heat or metal spray
coming in contact with the wire could change the condition of the steel significantly and lead to
early failure in use.
Damage and abuse may not always be obvious, or the significance be appreciated, and effects are
cumulative. There are three main categories:
Mechanical damage
Corrosion
Wire winding practice.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 140 of 465

of 4658
These are summarised in the following table under fault, cause, result and correction.
Fault and Causes Results Correction
Damage to reels: Wire snapping during Use sling when handling reels or
Bending of flanges, distortion of unwinding. use ramps. Do not drop.
barrel. Caused by dropping.
Corrosion in store: Under worst conditions there All types of wire: store reels
Carbon steel wire is oiled but, if will be pitting of the surface and upright (on edge) on a level, solid
stored uncovered, corrosion will local reduction in strength. base in dry, covered conditions. If
develop at varying rates Slight damage at this stage, a permanent store is not
depending on climate. Alloy which may be scarcely visible, available, support reels off the
steels are for use under could increase the risk of alloy ground under waterproof cover.
corrosive conditions but they are wire corrosion in service. The latter should be kept out of
not completely immune and, contact with the wire and
where there are wind blown fastened down just clear of the
salts, slight damage may occur. ground to allow air to circulate
and minimise condensation.
Corrosion in service: There may be development of When rewinding wire, wipe off
There are inevitable hazards of surface pitting. At worst there well contamination. If carbon
well conditions and may be stress corrosion or steel wire reels are to be put back
environment. hydrogen embrittlement causing into store, re-oil the wire during
brittle failure. rewind. Do not leave any wireline
downhole unless it is necessary.
Wire winding practice:
Wire damage may be caused at various stages in winding onto the service reel from the supply reel or in
rewind during use. To ensure good spooling, it is recommended that an intermediate capstan is used
between the supply reel and the wireline unit drum to develop a high line tension without risk of cutting
down. Practices are followed in the running of wirelines that have to strike a balance between
operational convenience and wireline life. To the user , some of the possibilities listed here may seem
unlikely to happen but they are given so that, if any should occur, their significance will not be ignored.
1. Uneven winds: Wire pullsdown between Maintain a regular traverse of the
Variable tension and/or poor adjacent turns preventing free wire across the full width of the
control or wire traversing the running, causing snags and barrel to give uniform build up of
barrel. possibly wire breaks. layers. Course pitch and tension
during winding onto the reel will
minimise the risk of the wire
pulling down.
2. Loops and bends: Overrunning with the risk of Whatever the method used to
Insufficient braking on the snarls forming in looped wire. keep the wire under tension
supply reel. Even if the snarl is straightened during winding, a brake on the
out by hand, there can be a supply reel is desirable so that too
significant reduction in strength. much slack wire does not appear
Overrun wire may be pulled over between the two reels.
a reel flange and be sharply
bent.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 141 of 465

of 4658

Fault and Cause Result Correction

3. Wire abrasion: Reduction in wire strength as a Keep tension and always wind
Rubbing on the ground caused result of loss of cross-sectional from ‘top’ to ‘top’ of reels. In
by slack wire. area of steel. Reduction in service, rewind on top of the reel.
cross-sectional area. Angle of the wire during traverse
Rubbing on reel side caused by
and total traverse must be
incorrect traversing.
controlled.
4. ‘Wild’ wire: Wire may be difficult to control Always wind the wire in the
Cause by slack winding or by and lead to tangles and snarling. direction of its natural curvature.
reversing the natural curvature Never wind from the top of one
of the wire. reel to the underside of the other.

5. Wire indentation: Reduction in strength. Avoid excessive tension in

Caused by ‘cross-cutting’ winding and excessive ‘jarring’
between layers of wire. when operating downhole tools.

6. Friction on pulleys: Embrittlement of wire surface. Avoid excessive ‘jarring’. Cutting

Possible during ‘jarring’. Shock loads can produce high the wire between uses minimises
surges out of all proportion to the chance of cumulative damage.
the assumed loads on the wire
and may cause failure.
7. Fatigue cracks: Wire failure, particularly if other Ratio of pulley and wire diameter
Caused by repeated bending factors noted above are should preferably be 120:1 to
under high stress. contributing. reduce the significance of
bending.
When working wire at one point
due to being stuck in the well
remove wire from around the
measuring head to remove one
bending cycle, reposition wireline
unit/top sheave if possible to
move the working point on the
wire.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 142 of 465

of 4658

NOTES
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 143 of 465

of 4658

NOTES
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 144 of 465

of 4658

6 WIRELINE SURFACE EQUIPMENT

6.1 INTRODUCTION
Wireline service is a method by which various well maintenance, remedial, control and safety
functions are accomplished under pressure in the wellbore. This is done by using a ‘toolstring’ to
run and pull the tools and equipment into and out of the wellbore by use of a small diameter
wireline from a wireline unit at the surface.
To enable the tools to be run into the well under pressure, we require the surface equipment
shown below
1) Quick unions (Otis or Bowen) (Connections for the pressure equipment)
2) Wellhead Adapters/Tree Connection
3) Pump-in Tees (Optional)
4) Wireline Valve (BOP)
5) Lubricators
6) Injection Sub. (Optional)
7) Stuffing box (alternate sealing wiper box, grease injector head).
8) Wireline Unit
9) Hay pulley.
10) Martin Decker weight indicator sensor.
11) Measuring Wheel
12) Wireline clamp.

6.1.1 Wireline Lubricators and Accessories

The wireline lubricator, when assembled, acts like a pressure vessel on top of the Xmas tree into
which the wireline tools are ‘lubricated’. It consists of:
Wellhead adapter
Wireline BOPs or wireline valve
Lower lubricator section(s)
Upper lubricator section(s)
Stuffing box or grease head
Line wiper.

It is extremely important that a wireline lubricator pressure rating meets the maximum
anticipated surface well pressure. Lubricators must be designed, not only to withstand the stress
caused by internal pressure but also from stresses caused by jar action or high pulling forces.
To install the tools, the lubricator must first be isolated from well pressure at the Xmas tree,
usually by the swab valve, and all pressure bled off through an appropriate bleed -off valve. The
lubricator is then broken out at the connection immediately above the BOPs. The Wireline tools,
after attaching to the toolstring, are pulled up into the lubricator bore, and the lubricator re -
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 145 of 465

of 4658
installed. The lubricator should then be pressure tested to a minimum of SITHP, before opening
the tree and running in the hole.

Figure 6.1 - Typical Wireline Rig Up

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 146 of 465

of 4658
6.2 WELLHEAD ADAPTER (TREE ADAPTER)
All Wellhead Adapters are crossovers from Xmas tree to the bottom connection of the Wireline
Valve or Riser. It is important to check that the correct type of threads with appropriate pressure
ratings are used on the top and bottom of the adapter. In the case of the ACME to Quick Union, it
is important that the thread in the top of the Xmas tree is checked for corrosion and/or wear.
Three types of Wellhead Adapter; (refer to Figure 6.), are in common use:
Quick Union to Quick Union
API Flange to Quick Union
Acme Thread (or pipe) to Quick Union

Figure 6.2 - Wellhead Adapters

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 147 of 465

of 4658
6.3 PUMP-IN TEE
A Pump-in Tee; (refer to Figure 6.), consists of three main parts:
A Quick Union box end
A Quick Union pin end
A Chiksan/Weco type connection.
The Pump-in Tee, can be placed between the Wellhead adapter and the wireline BOP. Therefore,
Quick Union sizes and pressure ratings must be compatible with all surface equipment.
Pump-in Tees may be required as part of a wireline rig-up. By connecting a kill-line to the
Chicksan/Weco connection, the well can be killed in an emergency situation. The line can also be
used to pressure test or release pressure from the surface equipment.

NOTE: On some locations, the pump-in tee will be part of the wellhead adapter.

Figure 6.3 - Pump-In Tree

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 148 of 465

of 4658
6.4 WIRELINE VALVE/BLOW OUT PREVENTER (BOP)
a) Description
A wireline valve or blowout preventer (BOP) must always be installed between the wellhead/Xmas
tree and wireline lubricator. The BOP is a piece of safety equipment that can close around the
wireline and seal off the well below it. This enables the pressure to be bled off above it, allowing
work or repairs to be carried out on equipment above the BOP without pulling the wireline tools
to surface. A positive seal is accomplished by means of rams which are manually o r hydraulically
closed without causing damage to the wire.
Hydraulically actuated BOPs are more commonly used because of the speed of closing action and
ease of operation. Often during an emergency, the BOP is not easily accessible to allow fast
manual operation and therefore remote actuation is preferred.
Single or dual ram BOPs are available in various sizes and in a full range of working pressure
ratings. Dual rams offer increased safety during slick line work and allow the injection of grease to
secure a seal on braided wireline. They are used particularly in gas wells, or wells with a gas cap at
surface.
BOPs are fitted with equalising valves that allow lubricator and well pressure to equalise prior to
opening the rams when wireline operations are to be resumed. Without this, if the BOP rams were
to be opened without first equalising, the pressure surge can blow the tool or wire into the top of
the lubricator, causing damage or breakage.
Care must be taken with hydraulic BOPs to ensure that hydraulic pressure is kept to a minimum
when opening or closing Rams.

Example: 51/2 inch BOP with 4 inch pistons closed with 1000 psi per piston.
Force = Pressure x Area
 D2
Area =
4
3.142 x 4 x 4
=
4
= 12.568 in 2
F=PxA
= 1,000 (Piston Pump Pressure) x 12.568 (Piston Area)
= 12,568 lbs per Ram/Piston
12.568
= = 5.61 Tons Per Piston
2240
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 149 of 465

of 4658
At pressures any greater than this, damage can occur to the stem, keyways and possibly guide
inserts.

NOTE: Keep the Piston Pressure to a minimum. (Do not exceed operating pressure)

WARNING: Since they are such a vital component controlling the safety of the well, it is
important that BOP's are regularly pressure and function tested. Tests must
be at a minimum of 3 week intervals, before each new wireline operation,
and after any redress or repair of the bop (API Regulation).

b) Use of BOPs
To enable well pressure to be isolated from the lubricator when leaks develop etc. without
cutting wire by closing the master valve
To permit assembly of a wireline cutter above the rams
To permit dropping of wireline cutter or cutter bar
To permit "stripping" of wire through closed rams though only when absolutely necessary.

Figure 6.4 - Wireline BOP

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 150 of 465

of 4658

Figure 6.5 - Wireline BOP with Equalising Assembly

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 151 of 465

of 4658
c) Description of Operation
A mechanical or hydraulic force is applied to close the rams to seal against well pressure. The
sealing elements are arranged so that the differential pressure across them fo rces them closed
and upwards, assisting in the sealing action.

CAUTION: Wireline BOPs will hold pressure from below only.

d) Equalising Valve
Permits equalisation of pressure from below the closed rams, after bleed off of the lubricator. The
equalising valve must be opened and closed prior to use.
Check that the equalising assembly is not inverted and that the Allen screw is towards the bottom
of the BOP.
6.4.1 Pressure Testing of the Wireline Valve (BOP)
Prior to the BOP being used in operations they must first be fully function tested and pressure
tested.
Function testing
1) Ensure BOP rams are in the fully open position
2) Drift BOP with the appropriate size drift
3) Close BOPs, visually confirm BOPs are closed
4) Re-open BOPs.

Pressure testing
1) With the BOPs installed (on test stump or rig-up)
Close BOP rams
Open the equalising valve on the BOP and fill with test fluid to purge the air from the system
then close the equalising valve
Low pressure test from below to required test pressure and hold for 3 minutes
High pressure test and hold for 15 minutes
Bleed pressure to zero
Open equalising valve prior to hydraulically opening the rams.

NOTE:- Refer to Operational Guidelines

Maintenance
Maintenance must be carried out on a regular basis, or after every time a BOP has been operated
against wire.
BOPs must be fully stripped down and all seals and sealing faces inspected for damage. Any
damaged seals must be replaced, on completion of maintenance BOP must be function tested and
pressure tested.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 152 of 465

of 4658
Relationship between test pressure and working pressure
All surface equipment should be manufactured and fabricated in accordance with applicable
provisions of the code of pressure piping, ANSI BSI series. ASTM. AISI or API specification
materials, other than those acceptable under ANSI BSI series piping codes, may be used provided
that they are satisfactory for the intended service and welding procedures and welders are
qualified for the material used.
A drift, visual and pressure test check of all sections of the lubricator stack should b e made at
intervals not to exceed 6 months. The pressure test, using cold water, should be made at least to
the lubricator working pressure, but should not exceed the rated working pressure. The wireline
BOP should be tested in both the open and closed positions. The BOP, stuffing box and relevant
crossovers can be pressure tested in one assembled lubricator stack.

Ram Types
Slickline (.092”, .105” / .108” .125”) use blind rams with rubber inserts on the sealing faces
to seal with or without wire across the rams.
Braided line (3/16”, or ¼” or conductor cable) use rams with a semicircular groove in the
seals to match the line diameter.
All of the above types of rams have centralisers to ensure the wire is positioned centrally on
the sealing face as the rams close.

Note: These rams are all unsuitable for wire fishing as they will not seal around
multiple strands.

Caution: BOP’s will only hold pressure from one direction.

Check visually with the rams open by looking down past the rams for the key way slot on th e
pressure (bottom) side of the body. Any wording on the body casing should also be the correct
way up. Some brands have an arrow to indicate the top.
BOP’s are available with manual or hydraulic rams, and are used in the following configurations:
Single
Used for ‘slickline’ and installed between the tree connection and lower lubricator.

Dual
Double or twin ram BOP’s are primarily used with braided line. Usually hydraulic, it is generally a
single casing containing two pairs of rams, the lower rams inverted. Two single BOP’s can be used
one above the other, but this configuration is not as convenient as a one piece unit. To obtain a
seal against braided line, a grease injection point is provided between two sets of rams.

Multiple
For high pressure gas wells, a shear seal BOP is advisable located directly above the tree. A dual
BOP would be installed above the shear seal BOP. If rig-up and safe working height allows, an
additional BOP may also be included in the stack for additional safety.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 153 of 465

of 4658
Procedures for Use

Equalising All BOP’s have a means of equalising the pressure below the closed
rams with the pressure above. A pressure differential acting on the
cross-section of the rams creates a force that makes opening the
rams extremely difficult. Attempting to open the rams without
equalising may result in internal damage.

Always check that the equalising assembly is correctly* installed.

The allen screw should be on the high pressure side of the rams i.e.
downwards.

*Some older designs allowed the equalising assembly to be installed

upside down, which could prevent equalising.

Keep the equalising valve closed so that in an emergency the BOP

will hold pressure as soon as the rams are closed. If this valve is in
the ‘open’ position, it will have to be close d manually before the
well pressure will be contained. The additional time required may
be critical to the emergency.

Remember the BOP is a safety device for use in an emergency, and it

is the responsibility of the operator to ensure that it is in perfect
working order at all times.

Testing All types of BOP’s should be tested in the workshop on a regular basis
to suit the expected field conditions.

With the rams open – Pressure to 100% of the working pressure. Test
pressure may be necessary under certain conditions. (Consult
appropriate engineering standards).

With the rams closed – Pressure to 100% of the working pressure to

test the ram seal against the wire diameter. A test rod* of the same
size as the wire to be used should be inserted between the rams.

*Caution: Ensure that rod has an enlarged diameter below the ram
to prevent it being blown out during testing.

Remember The force created by pressure acting on the cross-sectional area of

the test rod will act to push the rod out of the rams. For this reason,
it is not recommended to use a locally made device unless it has
been subjected to recognized welding certification.

To assist in monitoring test frequency, the date and test pressure can
be recorded on a stainless steel banding strap above the connection.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 154 of 465

of 4658
In addition to these tests, it is recommended that the BOP be tested
against the well pressure during each rig-up.

Transportation Prior to removing the BOP from the wellhead, it is strongly

recommended that the ram stems be closed and the handles be
removed. This will prevent accidental bending of the threaded
stems and will protect the threads from corrosion.

Carried in this manner, the BOP is ready for testing during the next
rig-up and it also confirms that the rams will move correctly.

Maintenance All BOP’s need careful and regular maintenance to ensure that they
are ready to seal in an emergency. Refer to individual
manufacturer’s instructions.

Special Some BOP’s are supplied fitted with ‘gas vented hydraulic cylinders’.
Designs A small hole in the adapter cylinder, close to the BOP body, prevents
gas from passing the O-ring seal on the stem. Any gas reaching the
hydraulic cylinder can cause the following problems:

(i) Gas entering the hydraulic fluid chamber can pressurise

the hose and pump above their rated pressure and
severely damage the pump reservoir.
(ii) The gas can escape from a burst pump reservoir causing a
potential fire hazard or worse in the case of H2S.

Summary
Remember that a BOP:
Will hold pressure from one direction only.
Requires regular testing.
Should be carefully maintained.
Should be transported with the rams closed.
Hydraulic actuated versions can be manually closed, but hydraulic oil must be allowed to
transfer from one piston chamber to the other during closing.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 155 of 465

of 4658

Figure 6.6 - Wireline Valve Ram Configuration

NOTE: Ensure that the correct guide is installed as an incorrect guide may damage or cut the
wire.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 156 of 465

of 4658
6.5 LUBRICATORS

The lubricator is in effect a pressure vessel situated above the Xmas tree, subject to the wellhead
shut-in pressure and also test pressures. For this reason it must be regularly inspected and tested
in accordance with statutory regulations.
All lubricator sections and accessories subject to pressure are to be banded with sta inless steel,
with maximum working pressure, test pressure, and date and rating of last hydrostatic test, or
uniquely numbered and have a traceable certification file kept where it is easily accessible.
a) Description
A lubricator allows wireline tools to enter or be removed from the well under pressure.
The lubricator is a tube of selected ID and can be connected with other sections to the desired
length by means of "quick unions".
The following factors govern the selection of lubricators:
Shut-in wellhead pressure and well fluid
Wireline tool diameter
Length of wireline tools.
Type of service (H2s or sweet gas/oil)

The bottom lubricator section normally has one or more NPT ports installed; a pressure manifold
with gauge can be connected to one of the ports to monitor pressure in the lubricator. A second
port could be blanked or have a needle valve installed. If the lubricator has no facility to install
valves then a "bleed off sub", a short lubricator section with two valves fitted should be connected
between the BOP and lubricator. Many lubricators are being manufactured in single piece units
where only the quick-unions are changeable. If the NPT thread for the gauge becomes worn,
(which can happen very quickly), the lubricator is unserviceable. It is therefore recommended that
thread saver subs are used for the mounting of gauge manifolds. The thread savers should not be
removed unless absolutely necessary.

NOTE: The minimum length of the lubricator must be longer than the maximum
length of the toolstring to be run/pulled.
SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 157 of 465

of 4658

Figure 6.7 – Lubricator Sections

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 158 of 465

of 4658
b) Construction
Quick unions are used to connect the lubricator sections together and to secure them to the BOP.
In general Carbon or Manganese Steels are used to manufacture components for p ressure ratings
up to 15,000 psi. For sour service (H2S), the steel is manufactured to a controlled hardness per
NACE (National Association of Corrosive Engineers) specifications. The materials are heat treated
so that they are safer since H2S embrittles metal and causes stress cracking.
All lubricators must have full certification from the manufacturer or test house.
A standard colour code identifies different pressure ratings of lubricator. This code is only
standard for each company and is not an industry standard. (Colours may vary from company to
company).

Caution: Any equipment to be used in an H 2S environment must be H 2S rated.

Standard service equipment must not be used when H 2S is present.

Note: Otis and Bowen types of union are not compatible.

Maintenance Procedure
All types and sizes of the lubricator are checked as follows:
General damage and corrosion.
Check the needle valve condition on the lower sections. Redress / replace the valve as
necessary.
Visually inspect the internal bore for corrosion and ‘wire tracking’ wear grooves.
Check the quick unions for:
The condition of the O-ring groove.
The condition of the pin and box sealing surface.
Check the pin and box sizes carefully, as per the table on page 165 and 168 of this section.

Important: The maximum clearance between dimension ‘B’ and ‘C’ is 0.020” (0.010” per
side).

The gap between the pin and box diameter has a direct bearing on the seal integrity, and it is
therefore critical that these tolerances be checked each time the lubricator arrives in the
workshop.

Note: Report any sizes below the minimum. Remove the item from service for
replacement or repair.

Clean and inspect all components and replace the O-ring seals and thread protectors.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 159 of 465

of 4658
MAXIMUM WORKING PRESSURE (psi) COLOUR
3,000 Red
5,000 Dark Green
10,000 White
15,000 Yellow
Table 6.8 - Colour Coding and Pressure Rating of Pressure Control Equipment

The first band indicates if the service is Standard or Sour:

Standard service has no band.
Sour service has an orange band.

The second band indicates the temperature of the service:

Standard service (-30°C to 250°C) has no band.
Low temperature service (below –30°C) has a blue band.
High temperature service (above 250°C) has a purple band.
Upper Lubricator Sections
These accommodate the toolstring that has a smaller OD than the lubricator. These toolstrings are
normally 1”, 11/2” and 17/8”, although larger sizes are available for heavy-duty work. The upper
section, connecting to the lower lubricator, will have a connection to mate with the top of the
lower lubricator sections.

PRESSURE TESTING / INSPECTION

Pressure Testing
Pressure testing is to be carried out on all pressure equipment after service, and prior to it being
used offshore. For convenience, several sections of the lubricator are assembled and subjected to
pressure in the test bay up to the test pressures (TP) required.
Test Pressure (TP) = Working Pressure (WP) x 150%.
Pressure is applied to 50% and then 100% of the test pressure, and observed for five minutes at
each pressure.
Pressure Testing Area
A test bay area should be set up to safely test all equipment as required. IT should be designed
with the following points in mind
Personal Safety – both of the personal testing the equipment and other personnel in the
area.
Warning signs and lights to advise pressure testing is in progress.

Interlocks to prevent personnel moving into the area surrounding the items under test. An
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 160 of 465

of 4658
adequate means of viewing the items safely to inspect for leaks. This can be safety
glass panels or closed circuit TV systems.
Reinforced walls or pit area to contain any blast effects if the equipment fails.
Trained personnel familiar with the pumps and effects of pressure.
Testing with nitrogen (N2) requires additional care and attention to safety, as the expansion
effects of compressed gas is more dangerous and often lethal in the event of equipment failure
Inspection
Once a year all pressure equipment is to be inspected by a third party inspection service and
certified. The report of these inspections is kept on file by the workshop supervisor. The following
tests are to be applied for detection of cracks and flaws:
Magnetic Particle Inspection spray (MPI) – on both connections.
Magnafluxing (MF) – on both connections, lubricator and BOP bodies.
Radiographic Testing x-ray (RT) – on the collar / nut of the union.
Hardness Test (HT or HRC) for H2S equipment – on the connections and body.
Wall thickness – at 90º intervals around the body.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 161 of 465

of 4658
6.6 OTIS TYPE QUICK UNIONS

The connections used to assemble the lubricator and related equipment are referred to as Quick
Unions. They are designed to be quickly and easily connected by hand.
The box end receives the pin end, which carries an ‘O’-ring seal. The collar has an internal ACME
thread to match the external thread on the box end. This thread makes up quickly by hand and
must be kept clean. The ‘O’-ring forms the seal to contain the pressure and must be thoroughly
inspected for damage and replaced if necessary. A light film of oil or grease on the pin and ‘O’-ring
helps in the make-up of the union and helps to prevent cutting of the ‘O’-ring. A coating of light oil
may be used on the threads (not grease). Pipe wrenches, chain tongs or hammers must never be
used to loosen the collar of the union. If it cannot be turned by hand, all precautions must be
taken to make sure that the well pressure has been completely released.

NOTE: In general, unions that cannot be loosened easily by hand may indicate that
pressure may be trapped inside. Ensure that all pressure is released “before”
unscrewing the union.

NOTE: Before making up quick unions the ‘O’-ring and threads should be checked.

The collar of the union will make up by hand with the pin end after the pin end has fully engaged
into, and shouldered against, the box end. When the collar fully makes up, it should be backed off
approximately one quarter of a turn to eliminate any possibility of it sticking due to friction when
disconnection is required.
Rocking the lubricator to ensure it is correctly aligned will assist in loosening the quick union.
Make sure that tugger lines and hoists are properly positioned to lift the lubricator assembly
directly over the wellhead.
Otis and Bowen manufacture the two most common types of quick union. (Refer to

Figure 6.)
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 162 of 465

of 4658

A correctly sized O-ring in a

a c
correspondingly correctly sized groove.
a The volume of the shaded segment will
be displaced when the seal is in its
operating position, giving contact areas
d at a, b, c and d.

A larger O-ring in the same size groove

would give much greater contact areas
at a, b, c, but it would be almost
impossible to fit the two components
together without damage to the ring.

Too small an O-ring, or, as in this

illustration, too large a diametrical
clearance, will give a much smaller
volume of ring to be displaced, resul ting
in poor contact. Contact could be lost
altogether at b or d or both.

D
e
In the case of C, should the ring be
made of too soft a material, pressure in
the case of a static seal, or movement in
the case of a dynamic seal, will probably
force the ring into a distorted shape,
allowing pressure to bleed past C. A
sufficiently high pressure may force the
ring further (dotted lines), against angle
e, where it could sustain circumferential
damage. Fitting anti-extrusion or
backing rings would prevent this.

Figure 6.9 - ‘O’ Ring Seals

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 163 of 465

of 4658

Figure 6.10 - Otis and Bowen Quick Unions

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 164 of 465

of 4658
6.4.2 Differences between Otis and Bowen Quick Unions

External Difference
Bowen has external holes in the collar.

Internal Difference
Otis has internal angles in the box, Bowen has a straight shoulder.

Quick Union Threads Max. H2S Inside Seal Dia. Collar Dia.
Thread (ins) (Per Inch) Working Service Dia. (ins) (ins) (ins)
ACME Pressure
(psi)
5.000 4 5,000 Yes 2.500 3.500 5.77

5.750 4 10,000 Yes 3.000 4.000 7.02

6.000 4 10,000 Yes 4.000 4.875 6.75

6.500 4 5,000 Yes 4.000 4.750 7.52

6.500 4 10,000 Yes 3.000 5.138 7.52

8.250 4 5,000 Yes 5.500 6.188 9.52

8.375 4 10,000 Yes 4.000 5.250 9.55

8.375 4 5,000 Yes 6.375 7.500 9.77

9.000 4 10,000 Yes 5.000 6.750 10.52

9.500 4 5,000 Yes 6.375 8.000 10.52

11.500 4 10,000 Yes 6.375 8.250 13.02

Table 6.11 - Standard Otis Quick Union

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 165 of 465

of 4658

Inside
Quick Union Threads Max. Working H2S Seal Dia. Collar
Dia.
Thread (ins) Per Inch Pressure (psi) Service (ins) Dia. (ins)
(ins)
4.750 4 5,000 Yes 2.500 3.750 6.02

5.500 4 x 2 st 5,000 Yes 3.000 4.375 6.34

6.312 4 10,000 Yes 3.000 4.375 7.52

6.000 4 x 2 st 5,000 Yes 3.000 4.875 6.77

8.250 4 x 2 st 10,000 Yes 4.000 6.000 9.46

7.000 5 5,000 Yes 4.000 5.250 7.77

8.250 4 x 2 st 5,000 Yes 5.000 6.750 9.52

8.875 4 x 2 st 10,000 Yes 5.000 6.500 10.40

9.875 4 x 2 st 5,000 Yes 6.375 8.000 10.90

Table 6.12 - Standard Bowen Quick Unions

Otis Type Quick Union Dimension

Bore WP Service Connection Pin OD (C) Box ID Thread O-Ring #
(A) (B) (D) OD (E) (F)
2.50 5,000 Std 5.000-4 ACME 3.494 3.500 5.000 338
10,000
2.50 15,000 Std 5.000-4 ACME 3.494 3.500 5.000 338
3.00 5,000 H2S 5.750-4 ACME 3.994 4.000 5.750 342
10,000
2.50 15,000 H2S 6.250-4 ACME 3.994 4.000 5.750 342
4.00 5,000 Std 6.500-4 ACME 4.744 4.750 6.500 348
10,000
3.00 15,000 H2S 7.500-4 ACME 5.494 5.500 7.500 354
5.00 5,000 Std 8.250-4 ACME 6.182 6.188 8.250 434
10,000
4.00 5,000 H2S 8.375-4 ACME 5.244 5.250 8.375 427
10,000
6.38 5,000 Std 8.750-4 ACME 7.494 7.500 8.750 441
5.00 5,000 H2S 9.000-4 ACME 6.744 6.750 9.000 362
10,000
6.38 5,000 H2S 9.500-4 ACME 7.994 8.000 9.500 443
4.00 15,000 H2S 9.500-4 ACME 6.244 6.250 9.500 435
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 166 of 465

of 4658
Notes: As a general guide, soft O-rings are used with 5,000 psi and hard on high
pressure ratings.

Viton for use in H2S.

Nitrile for use in CO2.
The three digits of the O-ring number indicate the international standard code.

Ordering: In the Hydrolex system add 202-xxx to order O-rings. 215-, 270-, and 291
prefix numbers identify material.

In the Otis system add 91Q1 xxx to order O-rings, 91QV1 xxx for Viton.
Check with the supplier for the correct material for specific conditions.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 167 of 465

of 4658

Figure 6.13 - Lubricator Maintenance Guide

The Lubricator enables wireline toolstring and equipment to be inserted and removed from a well
under pressure. It is a tube with quick connections at each end. The quick connections where
welded in position, must be x-rayed, and pressure tested prior to use. All lubricators should be x-
rayed, magnifluxed for cracks, and visually inspected at regular intervals. The usual period of
these inspections is annually.
The pressure ratings of the lubricator are:
Working Pressure (WP) psi* Test Pressure (TP) psi

3,000 4,500

5,000 7,500

10,000 15,000

*Sometimes expressed as CWP (Cold Water Pressure).

Note: H2S equipment must be used on wells containing H2S.

The actual threshold values are dependent on pressure and % H 2S. Please refer to the appropriate
NACE and / or API charts to verify usage. The standard length of the lubricator is 8 feet, but
shorter sections are available (4 - 5 feet).
The lower section must be of sufficient diameter to accommodate tools / equipment being run
(usually the same size as the tubing and wellhead). The lower section has a bleed off valve to vent
pressure and / or gauge point.
Upper sections are smaller as only the toolstring is inside.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 168 of 465

of 4658
The total length must be sufficient to take the total toolstring plus the tools being recovered.
The maximum length recommended to be picked up with rope blocks on ginpoles are:
1) 3 sections – if the lower section does not exceed 4½.
2) 2 sections – if both sections are 4½.

If the diameters exceed these sizes, a crane must be used.

Sizes are 2”, 2½”, 3½”, 4½”, 5½”, and 7½”.

Wire Tracking
Caused by wire cutting into the inside wall of the lubricator. This can drastically reduce the
strength of the lubricator and should be checked by visual inspection regularly.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 169 of 465

of 4658
BOWEN TYPE QUICK UNIONS
Bowen Type Quick Union Dimensions
Bore WP Service Connection Pin OD (C) Box ID Thread O-Ring # (F)
(A) (D) OD (E)
(B)

2.50 5,000 Std 4.750-4 ACME 3.744 3.750 4.750 340

10,000 H2S

3.00 5,000 Std 4.750-4 ACME 3.744 3.750 4.750 340

10,000

2.50 10,000 Std 4.750-4 ACME 3.744 3.750 4.750 340

15,000

3.00 5,000 Std 5.550-4 ACME 4.369 4.375 5.500 345

DL
10,000

3.00 10,000 Std 5.500-4 ACME 4.369 4.375 5.500 345

DL
15,000

3.50 5,000 Std 6.000-4 ACME 4.869 4.875 6.000 349

DL
10,000

2.50 15,000 Std 6.312-4 ACME 4.369 4.375 6.312 345

22,500

2.50 10,000 H2S 6.312-4 ACME 4.369 4.375 6.312 345

15,000

2.50 5,000 H2S 4.750-4 ACME 3.744 3.750 4.750 340

2.50 15,000 H2S 7.000-5 STUB 5.244 5.250 7.000 427

22,500 Std ACME

4.00 10,000 Std 8.250-4 ACME 5.994 6.000 8.250 358

15,000

5.00 5,000 H2S 8.250-4 ACME 6.744 6.750 8.250 438

DL
10,000 Std
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 170 of 465

of 4658
Notes: As a general guide, soft )-rings are used with 5,000 psi and hard on high
pressure ratings.

Viton for use in H2S.

Nitrile for use in CO2.
The three digits of the O-ring number indicate the international standard code.

Ordering: In the Hydrolex system add 202-xxx to order O-rings. 215-, 270-, and 291-,
prefix numbers identify material.

Check with the supplier for the correct material for specific conditions.

Figure 6.14 - Lubricator Maintenance Guide

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 171 of 465

of 4658
6.7 INJECTION SUB/LIQUID CHAMBER

An injection sub; (refer to

Figure 6.), resembles a short lubricator section with quick union connections at either end.
The injection sub should be installed immediately below the stuffing box in the surface rig-up. A
check valve is installed in the body of the injection sub as part of the injection line. The purpose of
the check valve is to contain well pressure in the event of hose failure and must be in working
order. The injection sub is used to introduce fluids into the lubricator during wireline operations to
counteract one or more of the following:
Corrosive environments (e.g. H2S inhibitors)
Hydrate formation (glycol injection/methanol injection)
Dry gas conditions. (oil)
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 172 of 465

of 4658

Figure 6.15 - Injection sub/Liquid chamber

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 173 of 465

of 4658
6.8 STUFFING BOX
The stuffing box is a sealing device connected to the top of the lubricator sections. It allows the
wireline to enter the well under pressure and also provides a seal should the wireline break and be
blown out of the packing. The stuffing box will cater for all sizes of slickline but the size of the wire
must be specified to ensure the correct packing rubbers, upper + lower gland, and BOP are
installed.
If the wireline breaks in the well, the loss of weight on the wire at surface allows well pressure to
eject the wire from the well. To prevent well fluids leaking out the hole through the packing stack,
an internal blow out preventer plunger is forced up into the stuffing box by well pressure and seals
against the lower gland.
A packing nut and gland located at the top of the stuffing box can be adjusted to tighten the
packing and lubricate the wireline. There may be 8 to 12 single packings required dependent on
the particular manufacturer. (Some manufacturers are building slickline stuffing boxes that require
grease to be injected between packing stacks). Remote hydraulic activated packing nuts are
available to enable easier alteration of pressure on the packing during wireline operations.
There are a variety of stuffing box packing materials available to suit well conditons and need to
be selected accordingly, i.e. H2S or CO2 service, etc.
For slickline operations the top sheave is normally an integral part of the stuffing box. This reduces
the rig up equipment required and the large 11” (for 0.092” wire) or 15” (for 0.108” and 0,125”
wire) sheaves can handle the larger OD wires with less fatigue and breakdown.
Wireline sealing devices fulfil one of two functions:
Pressure containment (sealing).
Allows the wire to run down the vertical length of the lubricator into a lower sheave.

For solid wirelines, only pressure-containing stuffing boxes are utilised. The standard stuffing box
is available in 5,000 psi and 10,000 psi pressure ratings. Higher pressure ratings are also available.
A swivel-mounted (360° free movement) sheave wheel and guard are fitted to the top half of the
stuffing box. The wheel is positioned so as to maintain the passage of the wire through the centre
of the packing rubbers.
The sheave guard on the stuffing box is designed to stop wire jumping out of the groove in the
sheave when jarring.
SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 174 of 465

of 4658

Figure 6.15 - Stuffing Box

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 175 of 465

of 4658
6.4.3 Stuffing Box Re-Packing Procedure
1) Place the stuffing box in a suitable vice
Remove the hydraulic/mechanical packing nut and the bottom sub
Remove and inspect the BOP for signs of wear and replace if required. This is an essential part
of the stuffing box and should the wire part it may be required to form a seal and prevent a
release of hydrocarbons
Remove the packings using a packing puller. Check that all packings have been removed from
the packing housing.
Inspect the lower gland for signs of wear, replace if required
The new packings should be reamed by making notches on a length of wire using wire cutters
and working the packings back and forth over the notches. Care should be taken as the ends
of the wire are sharp and the wire will get hot. Eye protection and gloves must be worn.
Alternatively, stuffing box packings can be pre-reamed by drilling them, (preferably on a
vertical drill stand), with a slightly undersize drill bit, i.e. 0.105 for 0.108 wire.
Insert the wire through the stuffing box and push the packings individually fully into the packing
housing using a suitable punch. Tap gently with a hammer to ensure the packing is fully
inserted
When all packings have been fitted, check that the packing gland enters the packing housing.
Failure to do so may result in loss of containment
The wire should be left in place with a handle at each end until the stuffing box is required,
when the packing can be reamed further, if required.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 176 of 465

of 4658
6.9 HYDRAULIC PACKING NUT
The hydraulic packing nut assembly is designed for a standard wireline stuffing box to allow
remote adjustment of the packing nut. This method is a safe and convenient way of regulating the
packing nut, and is made by means of a hydraulic hand pump and hose assembly from a ground
position.
a) Benefits
The need for a man to climb a lubricator is eliminated
The hand pump is positioned remotely from the lubricator rig-up, and possible escaping well
fluid.
b) Operation
The hydraulic packing nut assembly includes a piston which has a permissible travel of 0.4 inches
enclosed in a housing. The housing has a NPT connection for a hydraulic hose.
The area above the piston is arranged so that when hydraulic pressure is app lied to this area, the
piston is forced downward against the force of the spring. The downward action of the piston is
transmitted to the upper packing gland causing the stuffing box packing to be squeezed around
the wireline, sealing off well fluids within the stuffing box. Care must be taken that the minimum
hydraulic pressure is used to seal the wire. (Overpressuring will cause premature wear on the
stuffing box packing and can even prevent wire movement through the stuffing box).

Stuffing Box Checks

Before use, the following checks should be carried out
Check the packings are not worn out. If the packing nut is near the lower end of its
movement, there may not be sufficient movement remaining to increase the packing
compression force to maintain a seal during wireline operations.
Check the sheave is the correct size for the line in use (11” for 0.092, or 15” for 0.108” and
0.125”).
Check the upper and lower brass packing glands for wear. If they are worn oversize they
should be replaced, as worn glands allow the wire to cut the packings faster.
Check the sheave bearings for free spinning, and replace the bearings if necessary.
Check the sheave bearings for side play, and replace if the side play is excessive. The sheave
should not touch the sides of the support arms. Excessive side play also leads to a
worn upper gland and subsequent reduction in packing life.
Check the side arms for damage from side play in the sheave wheel. The complete sheave
staff should be replaced if cutting / wearing action has occurred on the inside of these
arms.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 177 of 465

of 4658
Check the sheave staff for freedom of swivel movement. It is essential that the sheave
follow the wire direction during rig-up or the wire can jump out of the groove and
become damaged.
Check the sheave guard is tight and adjusted close to the sheave to ensure it will trap the
line in the event of a line break.
Check the BOP plunger for wear and freedom of vertical movement.

In Use
The life of the packings can be extended by keeping the line oiled while running into the well.

P
i
st
on

o
9
0E
l
bow

H
o
u
si
ng V
a
l
ved
Ni
ppl
e

O
-
Ri
ngs
G
r
ubSc
r
ew
P
i
st
onS
p
r
in
g

P
i
st
onH
o
u
si
ng

S
t
uf
f
in
gB
o
xH
o
us
i
ng

Figure 6.16 - Hydraulic Packing Nut

SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 178 of 465

of 4658

Figure 6.17 - Hydraulic Stuffing Box

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 179 of 465

of 4658

NOTES
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 180 of 465

of 4658

NOTES
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 181 of 465

of 4658

7 WIRELINE UNIT

7.1 INTRODUCTION
The wireline winch has progressed from a hand-operated reel, driven by a belt and propelled by a
pulley attached to the rear axle of a car or pick-up to the present day truck/skid mounted units.
Today's wireline operations are often complex and demanding with wireline work being carried
out at ever increasing depths. To meet these demands, the modern wireline unit has been
developed to provide increased power and transportability while meeting strict safety
requirements.
A wireline winch is used as the means of lowering and raising toolstrings in wells that require
wireline servicing.
A winch will consist of these major assemblies:
Wireline Drum
Controls
Combined Winches / Power Pack.

The drum assembly can be single or double, the double drum offering the facility of running two
sizes of wireline from one winch e.g. 0.108” slickline and 3/16 inches braided line, 0.108” and
0.125” or 0.108” slickline and 7/32 inches monoconductor, for electric line operations etc. A
wireline measuring head is installed as part of the unit assembly; head design will be dependent
on wire diameter and type.
The most common found power units to drive wireline winches are diesel powered hydraulic
systems. Electrically powered winches are also used in some areas. (Both of these power packs are
discussed later in this Section). Available hydraulic power must be sufficient to support lengthy
jarring operations; the unit has to be compact for offshore locations and satisfy zoning regulations
for hazardous area use. The power pack and winch may be combined into one unit, or separate
components may be utilised which require the connection of hoses to complete the hydraulic
circuit.
Regardless of winch design, certain basic controls are common to all types of unit. Additional
controls and instrumentation are installed to ease winch operation and will be dependent again,
on the type of unit used.
Basic controls/instruments are:
Drum brake - to keep drum stationary or used when jarring
Direction lever - to select rotation direction of drum
Gear Box - to select speed of drum rotation (usually 4 gears)
Hydraulic control valve (double A valve) - to control speed of drum rotation
Weight indicator - to measure strain on wireline
Counter/Odometer - to indicate wireline depth.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 182 of 465

of 4658

Many wireline winches are equipped with a spool-off and cat-head assembly. Hydraulically
operated, this provides a facility to spool wire off or onto the wireline drum.

Figure 7.1 - Modern Self-Contained Wireline Unit

SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 183 of 465

of 4658

Figure 7.2 - Wireline Unit Controls

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 184 of 465

of 4658

7.2 HAY PULLEY

a) Description
There is normally only one hay pulley used, its purpose being to change the direction and level of
the wire from vertical at the top of the lubricator to horizontal at the level of the wireline unit.
The hay pulley is positioned generally at the wellhead using a pad eye and a certified sling on
offshore locations to guide the wireline from the stuffing box to the wireline unit.
The hay pulley should be so positioned that the wireline goes through an angle of 90° at the
wellhead or lubricator/riser as this is necessary to ensure accurate weight indicator readings when
the hay pulley is attached to the wellhead via a weight indicator. In addition the location of the
hay pulley must be such that wireline handling when jarring up by hand, hand feeling of th e
wireline toolstring into the lubricator or when pulling out of the well, etc. can be readily
accomplished. It is also important to secure the hay pulley as close as possible to the wellhead or
riser in order to avoid lateral loading of the lubricator during heavy jarring operations. Securing of
the hay pulley to the wellhead must be accomplished by means of a wire sling, never a rope. The
hay pulley should be installed with the lock pin facing upwards to ensure that it cannot fall out
during wireline operations. Sheaves are manufactured to suit the wireline size.
The sheave diameters for well measuring lines should be as large as the design of the equipment
will permit but not less than 120 times the diameter of the wire, otherwise cold working of
wireline material will occur, resulting in premature failure.
The hay pulley generally has a hole for the attachment of a line wiper which is used to remove
corrosive liquids and dirt from the line as it is spooled onto the drum.
b) Maintenance
Always check the shackle connection and the swivel for wear and tear and replace any worn parts
as the connection is subject to high shock loading and the pulley can cause severe injuries if it
breaks loose.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 185 of 465

of 4658
7.3 WEIGHT INDICATOR
a) Description
Weight indicators are instruments which measure the tension placed on the wireline at the
surface. There are various types but all are either hydraulic or electronically operated. The weight
indicators commonly used are :
The Martin Decker with the tree mounted load cell
The unit-mounted electronic type as used in advanced wireline unit counterheads.

b) Martin-Decker Load Cell

The most often-used weight indicator is the Martin Decker which is completely hydraulic. The
sensing load cell is attached to the Xmas tree by a sling and a heavy duty hose carries the pressure
to the fluid filled gauge.
The load cell is provided with a connection at the top to attach to the hay pulley and at the bottom
to attach to the Xmas tree forming a pull at 90°. The system is calibrated to this angle of pull an d
accuracy will be affected if this angle is not true and the sensitivity of the system can also be
affected if the sensator is too heavily damped, or the unit not regularly exercised. The load gap is
maintained by hydraulic fluid, so if the fluid should leak out and the gap closes, the gauge readings
will be incorrect.
The gauge is a 6 inches diameter fluid filled instrument which can be fastened onto the winch. A
damper is provided on the gauge to set the pointer motion to the required sensitivity. The fl uid
filled case eliminates severe vibrations, lubricates and protects the working parts.
In addition to preventing the overloading of the wireline the weight indicator will also show
changes in tension due to:
Fluid levels or changes in fluid density
Jar action
Position of downhole equipment
Ambient temperature
A different Martin Decker weight indicator is used for 3/16 inch line because of the higher pull
which can be exerted. The load cell for this instrument has a smaller cross-sectional area in the
diaphragm and is matched to the higher range dial (gauge). The gauge load cell cannot be
interchanged.

Maximum loading(standard) = 2,000 lbs (888 DaN)

3
/16 inches Unit = 4,000 lbs (1,777 DaN)
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 186 of 465

of 4658
c) Filling with Hydraulic Fluid
Fluid loss can occur due to leaks or punctured hose etc. and occasionally the system needs to be
refilled as follows:
The fluid pump is connected to the filling port at the gauge manifold and the bleed off screw
in the load cell loosened
With the pump chamber full of hydraulic fluid and the hose laid out fully, the pump is slowly
stroked pumping the fluid into the system
Check the bleed off port for returns and if there is any air in the system. Keep the load cell
higher than the gauge to allow any air in the system to rise and escape throu gh the
bleed off port
Pump until the returns have no air and tighten up the bleed screw
Pump some more fluid to get a one inch load gap
Open the bleed screw and bleed back the load gap to 3/8 inches if using 50' of hose (1/2
inches if using 100' of hose)
Remove the pump and install the filler plug
Check the correct reading of the gauge against a tensiometer or another weight indicator.
It is advisable to exercise the Martin Decker Unit periodically if it is not regularly used, to
maintain flexibility in the load cell bellows. This can be carried out by:
1) Pumping open the bellows to their full extent and leaving them for a few
hours.
Bleed all pressure from the bellows and hold the gap closed for a few hours.
Repeat at least once more.

NOTE: Before picking up any weight across the load cell, the indicator should be
reset to zero.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 187 of 465

of 4658
7.4 MEASURING WHEEL
The purpose of the measuring wheel is to indicate accurately the length of wire passing through it.
It is set to zero with the tool at the wellhead, and therefore measures the depth of the tool in the
well.
The main component of the counter is an accurately machined grooved sheave around which the
wireline is normally wrapped once. Contact of the wireline with this measuring wheel is
maintained by the tension in the wireline and by two adjustable pressure wheels machined to fit
into the groove of the measuring wheel. The wheel is attached, either directly to the axis of a
digital meter (odometer) or by means of a flexible drive, permitting location of the meter on the
panel inside the cabin of the wireline unit.
The design of measuring wheels has changed for the better in recent years, and the twin wheel
horizontal counter head, built by Halliburton, or the three wheel vertically mounted unit, as made
by ASEP are becoming increasingly common. These ‘counterheads’ usually have built-in weight
indicators on one wheel and the measuring wheel on the other. These designs generally give a
higher degree of accuracy for measurement and weight indication.
For braided lines, straight line type measuring devices, such as those manufactured by Mathey,
Bowen, Gearhardt Owen and ASEP are utilised. Alternatively, the measuring wheel on the
Halliburton type head can be changed and the 3/16 inches line run straight through the head and
not wrapped around the wheel.
Care should be taken to ensure that the correct path for the line round the measuring wheels is
selected to avoid reverse bending of the wire.
The measuring device is normally mounted on moveable supports so that it can move laterally,
guided by the operator as the wire is spooled onto or from the drum. This is controlled with a
handwheel inside the cab through a spindle and chain arrangement.
A measuring wheel exists for each wire diameter and may be calibrated in feet or meters. When
changing the diameters of wire it is necessary to change the wheel and sometimes the pressure
wheels and right angle drive unit.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 188 of 465

of 4658
Prior to threading the wire through the counter, check that the counter wheel is free to rotate and
that the odometer is recording - this is especially important when there is a flexible connection to
the odometer in the cab. Also check for wear in the counter rim and pressure wheels.
Quick check for depth meter (older counters):
8 inches wheel - 2 ft = 1 revolution
16 inches wheel - 4 ft = 1 revolution.

Figure 7.3 - Halliburton ‘K’ Measuring Wheel

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 189 of 465

of 4658

Figure 7.4 - ASEP three wheel counterhead

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 190 of 465

of 4658
7.5 CAUSES FOR DEPTH DESCREPANCIES
There are many factors that can limit the linear accuracy of slickline measurement in the tubing
bore. With conventional measuring devices, the primary factors that affect true measurement of a
slickline are elastic stretch, temperature, buoyancy, drag, lift, and out-of-tolerance measuring
wheels. To further complicate matters, slickline varies in size and material. The most commonly
used slicklines are .092-, .108-, and .125-inch diameter wires. The materials range from mild steel
to alloy steels.
Elastic stretch for a slickline is a function of line tension and the modulus of elasticity of the wire.
The elastic stretch coefficients for the various wire sizes can usually be obtained from the wire
manufacturer but are, at best, an average; testing can reveal more accurate coefficients. It is
important to understand that line tension is not incorporated into the depth measurements in
conventional slickline measuring systems. (However, in some of the advanced wireline systems,
which are connected to computers, discrepancy coefficients can be accounted for). Line tension is
measured using a hydraulic-type load sensor instead of an electronic strain gauge. The hydraulic-
type load sensors are calibrated to specific rig-up angles, usually 90°, since the load cell is placed in
the lower sheave and will give inaccurate line tensions if the included rig-up angle does not match
the calibration.
Length measurements may be increased by out of tolerance measuring wheel diameters resulting
from wear or decreased because of debris build-up on the wheel surface. Changes in measuring
wheel diameters can result from large variations in ambient temperature between the
temperature at which the measuring wheel was manufactured or calibrated and the temperature
at which it operates. Temperature differences also affect wire length as it is lowered into the well.
Unless wellbore temperature/measurement variations are input into depth corrections, this cause
of variation is difficult to adjust.
The last factors affecting true wire length or tool depth are buoyancy and drag or lift, which are a
function of fluid viscosity, wellbore geometry, flowing conditions of the well, line speed, etc. For
all practical purposes, these factors are inherently measured as tension on the surface.
Although these factors may not result in significant changes at shallow depths, they can produce
large discrepancies at deeper depths. Elastic stretch for .108-inch wire suspended in a column of
water accounts for the largest change in wire length at 12.5 feet in 10,000 feet. The temperature
affects to the wire and measuring wheel were based on a 50°F temperature change which can
result in a 3.92 ft change in 10,000 ft. The lack of tolerance on the 4 foot circumference measuring
wheel was based on a .001-inch change to the measuring diameter, which caused a 0.65 ft change
in 10,000 feet.
The load cell angle adjustment was shown to illustrate the change in depth if tension was input
incorrectly.
The 15° change in the included rig-up angle resulted in a 11/2 foot change in 10,000 feet. A
combination of any of these factors can create even greater linear inaccuracy.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 191 of 465

of 4658
7.5.1 Wireline Angle Correction Factors
The load registered on the weight indicator of the wireline unit does not indicate the total load
exerted on the line.
If the angle between the wireline entering and exiting the hay pulley is 90° then the reading on the
weight indicator is correct; (refer to Figure 7.5). If the angle between the wireline entering and
exiting the hay pulley is less than 90° then the reading on the weight indicator is higher than the
actual load on the line. Refer to example 1.
If the angle between the line entering and exiting the hay pulley is more than 90°
then the reading on the weight indicator is lower than the actual load on the line. Example 2
Using the tables provided, the actual (line pull) load on the line can be calculated prior to wireline
operations. (Refer to examples 1 and 2).

Figure 7.5 - Martin Decker Weight Indicator

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 192 of 465

of 4658
Example #1

Angle below 90° then WT indicator dial reads higher than actual
resultant.
e.g.: Angle between entry and exit line is 70°.
WT indicator reads 1,000 lbs.
Calculation: 1,000  1.63830 (constant for 70° from Table 7.7)
x 1.41422 (constant for 90° from Table 8.1)
= 1,000 x 1.41422
1.63830
= 863 lbs at 70°
Angle above 90° then weight indicator dial reads lower than
actual line pull

Example #2

e.g.: Angle between entry and exit line is 110°.

WT indicator reads 810 lbs.
Figure 7.6 - Examples

Calculation: 810  1.14716 (constant for 110° from Table 8.1) x 1.41422 (constant for 90° from
Table 8.1)
= 810 x 1.41422
1.14716
= 998 lbs at 110°
WT indicator reads 810 lbs when actual line pull is 998 lbs at 110°

To interpolate the odd number angles not shown on the following chart calculate, according to
above formulae, the resultant of the angle one degree less and one degree more than the angle
desired and split the difference. (Figures provided by Martin Decker, Aberdeen).
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 193 of 465

of 4658
Included Angle Of Line Load By Constant Actual Included Angle Of Line Load By Constant Actual

0 2.00000 92 1.38932
2 1.99970 94 1.36400
4 1.99878 96 1.33826
6 Multiply 1.99726 98 Multiply 1.31212 To Get
8 Line 1.99512 To Get 100 Line 1.28558 Actual
10 Load 1.99238 Actual 102 Load 1.25864
12 By 1.98904 104 By 1.23132
14 1.98510 106 1.20362
16 1.98054 108 1.17556
18 1.97538 110 1.14716
20 1.96962 112 1.11838
22 1.96326 114 1.08928
24 1.95630 116 1.05984
26 1.94874 118 1.03008
28 1.94058 120 1.00000
30 1.93186 122 0.96962
124
32 1.92252 0.93894
34 1.91260 0.90798
126
36 1.90212 128 0.87674
38 Multiply 1.89104 130 Multiply 0.84524
40 Line 1.87938 To Get 132 Line 0.81348 To Get
42 Load 1.86716 Actual 134 Load 0.78146 Actual
44 By 1.85436 136 By 0.74922
46 1.84100 138 0.71674
48 1.82708 140 0.68404
50 1.81262 142 0.65114
52 1.79758 144 0.61804
54 1.78202 146 0.58474
56 1.76590 148 0.55128
58 1.74924 150 0.51764
60 1.73206 152 0.48384
62 1.71434 154 0.44990
64 1.69610 156 0.41582
66 1.67734 158 0.38162
68 1.65808 160 0.34730
70 1.63830 162 0.31286
72 1.61804 164 0.27834
74 1.59726 166 0.24374
76 Multiply 1.57602 168 Multiply 0.20906
78 Line 1.55430 To Get 170 Line 0.17430 To Get
80 Load 1.53208 Actual 172 Load 0.13952 Actual
82 By 1.50942 174 By 0.10468
84 1.48626 176 0.06980
86 1.46270 178 0.03490
88 1.43868 180 0.00000
90 1.41422

Table 7.7 - Wireline Angle Correction Factors

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 194 of 465

of 4658

7.6 WIRELINE CLAMP

The clamp is used to hold the wire while raising or lowering the lubricator and can b e utilised
during fishing operations.
Clamps must be kept clean and dry to allow maximum grip on the wire.
The clamp is employed when it is necessary to clamp the wire and to hold the toolstring in
position, the tension from the unit to be slackened off during rigging up/down or on operations
where the tools are to be left in the well. It is also used in fishing operations to engage a wireline
which has parted above the BOP or stuffing box.
The clamp has grooves in the clamping jaws which grip the wire without crushing it, assisted by a
spring. It is usually attached to the lubricator by a clamp which is bolted around the base of the
bottom section of lubricator.
Care must be taken when placing the clamp on the line not to kink the wire. This can result in a
weak point or cause the line to stick in the stuffing box.

Figure 7.8 - Wireline Clamp

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 195 of 465

of 4658

NOTES
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 196 of 465

of 4658

NOTES
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 197 of 465

of 4658

8 POWER PACKS

8.1 ELECTRICAL
The power pack discussed in this section is the Zone 1, 75 HP, electric/hydraulic type. This power
pack is an all steel construction skid mounted unit with detachable crash frame. Four lifting points
are provided with a safe working load of 2 tons. The heavy duty frame is fitted with removable
protection side panels for easy access and maintenance.
Most operators use diesel power packs but electrical power packs are used in some areas.
Electrical power packs are required to be intrinsically safe (i.e. spark-proof) and can be used in
Zone 1 operations. Zone 1 is an area around the wellhead which is restricted to in trinsically safe
equipment.
Little maintenance is required on electrical power packs. The hydraulic oil and the suction strainer
must be checked regularly.

Figure 8.1 - Electrical Power Pack

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 198 of 465

of 4658
8.1.1 Operation and Maintenance
Electric power packs are very simple to operate. However, care must be taken to ensure that the
power pack is connected to the correct power source. When the power pack has been connected,
the direction in which the motor is running must be checked.

NOTE: Before starting the electric pump, the hydraulic system must be looped or
connected to the wireline unit.

In which a flammable atmosphere is continuously present,

ZONE 0
or may be present for long periods.
In which a flammable atmosphere is likely to occur in
ZONE 1
normal operation.
In which a flammable atmosphere is not likely to occur in
ZONE 2 normal operation and if it occurs it will exist only for a
short period.
Table 8.1

NOTE: The power pack shall be positioned and only operated in areas designated
as safe, in accordance with API “model code of safe practice in the
petroleum industry”.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 199 of 465

of 4658
8.2 DIESEL POWER PACKS
Diesel engines are used because they are reliable. They can be made to function more safely in
hydrocarbon hazardous areas (no spark plugs, contact breakers, distributors etc.) and the exhaust
can be fitted with an efficient spark arrestor. Also diesel fuel is widely available offshore, whereas
petrol is normally not allowed. In the unlikely event of engine problems, the following fault finding
tree should lead you quickly to the fault. Diesels are simple, they require only fuel and
compression to operate.

Figure 8.2 - Diesel Power Pack

All units have safety systems fitted to the diesel engines, which limits surface temperature to
below 200°C. (In the event of high exhaust or water temperature, automatic shutdown will occur.)
Overspeed shutdown is also used to prevent over-revving. The engines also breathe through a
special flame trap.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 200 of 465

of 4658

8.2.1 Fault Finding Chart

Fault Possible Cause

Low crank speed 1,2,3,4
Will not start 5,6,7,8,9,10,12,13,14,15,16,17,18,19,20,22,31,32,33
Difficult starting 5,7,8,9,10,11,12,13,14,15,16,18,19,20,21,22,24,29,31,32,
33
Lack of power 8,9,10,11,12,13,14,18,19,20,21,22,23,24,25,26,27,31,32,3
3,60
Misfiring 8,9,10,12,13,14,16,18,19,20,25,26,28,29,30,32
Excessive fuel consumption 11,13,14,16,18,19,20,22,23,24,25,27,28,29,31,32,33,60
Black exhaust 11,13,14,16,18,19,20,22,24,25,27,28,29,31,32,33
Blue/white exhaust 4,16,18,19,20,25,27,31,33,34,35,45,56
Low oil pressure 4,36,37,38,39,40,42,43,44,58
Knocking 9,14,16,18,19,22,26,28,29,31,33,35,36,45,46,59
Erratic running 7,8,9,10,11,12,13,14,16,20,21,23,26,28,29,30,33,35,45,59
Vibration 13,14,20,23,25,26,29,30,33,45,47,48,49
High oil pressure 4,38,41
Overheating 11,13,14,16,18,19,24,25,45,50,51,52,53,54,57
Excessive crank case pressure 25,31,33,34,45,55
Poor compression 11,19,25,28,29,31,32,33,34,46,59
Starts and stops 10,11,12
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 201 of 465

of 4658

Key To Fault Finding

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 202 of 465

of 4658

NOTES
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 203 of 465

of 4658

NOTES
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 204 of 465

of 4658

9 WELL CONTROL AND BOP PUMPS

9.1 SINGLE WELL CONTROL PANEL
When conducting well servicing operations on a well, it is a necessary safety precaution to lock out
any pneumatically or hydraulically activated valves and isolate them from the platform control
system.
This has meant the introduction of a mobile well control panel which effectively duplicates the
platform failsafe control system functionally for an individual well, but it is operated manually. The
well control panel is also provided with an emergency shutdown system, enabling the UMV and
DHSV to be closed instantly in an emergency situation.
An overview of the panel is given in Figure 10.1. It consists essentially of a control panel section
comprising of two reservoirs which feed three pneumatically operated Haskel pumps. These
provide a high pressure hydraulic supply for three functions:
1) UMV control - direct hydraulic (fluid depending on location)
DHSV control - direct hydraulic (fluid depending on location)
Wireline BOP stuffing box control - direct hydraulic (hydraulic oil).

A separate hand pump system is incorporated to enable the operation of a hydraulic stuffing box
system test line.
An additional facility is provided to allow the hook-up of an independent inhibitor supply using the
spare hose and reel.
The hydraulic supply hoses are wound onto four reels mounted beneath the control panel section.
The low air supply/hydraulic pressure warning system is incorporated into the panel. The warning
system monitors DHSV pressure, UMV pressure and the air supply pressure. If any of the
aforementioned pressures fall below a pre-set level, an air horn sounds to warn the operator, air
supply should be taken from plant air not rig air as this can be lost at times, such as water injection
shut-down.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 205 of 465

of 4658

9.2 OPERATING PROCEDURE

9.2.1 Pre-Operational Function Checks

The functional checks prior to the operation of the panel are detailed below:
1) Locate the panel remotely from the wellhead in such a position that it may be operated
quickly and easily in an emergency, without compromising any route of escape from the
area. Recommended positions are:
Beside the wireline winch unit, for operation on the skid deck.
At the bottom of the Vee Door, for operations using a rig.

Connect a dedicated air supply to the panel from plant air only.
Before connecting the panel hoses to the wellhead and BOP’s, the following function checks
should be performed.

Pressure test the open and close BOP lines to manufacturers recommended pressure.
Pressurise the accumulative system, then close the accumulator valve. Utilising the enclosed
pressure, check for leaks
Check that the emergency shutdown (ESD) facility instantaneously dumps both UMV and
DHSV pressures. Reset by closing the ESD valve
Pressure test the stuffing box line to a maximum working pressure of 5,000psig
Check that the alarm air tank is sufficiently charged (>1,000psi) and function test the alarm
system on each of its separate operating criteria i.e. loss of air supply. DHSV supply
pressure decreasing and UMV supply pressure decreasing
Check that the hydraulic fluid reservoir is filled above the minimum level.
Ensure that operations have disconnected the hard piping to the UMV. Make up Parker
Hannifan (or similar) connection to the open port on the actuator body and connect up the
UMV control hose to the actuator.
Ensure that operations have isolated the DHSV and main control panel from the DHSV manifold
on the tree flange. Make up Parker Hannifan (or similar) fitting to this manifold and connect
up to the DHSV control hose.
Prior to rig-up connect up to the BOP hoses and function test the rams by closing and re-
opening once.

NOTE: The open and close functions on the BOP should have male and female
quick-connect coupling halves respectfully, to prevent connection of the
functions the wrong way round.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 206 of 465

of 4658
9.2.2 Routine Operating Procedures
Throughout this part of the job the well will be under the control of the well service supervisor
who will operate or delegate operation of the panel as required. However, all wireline personnel
should be familiar with its operation, particularly its use in an emergency situation.
During the entire period when the UMV and the DHSV are locked out from the platform control
system, two persons fully conversant with the operation of the panel must be available at the
wellsite.
The panel should be operated in accordance with the procedures detailed below:
1) As soon as the well has been handed over and prior to pressure control equipment rig-up
the Well Services Supervisor should take control of the well as follows:
Remove the burst disc fitting from the actuator assembly (180° from control pressure outlet)
and insert 3/8 inch. NPT plug
Switch on the alarm system whenever a valve is open.
Once the pressure control equipment has been rigged-up and the BOP hoses connected up to
the BOP, turn the BOP control lever to the off (block) position. Turn on the BOP pump and
adjust the discharge pressure against this closed valve to suit the BOP in use. No pressure
will be applied to the BOP until the lever is switched to either the open or the closed
position
During the wireline job, both UMV and DHSV pumps should be left in the on position with the
pressure regulated to maintain the operating pressures as specified by the manufacturer.
Regularly monitor for loss of pressure and pump stroking
The BOP pump should also be left in the on position, with the BOP operating pressure preset
using the pump regulator. The BOP control lever should be left in the off position during
normal operations
If air supply pressure is lost, the pumps may be operated by hand levers, if required to maintain
pressure
On completion of the job, control of the well should be returned to the platform control
system, with the DHSV left in the open position. The operations shift supervisor should be
informed via the CCR that the well has reverted to platform control through the handover
certificate system.
SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 207 of 465

of 4658

Figure 9.1 - Well Control Panel

SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 208 of 465

of 4658

Figure 9.2 - Well Control Panel Unit

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 209 of 465

of 4658

NOTES
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 210 of 465

of 4658

NOTES
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 211 of 465

of 4658

10 GENERAL TOOLSTRING

10.1 INTRODUCTION
The "Tool-string" is the name given to any assembly of equipment run in
the well to perform some type of operation. In wireline work, the string is
run, manipulated and retrieved by the upward or downward movement of
the wire which is itself raised and lowered by a winch at the surface.
The tool-string is made up of a number of basic components with various
other service tools attached according to the type of operation undertaken.
There are many different operations and many different conditions to be
satisfied in each operation, so that the number and type of service tools
available is very large, although some tools are used far more frequently
than others. The precise configuration of tool-string will be contingent on
factors such as job type, access, hole deviation, depth, pressure,
completion type, log history and so on.

Figure 10.1 - Wireline Toolstring

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 212 of 465

of 4658
10.2 PRIMARY EQUIPMENT
10.2.1 Rope Sockets
The rope socket provides the means of attaching the wireline to the tool-string.
Pear Drop Socket
For 0.108 inches. and 0.125 inches. wireline the most commonly used rope socket is the pear drop
socket. This socket is easy to make up and little experience is necessary to "tie the knot" reliably.
The principle of operation is that the wire, wrapped round a groove in the pear drop, is wedged in
a taper between the pear drop and the mating sleeve. This wedge action grip s the wire and is
proportional to the tension applied to the wireline.
The benefits of this type of rope socket are that there are no sharp bends in the wire which
reduces its ultimate tensile strength, and is a simple and quick way to make the connection to the
wire.

Figure 10.2 - Pear Drop Type Rope Socket

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 213 of 465

of 4658
10.2.2 Wireline Stem
Wireline stem or "sinker bar" is required as part of the wireline tool-string to increase the weight.
A "rule of thumb" to determine the weight of solid steel stem is:
OD2 x 8/3 = Wt of stem in lbs/ft.
Increase of stem weight increases the impact force delivered by the jars. The tool-string should
not be over-weighted as excessive mass dampens the "feel" and premature shearing of shear pins
can occur.
Flats for wrenches are provided and should be used. Do not grip the tool on the fishing neck as this
may damage the fishing neck shoulder.
All connections should be clean and dry. Do not lubricate tool-string threads as they could unscrew
downhole with extended periods of jarring.
The threads found on wireline tools are known as “sucker rod” thread. The three most common
sizes of thread are as follows:

15
/16 inches
1 1/16 inches
1 9/16 inches

These sizes should be committed to memory.

Threads should be checked before rig up and after use. "Flaring" can occur on sinker bar threads.
This is indicated by the peaks of one or more threads being angled upwards rather than at right
angles to the stem. It is probably caused by a piece of stem being continually used for heavy
jarring. "Flared" threads do not grip uniformly with good/bad threads and can back off very easily.
Therefore, any pieces of stem with "flared" threads should be replaced immediately.
The table below is a selection of some of the most common stem sizes and lengths that can be
used.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 214 of 465

of 4658

Size Thread Size Fishneck OD Max OD Length

15
1 ½” (1.5 ins.) /16 ” Sucker Rod 1.375” 1.5” 2ft, 3ft, 5ft
1 7 /8 ” (1.875 ins.) 1 1 /16 ” Sucker Rod 1.75” 1.875” 2ft, 3ft, 5ft
1 1
2 /8 ” (2.125 ins.) 1 /16 ” Sucker Rod 1.75” 2.125” 2ft, 3ft, 5ft
9
2 ½” (2.5 ins.) 1 /16 ” Sucker Rod 2.313” 2.5” 2ft, 3ft, 5ft
1 7 /8 ” Roller Stem 1 1 /16 ” Sucker Rod 1.75” 2.125” 2ft, 3ft, 5ft
Rollers
2 1 /8 ” Roller Stem 1 1 /16 ” Sucker Rod 1.75” 2.5” 2ft, 3ft, 5ft
Rollers
2 ½” Roller Stem 1 9 /16 ” Sucker Rod 2.313” 3.125” 2ft, 3ft, 5ft
Rollers

Table 10.1

Figure 10.3 - Threaded Connections

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 215 of 465

of 4658
10.2.3 Lead Stem
To provide greater weight for the same diameter and length lead-filled stems are
available. This stem has regular steel pin and box connections and a tubular steel outer
barrel. The inside is filled with lead to provide greater weight.
This stem is used primarily to run flow pressure and temperature survey tools to
obtain maximum weight with minimum cross-sectional area to protect against
"floating" or being blown up the hole by pressure surges.
Other high density, heavy weight stem which is available, includes: tungsten, uranium
and mallory (mercury alloy) filled stem.
DO NOT USE lead-filled stem for jarring as the lead will tend to creep downwards and
split the outer barrel.

Figure 10.4 - Lead filled

stem
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 216 of 465

of 4658
10.2.4 Roller Stem

Roller Stem is used for work on deviated wells, or in wells with paraffin, asphaltine,
etc. on the tubing internal walls. It allows the stem to roll down the tubing wall,
hence, cutting down friction incurred when using regular stem.

NOTE: Nylon or Teflon rollers should be used in chrome and/or

plastic coated tubing (refer to Operational Guidelines).

CAUTION: Rollers and axles should be inspected for wear before use.
Tools to be run should have a larger OD than the roller stem.

Figure
10.5 - Roller Stem
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 217 of 465

of 4658
10.2.5 jars

Jars are a principal component normally included in every toolstring. Their purpose is to act as a
downhole hammer and provide impact force to operate, set and retrieve downhole equipment.
Wireline alone cannot impart sufficient force due to its low breaking strength and wellbore
friction. Wireline is only used to convey and position the toolstring in the wellbore.
Jars are activated by hand or winch movement of the wireline and it is essential that the operator
can recognise the precise opening and closing point of the jars on the wireline unit weight
indicator. If the jars are not being operated correctly or if the jar action is lost then very little force
can be exerted on the tools.
There are two main types of jar - Mechanical and Power.
The normal mechanical jar is
Spang jars (Long Stroke = 30 inches - Short Stroke 20 inches)
Tubular jars
which have a mechanical action, and
Spring jars
Hydraulic Jars
Hydro-mechanical Jars
which are upstroke jars only.

From the formula,

F = ma (Force = Mass x Acceleration)
it can be seen that increasing the impact force can be achieved by increasing the:
Stem weight (Mass)
Speed at impact (Acceleration/Kinetic Energy, Mechanical Jars only).

Jars would not normally be run in toolstrings that contain devices liable to damage by their action,
eg. pressure and temperature gauges, flowmeters, etc.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 218 of 465

of 4658
a) Spang Jars
Spang Jars; (refer to Figure 10.6), are the most commonly used as they are mechanically simple,
require little maintenance and can be used to jar both up or down and are available with two
different stroke lengths as outlined above.
However, well debris can interfere with the jar action due to their open construction which can
allow any wireline being fished to become entangled and jam the jar.
Jarring force in both directions is governed by stem weight and wire speed and to a lesser extent
by stroke length. However, the efficiency of jarring down is restricted by the viscosity of the well
fluid, the well deviation and the friction of the wire at the Stuffing Box.
In deeper wells, long stroke jars can help give a more pronounced opening and closing indication
at surface. However, long stroke jars in large bore wells are prone to ‘scissoring’ caused by jarring
down. In small bore tubing, the tubing walls prevent excessive buckling. However, in large bore
tubing, the elastic limit of the jar body may be exceeded, causing permanent buckling and
misalignment (‘scissoring’) of the upper and lower body parts.
SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 219 of 465

of 4658

Figure 10.6 - Spang Jars

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 220 of 465

of 4658
b) Tubular Jars
Tubular Jars, (refer to Figure 10.7), are commonly used when fishing for wireline or working below
tubing in the sump. Its moving components are for the most part enclosed inside a housing,
protecting it from entanglement with the wireline to be fished and other well debris.
Tubular jars have screwed components, which are susceptible to backing off during prolonged
jarring. Also, the efficiency of jarring down may be decreased due to the viscosity effects of the
fluid displaced from inside the housing.

Figure 10.7 - Tubular Jars

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 221 of 465

of 4658
a) Spring Jars
Spring Jars, (refer to Figure 10.8), are used in situations where Spang Jars have been, or are likely
to be unsuccessful. This can be, for example, in deviated wells when wire speed is insufficient or,
in general, when more jarring force is required.

Figure 10.8 - Spring Jars

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 222 of 465

of 4658
They can be used to jar-up but, because of their construction, it is possible for debris to enter and
make them difficult to reset. They also require regular maintenance. They are used in gas wells in
preference to hydraulic jars since they are not dependent on elastomer seals (this removes the
risk of fluid entry). In general, they are more durable than Hydraulic Jars as their construction is
purely mechanical.
The impact force of spring jars is determined by the selection or adjustment of the spring or
release mechanism. This spring or release mechanism prevents any relative movement of the two
parts of the jar, until a predetermined wire pull is reached. The first section of relative motion of
the two parts is to overcome the spring or release mechanism tension. This in turn allows the
release mechanism to actuate, freeing the inner rod to move upwards without restriction and
induce the jarring action.
If a Spring Jar malfunctions, it is not normally detrimental to the function of the rest of the
toolstring. If unable to release, it acts as a rigid section of toolstring. If unable to close, it acts as an
additional Spang Jar.
d) Hydraulic Jars
Hydraulic Jars, (refer to Figure 10.9), are used in similar circumstances to spring jars ie. when
spang jars have been unsuccessful, or are likely to be unsuccessful.
The main advantage of the Hydraulic Jar is that the jarring force is adjustable, since it is
determined by the initial pull on the wire. In addition, this type of jar (in common with spring jars)
is more suited to extended jarring operations. This is because the wireline can be run slower, since
the impact force of these jars does not depend on the wire speed which results in less wear and
tear on the wire.
Hydraulic Jars can only be used to jar up and, because their construction includes many elastomer
seals, regular maintenance is required since well fluid and debris can enter the hydraulic chamber.
In the presence of gas, the hydraulic oil can become contaminated. This alters its volume and
compressibility, reducing the jarring efficiency and can prevent the jar closing. In addition, a
‘gassed-up’ hydraulic jar can seriously affect the jar-down action of the mechanical jar in the
string. Since the Hydraulic Jar is usually placed between the Stem and the Mechanical Jar, it acts as
a shock absorber, reducing the weight transmitted.
Upward pull on the wire pressurises the oil contained in the upper chamber. The piston is
designed not to form a good seal on the chamber bore and this will allow a slow controlled flow of
oil past it. The piston will travel upwards slowly until it encounters a wider bore section of the
chamber. At this point there is no longer significant resistance to the oil flowing past the piston
which will then move rapidly upwards to produce the jarring action.
To speed up the resetting action (closing), the piston contains a one-way check valve, which opens
as the piston moves down.

NOTE: When rigging up or down heavy toolstrings, the hydraulic jars can be opened
under toolstring weight.
SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 223 of 465

of 4658

Figure 10.9- Hydraulic Jars

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 224 of 465

of 4658
10.3 TOOLSTRING ACCESSORIES
There are many types of quick-lock connectors on the market, the following sections describe the
most common.
10.3.1 Quick Lock System (Petroline/Weatherford)
Quick-Lock systems toolstrings may be used instead of (or in conjunction with) the threaded type.
The Quick Lock System, (refer to Figure 10.10), is built onto the whole range of toolstring
equipment. There is no need for wrenches when making up this system. The male half is mated to
the female half, then rotated 90°. A spring loaded locking slip engages a slot and locks the
assembly in place. To release the locking device it is mechanically lifted by means of a cut away
window in the stem body.
This system is faster and easier to make up than the threaded type. It is stronger and will not
accidentally back off since it does not incorporate threads.
The advantage of using a Quick-Lock connector is that no wrench marks (and hence no burrs) are
induced on equipment (cutting down wear and hand injuries.)

Figure 10.10 - Petroline Quick-Lock System

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 225 of 465

of 4658

Figure 10.11 - Trinity Locking System

10.3.2 Trinity Quick Lock System

The most striking feature of the trinity quicklock is its triangular shape. Like the Petroline quicklock
its easy to make-up and adds strength by evenly distributing load round the circumference of the
connection. In addition to this the connection employs a support shoulder to absorb side impacts
and strengthens the female connection with the support below the bottom lug. The locking and
release mechanism is by way of a trigger mounted in the female which unlike Petroline quicklock
system is operated by hand and does not require the use of any additional implements to release.
It is also available as crossovers or integral parts of toolstring components.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 226 of 465

of 4658
10.3.3 Knuckle Joints
Knuckle joints are included in the wireline tool-string to offer a degree of lateral flexibility. They
incorporate a ball joint assembly allowing rotation and some angular deviation.
During wireline operation in deviated wells, lengthy tool-strings without knuckle joints may be
forced to bend during running to follow the angles of the tubing. This causes friction and up/down
mobility can be seriously impaired. They are also used during fishing operations to give flexibility
between fishing tool and jars, and so aid latching.
Extended periods of jarring can damage the knuckle joint hence their use in tool-strings should be
kept to a minimum. The ball joints, threads, and any pins should be thoroughly inspected prior to
use.

Figure 10.12 - Knuckle Joints

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 227 of 465

of 4658

NOTES
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 228 of 465

of 4658

NOTES
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 229 of 465

of 4658

11 BASIC PULLING TOOLS

11.1 FISHING NECK IDENTIFICATION (EXTERNAL/INTERNAL/REACH)

Pulling tools are mainly used for recovering and, occasionally, for running flow control assemblies
and other downhole items of equipment.
All downhole assemblies are equipped with standard fishing necks. To identify the corresponding
pulling tool, only the ID/OD and reach are required to be known.
They are only used if a standard fishing neck is accessible. If not (eg. if a part of the tool remains
downhole) then a special tool (i.e. an overshot) must be used.
The pulling tool must be selected according to the size and type (internal or external) of the lock
mandrel (or other downhole devices) to be retrieved. This means that, at the time the device is
run, its size must be carefully measured and logged.
Pulling tools from different manufactures often have slightly differing design detail. For this
reason, they should be used with fishing necks from the same manufacturers if possible. In
practice, these small differences normally do not affect compatibility.

Figure 11.1 - Fishing Neck Compatibility

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 230 of 465

of 4658
Two types of fishing neck exist - internal and external. External fishing necks are used, generally,
on toolstrings and running and pulling tools.
The advantage of internal fishing necks is that they have larger flow areas and for this reason are
often used with flow control assemblies.
Both downhole assemblies and pulling tools may be set or sheared by upwards or downwards jar
action. Any combination of this is possible depending on the operation to be performed and the
equipment itself.
A shear-up pulling tool might be selected in preference if there is a potential difficulty releasing by
shearing down, e.g. debris around fishing neck, or a toolstring in a ball of wire to be fished which
moves down but not up.
A shear-down pulling tool might be selected in preference for extended periods of upward jarring,
to remove the risk of premature shearing off.
The pulling tool is fitted immediately below the spang jar and the assembled tool is then run to a
depth predetermined by the location of the device to be retrieved. Where necessary, a knuckle
joint can be fitted between the pulling tool and the spang jar to assist in the latching operation.
It, therefore, is necessary that an operator must be able to competently identify a tool's direction
of shear.
The shear direction and the outcome of running any pulling tool in the hole must be given careful
consideration at the planning stage of the job.
Tool Type Shear Direction
Otis ‘S' Series Down
Otis ‘R’ Series Up
Camco ‘JD’ Series Down
Camco ‘JU’ Series Up
Otis ‘GS’ Series Down
Otis 'GR’ Series Up
Table 11.1 - Shear Direction Chart

11.1.1 Selection of Shear Direction

It is essential that the operator selects a tool which shears in the direction opposite to which
jarring is required to achieve the desired movement downhole, i.e. if a jar down action is required
to unlock a lock mandrel a jar up to shear tool must be used.

NOTE: In some particular instances this rule may not be applicable.

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 231 of 465

of 4658

Figure 11.2 - General Operation of ‘SB’ Pulling Tool

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 232 of 465

of 4658

11.2 EXTERNAL NECK PULLING TOOLS

11.2.1 Otis ‘S’ Series Pulling Tools (Shear down to release)

The type ‘S’ series of pulling tool is designed to engage external fishing necks, e.g. rope sockets,
stems, equalising prongs, test tools, etc., and to shear and release with downward jar action.
Three types of ‘S’ series tools are available and differ only in their core length, which is selected to
obtain a desired reach:
Type ‘SB’ Long core/short reach
Type ‘SS’ Intermediate core/Intermediate reach
Type ‘SJ’ Short core/long reach
All other parts of the tools are identical and completely interchangeable.
Type ‘SM’ Intermediate core/Intermediate reach. Used mainly to pull gas lift valves.

Figure 11.3 - ‘S’ Core Length and Corresponding Applications

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 233 of 465

of 4658
a) Operational
On reaching the working depth, the weight of the tool-string bears down on the device to be
pulled and, if necessary, this force is further increased by applying light downward jarring.

NOTE: Downward jarring at this stage should be kept to a minimum to avoid

premature shearing.

Once latched on, pulling operations can begin.

Due to the design of the tool, the downward force produced by the jarring action is exerted
through the pulling tool cylinder (skirt) and, in turn, through the shear pin. The core therefore
remains stationary and the cylinder moves downwards in relationship to the core, in order to
shear the pin. The tool cannot be sheared if the cylinder is unable to move downwards as it is
resting on the fish or the devices to be released.
A feature of the ‘S’ series pulling tool is its ability to sustain upwards jarring without releasing. In
certain circumstances the tool can be used in running operations.
Another version or type of ‘S’ series pulling tool is the Type ‘SM’. This is a special purpose tool
designed primarily to retrieve particular side pocket gas lift latches. Although it is a shear down to
release tool of similar design to the Types ‘SB’ and ‘SS’, some dimensions are different and the
components are, therfore, not usually interchangeable.
b) Operational Check
It is recommended that the shear mechanism is tested prior to use. Following recovery from the
well, the tool should be fully redressed before storing.

11.2.2 Otis ‘R’ Series Pulling Tools (Shear up to release)

Figure 11.4 is designed to engage external fishing necks, e.g. rope sockets, stems, equalising
prongs, test tools, etc., and to shear and release by upward jar action. Three types of ‘R’ series
tools are available and differ only in their core length; (refer to Figure 11.3), which is selected to
obtain a desired reach:
Type ‘RB’ - long core/short reach
Type ‘RS’ - intermediate core/intermediate reach
Type ‘RJ’ - short core/long reach.
(All other parts of each type of tool are identical and completely interchangeable).
On reaching the working depth, the weight of the toolstring bears down on the device to be pulled
and, if necessary, this force is further increased by applying light downward jarring.
Once latched, pulling operations can begin.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 234 of 465

of 4658
If the pulling operation is prevented by, for example, the build up of debris, scale or differential
pressure, the shear pin will shear and so unlatch the dogs from the fishing neck. The pulling tool
can now be retrieved, redressed, or changed to another type.

NOTE: When jarring up with ‘R’ tools, large forces can be imparted to the shear pin.
For this reason, these tools are generally fitted with larger shear pins than
those fitted to equivalent shear down tools. Despite this, as the shear pin
takes the full load of the force imparted by the jar, it can sometimes shear
before the pulling operation is accomplished.

Two features of the ‘R’ Series pulling tool is its ability to sustain downwards jarring without
releasing and that it is not dependent on the core bottoming out to achieve shearing.
In particular circumstances, the tool can also be used in running operations.
It is recommended that the shear mechanism is tested prior to use. Following recovery from the
well, the tool should be cleaned and fully redressed before storing.
The ‘R’ Pulling Tool is attached to a standard toolstring and lowered into the well. Upon contact
with the sub-surface device, the lower portion of the cylinder passes over the fishing neck; the
dogs are pushed outward, the force of the dog spring then makes the dogs spring inward to
engage the fish neck. Upward impact of the jars is then used to pull the sub-surface device from
the well.
The shear pin must withstand considerable jarring before shearing. When the pin shears, the
cylinder spring acts between the cover and the cylinder and moves the core up in the cylinder. This
moves the dogs upward against the force of the dog spring. As the dogs move upward, their
tapered upper ends move into the cylinder, forcing the dogs inward thereby pushing the lower
ends of the dogs outward. This causes the dogs to release their grip on the fish neck.
SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 235 of 465

of 4658

Figure 11.4 - Otis Type ‘R’ Pulling Tool

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 236 of 465

of 4658
11.2.3 Camco ‘JD’ Series Pulling Tools (Jar down to release)
The type ‘JD’ series Pulling Tool; (refer to Figure 11.5), is designed to engage external fish necks,
e.g. rope sockets, stems, equalising prongs, test tools, etc., and to shear and release with
downward jar action. Three types of ‘JD’ series tools are available and differ only in their core
length, which is selected to obtain the desired reach:
Type ‘JDC’ - long core/short reach
Type ‘JDS’ - intermediate core/intermediate reach
Type ‘JDL’ - short core/long reach.
(All other parts of each type of tool are identical and are completely interchangeable.)
On reaching the working depth, the weight of the toolstring bears down on the device to be pulled
and, if necessary, the force is further increase by light downward jarring.

NOTE: Downward jarring at this stage should be kept to a minimum to avoid

premature shearing.

Once latched on, pulling operations can begin.

Due to the design of the tool, the downward force produced by the jarring action is exerted
through the pulling tool cylinder (skirt) and, in turn, through the shear pin. The core, therefore,
remain stationary and the cylinder moves downward in relation to the core in order to shear the
pin. The tool cannot be sheared if the cylinder is resting on the fish or device to be released.
A feature of the ‘JD’ pulling tool is its ability to sustain upwards jarring without releasing. In
particular circumstances, the tool can also be used in running operations.
It is recommended that the shear mechanism is tested prior to use. Following recovery from the
well, the tool should be cleaned and fully redressed before storing.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 237 of 465

of 4658

Figure 11.5 - Camco Type ‘JD’ Pulling Tool

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 238 of 465

of 4658
11.2.4 ‘JU’ Series Pulling Tools (Jar up to release)
The type ‘JU’ Pulling Tool; (refer to Figure 11.6), is designed to engage external fishing necks, eg.
rope sockets, stems, equalising prongs, test tools, etc., and to shear and release with upward jar
action. Three types of ‘JU’ Series tools are available and differ only by their core length which is
selected to obtain a desired reach:

Type ‘JUC’ - Long core/short reach

Type ‘JUS’ - Intermediate core/intermediate reach
Type ‘JUL’ - Short core/long reach.
(All other parts of each type of tool are identical and completely interchangeable.)
On reaching the working depth, the weight of the toolstring bears down on the device to be pulled
and, if necessary, the force is increased by light downward jarring.
Once latched on, pulling operations can begin.
If the pulling operation is prevented by, for example, the build up of debris, differential pressure or
scale, the shear pin will shear and so unlatch the dogs from the fishing neck. The pulling tool can
now be retrieved, redressed or changed out by another type.

NOTE: When jarring up with ‘JU’ tools, the shear pin takes the full load of the force
imparted by the jar, therefore it can sometimes shear before the pulling
operation is accomplished.

It is recommended that the shear mechanism is tested prior to use. Following recovery from the
well, the tool should be fully redressed before storing.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 239 of 465

of 4658

Figure 11.6 - Camco Type ‘JU’ Pulling Tool

SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 240 of 465

of 4658

Figure 11.7 - Shear Pins

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 241 of 465

of 4658
11.2.5 Otis ‘GS’ Pulling Tool
The type ‘GS’ pulling tool is designed to engage internal fishing necks, e.g. lock mandrels and t o
shear and release through downward jar action.

Operation
On reaching the working depth, the weight of the tool-string bears down on the device to be
pulled and if necessary, this force is increased with light downward jarring. On locating the device
to be pulled, the dogs of the ‘GS’ automatically engage by their upward movement over the
tapered core. This allows the dogs to retract and enter the recessed pulling neck. Once in the
recess, a return spring forces the dogs down over the taper and out into the lock mandrel fish neck
profile. As the fish neck has a restricted diameter, the dogs are securely locked in the mandrel and
upward jarring can commence.

NOTE: Downward jarring at this stage should be kept to a minimum to avoid

premature shearing.

Due to the design of the tool, the downward force produced by the jarring action, is exerted
through the pulling tool core and in turn through the shear pin. The skirt must, therefore, remain
stationary and the core must move downwards in relation to the skirt in order to shear the pin.
The tool cannot be sheared if the core is resting on debris, etc. A feature of the ‘GS’ pulling tool is
its ability to sustain upward jarring without releasing. In certain circumstances, the tool can also be
used in running operations when fitted with an appropriate prong.

Operational Checks
It is recommended that the shear mechanism is tested prior to use. Following recovery from the
well, the tool should be fully redressed before storing. To release the pulling tool from th e lock
mandrel; grasp the dog retainer with the thumb and forefinger and force it up to compress the
spring. This should lift the dogs enough to allow them to retract against the small outside diameter
of the core. Remove mandrel from the pulling tool.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 242 of 465

of 4658
Disassembly Procedure
1) Place the ‘GS’ pulling tool in a vice, gripping the flats on either side of the core bottom.
2) Rotate the shear pin retainer sleeve until the shear pin ends are exposed. Carefully drive out
the shear pin.

NOTE: Bear in mind that the cylinder spring is under compression and will snap the
cylinder back to the fish neck shoulder upon pin removal.

Loosen the set screw in the fish neck and remove the fish neck from the core.
The remaining cylinder sub assembly can now slide off the upper end of the core.

NOTE: At this point, the core can be changed without further dis-assembly of the
tool.

Insert the cylinder in a vice and remove the top sub which also retains the shear pin sleeve
Remove the cylinder spring from the inside of the cylinder top sub
The cylinder spring retainer, dog spring, dog retainer and dog segments may now be removed
from the cylinder body.
Assembly Procedure
Prior to assembly, wash all parts thoroughly and lubricate all threads with good quality thread
lubricant.
1) Place the cylinder horizontally in the jaws of the vice with one window of the cylinder facing
up
Slide the dog retainer through the threaded end of the cylinder and position it in the dog
retainer
Insert one dog through the lower end of the cylinder and position it in the dog retainer
Reaching through the threaded end of the cylinder, rotate the dog retainer until the next dog
slot appears in the window of the cylinder. Insert the next dog as before, and continue until
all dogs are in place
When all dogs are in place, move the dog retainer and the attached dogs all the way down into
the cylinder
Install the dog spring over the spring retainer, and insert the spring retainer, and insert the
spring retainer (small end first) through the threaded end of the cylinder
Insert the cylinder spring into the area under the threads of the top sub
Make up the top sub and shear pin retainer sleeve into the cylinder and remove it from the vice
Grasp the flats on the lower end of the core in the vice with the core in the vertical position
Slide the cylinder assembly down over the core
Make up the fish neck onto the core and tighten the connections
Install the set screw
Before using the tool, install the shear pin.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 243 of 465

of 4658

Re-pinning Procedure (using ‘GU’ adapter)

1) Place the ‘GU’ adapter in the vice
Turn the shear pin retainer sleeve on the ‘GS’ to expose the sheared parts of the shear pin. On
some types of ‘GS’ the cylinder will have to be backed off to expose the shear pin
Turn the ‘GS’ horizontally and using its own weight only, tap lightly on a bench or vice. This
should expel the broken parts of a shear pin
Screw the fishing neck of the ‘GS’ into the ‘GU’ adapter. This action will overcome the spring
tension of the ‘GS’ and align the shear pin holes
Insert the new shear pin (this will drive out the remaining part of old pin) and cut it to size
Turn the shear pin retainer sleeve 90' to cover the shear pin
Unscrew the ‘GS’ from the ‘GU’ adapter and remove the ‘GU’ adapter from the vice. (The ‘GS’ is
now ready for use).
SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 244 of 465

of 4658

Figure 11.8 - Otis ‘GS’ Pulling Tool

SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 245 of 465

of 4658

Figure 11.9 - Otis ‘GU’ Adapter

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 246 of 465

of 4658
11.2.6 Otis ‘GR’ Pulling Tool
The type ‘GR’ pulling tool is basically a ‘GS’ pulling tool
converted by fitting an adapter (‘GU’ adapter - discussed
later) to release and shear through upward jar action.
Operation
On reaching the working depth, the weight of the tool-string
bears down on the device to be pulled and, if necessary, this
force may be increased with light downward jarring. On
locating the fish neck, the dogs of the ‘GR’ automatically
engage as they move upwards over the tapered core. This
allows the dogs to retract and enter the recessed pulling
neck. Once in the recess, a return spring forces the dogs
down over the taper and out into the lock mandrel fish neck
profile. As the fishneck has a restricted diameter, the dogs
are securely locked in the mandrel and upward jarring can
commence.
Due to the design of the tool, the upward force produced by
the jarring action, is exerted through the pulling tool skirt
and hence, in turn, through the shear pin. The core must,
therefore, remain stationary and the skirt must move
upwards in relationship to the core in order to shear the pin.
Features of the ‘GR’ tool:
Can sustain downwards jarring without releasing.
Can be sheared when movement of the core is
restrained by debris in the lock mandrel i.e.
shearing only requires that the dogs are locked
in the fish neck.

F
igure 11.10 Otis ‘GR’ Pulling Tool
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 247 of 465

of 4658

Operational Checks
It is recommended that the shear mechanism is tested prior to use. Following recovery from the
well, the tool should be fully redressed before storing.
‘GU’ Adapter Assembly Onto ‘GS’ Pulling Tool
(Assuming the adapter shear pin is sheared)
1) Carefully drive the shear pin from the ‘GS’ pulling tool, with consideration to the
compressed cylinder spring
Remove the set screw in the core nut of the ‘GU’ adapter via the port in the main body, after
screwing the core nut downwards to expose the set screw. The pin thus exposed should be
removed
The ‘GU’ adapter fish neck should then slide off the core nut
The ‘GU’ adapter shear pin retainer band should be rotated, until the holes align with and
expose the shear pin pieces which should be driven out
The adapter core nut should be tightened onto the ‘GS’ pulling tool fish neck thread, with the
‘GS’ core held firmly in a vice on the flats of the core bottom
The ‘GU’ adapter fish neck should be lowered over the core nut to the adapter fish neck
The ‘GU’ adapter pin should be installed through the slotted hole in the fish neck and the
socket head set screw installed to retain the pin. This action secures the adapter core nut to
the adapter fish neck
Compress the ‘GS’ tool cylinder spring until the shear pin holes in the adapter fish neck and
core nut align and install a shear pin
Rotate the shear pin retainer band 90' to retain the pin. The retainer band may be dimpled with
a punch if it is a loose fit and then rotated offset.

‘GU’ Adapter Assembly onto ‘GS’ Pulling Tool

(Assuming the shear pins are unsheared)

1) With ‘GS’ pulling tool gripped in a vice on the flats of the core bottom, screw the adapter
onto the pulling tool fish neck and tighten with wrench.
2) Rotate pulling tool shear pin retainer and check that the shear pin is removed prior to
running the tool.

CAUTION: If a shear pin is left in the ‘GS’ palling tool, as well as the ‘GU’ adapter, shear
off in any direction will be impossible resulting in a stack tool

NOTE: A ‘GU’ adapter may be utilised to re-pin a ‘GS’ pulling tool using the above
method in the absence of a spring compressor tool.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 248 of 465

of 4658
11.2.7 Otis ‘GU’ Adapter
As described above in the ‘GR’ pulling tool section, the ‘GU’ adapter has the primary function of
converting a ‘GS’ tool into a ‘GR’ tool. The ‘GU’/’GS’ assembly can then be used in operations
where release by upward jar action is required. Another use for this adapter, though non-
operational, is to assist in re-pinning the ‘GS’ tool after shearing. The adapter, on uniting with the
‘GS’ tool, pushes its skirt down to expose the damaged shear pin for removal with a punch.
Disassembly Procedure
1) Grip the fish neck in a vice.
Rotate band until the shear pin is exposed and drive out the shear pin with a pin punch.
Move the core nut downwards to the full downward travel position until the set screw is visible
through the port in the main body cylinder.
Remove the set screw from the port and drive out the pin thus exposed.
Remove the core nut.

Assembly Procedure
Assemble in reverse order from disassembly.

Fish Neck Sizes

Fish Neck Sizes Nominal Pulling Tools

1 187" 1 1 /2" pulling tool
1.375" 2" pulling tool
1.75" 2 1 /2" pulling tool
2.313" 3" pulling tool
3.125" 4" pulling tool

Table 11.2

The above table is a selection of fish neck sizes that are most commonly found and the pulling
tools which will latch the corresponding fish neck.

NOTE: Fishing neck profiles should never be used for breaking out tools. Inspect
fishing neck profiles for burrs and wrench damage. While it is inconceivable
that wireline tools and equipment could be used without sustaining some
wear and/or damage, it is inexcusable to carry on using them when in a
badly worn or damaged state.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 249 of 465

of 4658
11.2.8 Shear Stock Sizes/Shear Pins
The following chart is a guide to the most common shear stock sizes used today, however some
wireline tools use shear screws rather than conventional shear stock.

SHEAR STOCK SIZES

3
/16"
1
/4 "
5
/16"
3
/8 "

As a general rule the following should be remembered:

Brass shear stock for setting or light jar action.
Steel shear stock for pulling or heavy jar action.
This may not always apply and should only be used as a guide.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 250 of 465

of 4658

NOTES
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 251 of 465

of 4658

NOTES
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 252 of 465

of 4658

12 BASIC WIRELINE TOOLS

12.1 GAUGE CUTTER
It is good wireline practice to run a gauge cutter or similar drift before starting any operation in a
well, to check tubing ID and to tag the total depth, to locate the nipple ID and No-Go's, to cut sand,
scale, paraffin and other deposits from the tubing wall. It is also used to determine the profile of a
bridge by running successively smaller cutters and plotting depth versus sizes to establish the
shape of restriction.
a) Advantages
This tool has no moving parts, has a maintenance free sharp cutting edge requiring little attention
and, incorporates a fish neck.
b) Disadvantages
If smaller gauge rings are used in large casing/tubing ID's when attempting to clear restrictions,
scale/sand debris can fall on top of tool-string and affect the jar action.
Gauge cutters have no shear off facility.

Figure 12.1 - Gauge Cutter

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 253 of 465

of 4658
12.2 LEAD IMPRESSION BLOCK
The lead impression block is filled with lead which extends below the bottom edge. The lead is
held in position by a roll pin or a hex-headed bolt. Either of these are installed prior to pouring
molten lead inside.
a) Advantages
Lead impression blocks are used to obtain an image of a wide range of equipment downhole to be
latched or fished, e.g. rope sockets (with or without wire), prongs, lock mandrels and parted
tubing.
They have no moving parts and incorporate a fishing facility.
b) Disadvantages
Lead impression blocks have no shear-off facility.
A false or double impression can occur at obstructions while running in hole (RIH) prior to reaching
the obstruction/tool to be fished, causing difficulty when interpreting the image obtained.
Use one single downward stroke to make the impression.

Figure 12.2 - Lead Impression Block

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 254 of 465

of 4658
12.3 BLIND BOX
The blind box is used when heavy downward jarring is required to dislodge a fish or push a tool
down the hole. It is flat on the bottom and hardened to reduce wear and damage.
a) Advantages
Blind boxes are available in a wide range of sizes and incorporate a fishing facility. They require
little maintenance as they have no moving parts.
b) Disadvantages
Blind boxes do not have a shear off facility and they can become entangled with wireline when
fishing and can damage the restriction to be jarred on.

Figure 12.3 - Blind Box

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 255 of 465

of 4658
12.4 TUBING END LOCATOR
Tubing end locators are used to locate the end of the tubing when running the completion as a
cross-reference check of the tubing tally. They are used also to correlate hold up depth (HUD), or
plugged back total depth (PBTD) accurately from the bottom of the tubing, the depth of which is
known from completion records.

WARNING: The tubing end locator body, finger length and minimum ID of the tubing
end needs to be checked to match the size of the tubing end in which it is to
be run. Also if there is a mis-run the finger may need to be sheared to get
back out of the well. (Refer to Figure 12.4).

Figure 12.4 - Tubing End Locator

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 256 of 465

of 4658
a) Advantages
Tubing end locators are also used to correlate pressure/temperature gauges, etc. and may
eliminate the use of more expensive correlating equipment.
They are available in a range of sizes, incorporate a fishing facility, and are quick and easy to
maintain.
b) Disadvantages
During pressure testing the tool-string position must be known and monitored as an increase in
pressure can move the tubing end locator up-hole hence shearing the pin.
Care must be taken when loading the tubing end locator into the lubricator to prevent premature
tripping.
When the tool is run and passes out of the tubing the spring-loaded "finger" trips out to the
horizontal position. When pulled back, the bottom of the tubing is indicated by overpull. A fter this
has been done, a further quick pull into the tubing shears a brass pin and allows the "finger" to
collapse against the tool body, permitting the toolstring to be retrieved.

CAUTION: A gauge run is recommended before running the tubing end locator to
ensure that it will pass through the tubing. Otherwise, a missrun would
entail pulling the tool with the "finger" in the running position, which could
lead to damage to the tubulars where the "finger" made contact with them.
When this happens the pivot pin will shear, dropping the "finger" and spring
downhole.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 257 of 465

of 4658

NOTES
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 258 of 465

of 4658

NOTES
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 259 of 465

of 4658

13 LOCK MANDRELS
13.1 Introduction
A lock mandrel is a device which will 'grip' in the well to provide an anchor for various flow control
devices such as plugs, safety valves, separation tools etc. It 'grips' either by utilising slips, dogs or
keys. The lock mandrel also has a means of sealing around its OD to hold pressure.
There are 4 main groups of lock mandrels:

1. Slip Locks Can be set at any depth in any* tubing.

* With the exception of internally plastic coated tubing.

2. Collar Locks Can be set in the tubing collar recess*.

* Premium tubing such as VAM or CS Hydril have a flush internal joint
and therefore, have no space for a collar lock.

3. Nipple Locks Positioned in a nipple run in the tubing string during completion.

4. Monobore Run in Monobore (nippleless) completions

Locks

13.1.1 General Descriptions

Slip Locks
These were the first type of lock to be designed. They have limitations which make them less useful
than the other types of lock mandrels, but are often a useful fallback in cases where nipples are
damaged.
Maximum pressure differential 1500 psi.
Will hold pressure from below only.
Will not pass the nipple bore(of the same nominal size as the tubing).
Can be unlocked by excessive flow from above.

Collar Locks
Are securely locked in the tubing collar recess by dogs which extend outwards. It has the following
features and limitations:
Will hold 5,000 psi - from ABOVE and BELOW.
The 'G' seal element is effective but can be hard to pull.
Will not pass the nipple ID.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 260 of 465

of 4658

Nipple Locks
Can be divided into the following categories:
Selective Due to nipple profile 'S' locks.
Selective Due to running tool 'X' locks.
No-go Due to no-go ring in the nipple ‘XN’ ‘RNT’ ‘F and ‘R’ locks.

Monobore Locks
Some completions are being run without nipples, but with premium tubing. The locks for this type
of completion are similar in concept to the slip lock but have bi-directional slips and can be set and
pulled using an electric motor (DPU) system.
Nipple locks offer greater versatility, reliability, and pressure rating than either the SLIP or COLLAR
type locks. Monolocks will hold pressures similar to nipple locks but are in their relative infancy,
and there are mixed reports on their successes.
‘W’ Slip Locks
The 'W' Slip Lock is designed to be set at any position in the tubing providing any tubing nipples do
not create a restriction. Therefore it is essential to check any nipple profile ID's prior to attempting
to run the 'W' lock. The lock, plug, and running tool assembly can be run downwards to the
required depth. An upward pull applied will grip the tubing with the slips sufficiently to allow the
jars to be closed gently for upward jarring. The slips are expanded outwards by the upward
movement of the inner mandrel, shearing the shear pin which ensures the slips are set before the
element is expanded as upward jar action is via the running tool.
Running Tool = 'W'.
Pulling Tool = ‘RB’ or ‘RS’ (dependant on tubing size) + equalising prong.
Running Procedure
The slips slide along the tube wall during running in.
When the anchoring depth is reached, pull up; then JAR UP. The taper forces the slips to grip
the tubing wall.
Continued jarring up shears the pins which fix the mandrel body and taper together. The
body moves up and the lower conical shoulder expands the packings, sealing against
the tubing.
Further upward jarring shears the pins of the running tool.
Pull out of the well.

Caution: Do not sit down on the lock after setting as it may release the lock.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 261 of 465

of 4658
Pulling Procedure
Attach the correct pulling prong to thread in the ‘RB’ core.
The equalising prong size depends on the plug type.
The core strikes the mandrel. JAR DOWN to release the taper behind the slips. As the mandrel
moves down, the ‘RB’ dogs simultaneously latch the neck. The element is also reached by this
action.
The lock is pulled out of the well hanging by the fishing neck, which ensures the slips remain
retracted.

Note : The tendency to pull the 'W' lock using an ‘RS’ pulling tool must be avoided
unless the lock has been run in extremely light-wall tubing. The reach of the
‘RS’ is such that the skirt may push downward on the fishing neck,
tightening the slips.

The mandrel must have room to move downward to release the taper behind the slips. For this
reason it is NOT advisable to run a collar stop or any other restriction below the slip lock, as this will
impede the downward movement.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 262 of 465

of 4658

Figure 13.1 - ‘W’ Slip-Lock with ‘W’ Running Tool

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 263 of 465

of 4658

Figure 13.2 - ‘W’ Slip-Lock Pinning, Running and Pulling Sequence

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 264 of 465

of 4658
13.1.2 ‘D’ Collar Locks
Collar Locks are securely locked in the tubing by dogs which extend outwards and lock into the
collar recess of EU and NU type tubing. It has the following features and limitations:

Features
1. The collar lock will hold approximately 5,000 psi* from ABOVE and BELOW.
* Varies with size and material. Refer to manufacture's specifications for precise limits.
2. The 'G' seal element is very effective but can give problems when pulling if not allowed
sufficient time to relax.
The collar lock has the following features:
Can be set in any collar recess. (Refer to limitations below.)
Pressure set and pressure balanced element.
Element expansion can be adjusted to seal in varying tubing weights.
Limitations
Will not pass the nipple ID.
May have difficulty sealing in badly corroded or rough tubing.
The 'D' collar lock is designed to lock in any collar recess of External Upset (EU) and Non-Upset
(NU) tubing.

CAUTION: The 'D' collar lock will NOT set in premium type tubing such as Vallourec
VAM or Hydril CS, because there is no collar recess in which to locate.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 265 of 465

of 4658

Figure 13.3 - ‘D’ Collar Lock with ‘DO’ Running Tool

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 266 of 465

of 4658

Figure 13.4 - ‘D’ Lock Mandrel Running, Locating and Releasing Sequence
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 267 of 465

of 4658
Pin the 'D' Running Tool so that the collet is expanded below the 'locking sleeve' in the recess in
the 'D' collar lock. Select brass or steel shear pins as per the setting depth and jar force available.
Running Procedure
Lower the assembly into the hole and stop approximately one joint above the desired setting
point.
Pull the assembly up slowly until a collar recess is located. DO NOT PULL MORE THAN 200 lbs
(100 kgs) AT THIS POINT. (At this step of the operation you are merely locating a
reference collar.) Note the wireline measurement at this point and check again at the
'target' collar. This ensures you are correctly located in the collar - if you are one joint
lower than the reference point.
To move downward again tap downward slightly, then move down the hole to
approximately 10 ft (3 m) below the desired collar recess.
Pull the assembly up until the collar recess is encountered and place approximately 300 lbs
(150 kgs) pull on the wire.
Close the jars slowly without any downward jarring.
A hard jar upward now is used to expand the element and fully lock the collet inside the lock
mandrel.
Prior to shearing the pin in the running tool, set down the toolstring weight to check if the
assembly is set. If the plug moves downward, repeat steps 5 and 6.
If the assembly does not move downwards, jar upwards until the shear pin is sheared and
the running tool is freed. After the shear pin is sheared, do not tag the assembly again
as this may release the lock.

Pulling Procedure
Pulling Tool = GRL + equalising prong.
Choose the equalising prong to suit the plug attached to the lock.
As the GRL engages, the fishing neck prong activates the equalising device. WAIT FOR THE
PRESSURE TO EQUALISE.
JAR DOWN - The core extension on the GRL pushes the locking sleeve down, releasing the
element and dogs.
Pick-up and pull out of the hole.

The 'D' collar lock uses a type 'G' Element (also used on 'G' pack-offs)
By varying the number of spacers beneath the expander element, the amount of expansion can be
controlled to seal in various tubing weights.
Pressure set and pressure balanced design refers to the split rings installed in the 0-ring grooves
either side of the element.

THESE RINGS MUST BE ON THE ELEMENT SIDE OF THE 0-RING.

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 268 of 465

of 4658
The pressure is permitted to act behind the element to 'energise' the seal. As this pressure reaches
the second 0-ring, it will be contained. A reversal of pressure causes the bypass to be effective from
the opposite direction.
This feature ensures the optimum sealing against the tubing well.

Figure 13.5 - ‘D’ Collar Lock ‘Seal’ system

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 269 of 465

of 4658
13.2 BAKER
13.2.1 model ‘A’ Running Tool
The model ‘A’ running tool is designed to be used with all ‘Sur-Set’ lock
mandrels.

a) Application
The model ‘A’ running tool attaches to the inside fishing neck of
the lock and prevents the accidental premature setting of the lock,
if tight spots in the tubing are encountered.

b) Advantages
The model ‘A’ running tool is designed to retrieve locks if proper
setting of the lock in the nipple profile is unsuccessful.

Figure 13.6 - Model ‘A’ Running Tool

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 270 of 465

of 4658
13.2.2 ‘Sur-Set’ Lock Mandrels
There are two versions of the Sur-Set lock mandrels.
The type ‘AF’, ‘HF’ and ‘VF’ lock mandrels are top No-Go type locks designed to locate and lock in
the Baker ‘AF’, ‘HF’ and ‘VF’ landing nipples. These locks have a No-Go shoulder located below the
locking dogs.
The type ‘AR’, ‘HR’ and ‘VR’ lock mandrels are bottom No-Go type locks designed to locate and
lock in the ‘AR’, ‘HR’ and ‘VR’ landing nipples. These locks have a No-Go shoulder located, either
on the packing mandrel or, in cases where packing is not required, on the flow control device.
The lock selection should be compatible with the size and model designation (based on the
designed pressure rating) of the selected landing nipple. Lock selection should be compatible with
the size and model designation (based on designed pressure rating) of the selected seating nipple.
The lock mandrel pressures are listed below:
‘AF’ or ‘AR’ - 10,000psi max. working pressure
‘HF’ or ‘HR’ - 15,000psi max. working pressure
‘VF’ or ‘VR’ - over 15,000psi max. working pressure.
The Baker ‘F’ indicates a top No-Go system and ‘R’’ bottom No-Go.

a) Application
The Sur-Set lock mandrels are installed with the model ‘A’ running tool with the ‘D’ probe and
pulled with the Otis/Halliburton types ‘GS’, ‘GR’ and Petroline type 'DU' pulling tools.
When these lock mandrels are locked in position within their respective nipples, the large pressure
bearing locking dogs lift the lock and separates the No-Go shoulders. This eliminates No-Go
shoulder swaging.
These locks can be used for installing plugs, chokes, check valves, instrument hangers etc.
b) Advantages
Due to the design of the Baker Sur-Set system, the running tool will retrieve the lock if it is not
properly set in its nipple profile. When fully locked in the nipple profile the lock mandrel fishing
neck ‘C’ ring locks it in place to prevent the lock unseating due to friction of vibration while the
well is flowing.

CAUTION: This lock mandrel should be checked thoroughly prior to running. The ‘C’
ring must be in good condition to prevent problems during pulling
operations. Depress the keys to ensure they fully retract.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 271 of 465

of 4658

Figure 13.7 - Baker Sur-Set Lock Mandrels

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 272 of 465

of 4658
13.2.3 ‘Model ‘V’ ‘H’ and‘M’ Bypass Blanking Plug
The model ‘V’ single trip check valve holds pressure from below only.
The model ‘H’ two run bypass blanking plug is a positive blanking device designed to hold
pressure from either above and below, but requires one trip to equalise, and a
separate trip to pull the plug.
The model ‘M’ single-trip bypass blanking plug is a positive blanking device designed to hold
pressure from either above and below.

a) Application
They may be used with, either, top No-Go or bottom No-Go type locks and are available with a
wide range of pressure ratings.

b) Operation
When running in a well, the inner mandrel is held in the downward position, thus allowing fluid
bypass through the plug until it is locked into the landing nipple preventing hydraulic locking. The
ports in the plug are closed off only after the lock is landed and completely set in the nipple.
The plug is equalised by jarring down lightly on the inner mandrel using an ‘A’ guide and equalising
prong to open its bypass ports. After pressures have been equalised through the bypass ports, the
plug may be retrieved with a ‘GS’ running and pulling tool either on the same trip, (‘V’ and ‘M’ or a
second trip, ‘H’.

‘V’ Check Valve Bottom ‘H’ Bottom Two Run Plug ‘M’ Bottom One Run
Plug
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 273 of 465

of 4658

‘V’ Check Valve Bottom ‘H’ Check Valve Bottom ‘M’ Check Valve Bottom

Run Equalise & Pull Run Run Pull Prong Pull Run Equalise Pull

Lock Lock Lock Loc Lock

Pull k
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 274 of 465

of 4658

13.2.4 Model ‘MH’ Positioning Tool

a) Application
The model ‘MH’ positioning tool is used in conjunction with the model
‘A’ running tool and probe extension, to move the inner mandrel of the
‘M’ single-trip bypass plug to the closed position after the lock has been
successfully set.

Figure 13.8- Model ‘MH’ Positioning Tool

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 275 of 465

of 4658
13.2.5 Equalising Prong for Model ‘M’ Single Trip Bypass Blanking Plug
a) Application
The equalising prong is used in conjunction with the model ‘A’ guide to
shift the inner mandrel of the model ‘M’ single-trip bypass blanking
plug to the open position for pressure equalisation.

Figure 13.9- Equalising Prong for Model ‘M’

Single-Trip Bypass Blanking Plug
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 276 of 465

of 4658

13.3 CAMCO

13.3.1 Type ‘Z-6’ Running Tool

a) Application
The Camco 'Z-6' running tool is a wireline running tool
used to install the 'DB' series lock mandrels into the 'DB-
6', 'B-6' or 'BA-6' landing nipples. The 'Z-6' running tool is
non-selective.

b) Advantages
The 'Z-6' running tool has a 'tell tale' device which gives
positive indication that the lock has been set. The running
tool shear pin hole design allows it to be pinned to suit
the operation to be performed.

c) Operation
The 'Z-6' running tool comprises a fishing neck, plunger,
garter spring and a lock pin retainer. Two sets of shear
pins attach the running tool to the lock. The lower set of
shear pins holds the plunger in the running position. The
upper set of shear pins, when sheared, releases the
running tool from the lock. The running tool is threaded
internally either in the top sub or at the bottom or the
lock pin retainer to receive a running prong for special
operations. Shown is the version with the threads in the
top sub.

Figure 13.10 - Camco ‘Z-6’ Running Tool

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 277 of 465

of 4658
13.3.2 Type ‘PRS’ Pulling Tool
a) Application
The Type 'PRS' pulling tool is designed to engage with internal
fishing necks, e.g. lock mandrels and to release and shear with
downward jar action.

b) Advantages
Some models of the 'PRS' can be released from the device to be
pulled by upwards jarring action.
A feature of the type 'PRS' Pulling Tool is the ease by which it can
be released at the surface from the pulled device. By simply placing
a pin punch into the collet hole, retracting the collet against its
spring, then rotating the punch in the collet housing slot, the tool
can be released.

c) Operation
When the pulling tool reaches working depth, its collet contacts
with the restricted diameter of the top of the device to be pulled
and so moves back against the collet spring, toolstring weight
allowing the core to continue moving downwards. The collet
fingers deflect inwards and make passage through the opening of
the fishing neck. As the collet fingers clear the opening of the
fishing neck, the collet spring shifts the collet fingers back over the
larger diameter of the collet core and so locks the pulling tool to
the fish neck.
If the device cannot be retrieved, the 'PRS' has a releasable feature
which operates by downward jarring to shear a pin, freeing the
core from the outer housing. This moves the back-up shoulder
down from behind the fingers and, simultaneously, a ratchet
mechanism grips the core holding it in this lower position. The tool
can now be pulled from the well.
d) Operational Checks
Before running the tool, its shear mechanism should be checked.
Following recovery from the well, the tool should be redressed
before storing.
Figure 13.11- Camco Type ‘PRS’ Pulling
Tool
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 278 of 465

of 4658
13.3.3 Type ‘C’ Series Lock Mandrel
The ‘C’ series lock mandrels are No-Go or non-selective type locks and include types ‘C’, ‘CS’, ‘CC’
and ‘CSC’ (refer to Figure 4.12). They are for use in the type ‘D’ or ‘DS’ No-Go landing nipples. The
‘C’ locks top No-Go shoulder is located above the keys and has an external fish neck.
The ‘C’ lock mandrel is run on the model ‘D’ running tool and pulled by the ‘JD’ pulling tool.

a) Application
The ‘C’ lock mandrel can be used to locate and lock various flow
control devices in the tubing string, e.g. plugs, chokes, check Top Sub
valves, SSD separation tools, etc. Used for pressures up to
5,000psi from below. Pressures from above vary according to the
size and type.

b) Advantages/Disadvantages
The ‘C’ locks are non-selective No-Go type locks, installed and
retrieved with standard running and pulling tools. They feature a
Housing
relative travel No-Go ring which assures positive positioning
when the nipple is contacted. This feature means that the full Expander
force of differential pressure is taken on the dogs and not the No- Tube
Go ring.

No-Go Ring

Lug

Locking
Dog

Packing
Stack

Figure 13.12 - Camco ‘C’ Lock Mandrel

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 279 of 465

of 4658
13.3.4 Type ‘HPC-R’ Lock Mandrel
The ‘HPC-R’ lock mandrel is a high pressure variation of the ‘C’
lock mandrel and is a non-selective No-Go locking device (refer to
Figure 13.13) designed for use in the type ‘D’, ‘DS’ or ‘D-15’
landing nipples. This lock features an internal fishing neck which
allows the maximum bore through the lock. The ‘C’ lock mandrel
is run on the model ‘D’ series running tool and pulled by the ‘PRS’
series pulling tool.

a) Application
The ‘HPC-R’ lock mandrel can be used to locate and lock various
flow control devices in the tubing string, e.g. plugs, chokes, check
valves, SSD separation tools, etc. Used for pressures up to
15,000psi from below and 10,000psi from above.
High temperature versions are available for temperatures up to
300oF.

b) Advantages/Disadvantages
The 'C-HP' locks are non-selective No-Go type locks, installed and
retrieved with standard running and pulling tools. The internal
fish neck allows the maximum bore size through the lock.
They feature a relative travel No-Go ring which assures positive
positioning when the nipple is contacted. This feature means that
the lock takes the forces of full differential pressure on the dogs
and not the No-Go ring.

Figure 13.13 - ‘HPC-R’ Lock Mandrel

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 280 of 465

of 4658
13.3.5 Type ‘DB’ Series Lock Mandrel
The ‘DB’ series lock mandrels include the ‘DB-6’, ‘DB-HP’ and the ‘DB-6E’. The lock mandrel is a
non-selective type lock designed to locate and lock in the type ‘DB’ series landing nipple and ‘DB’
hydraulic safety valve landing nipple. The ‘DB’ is a No-Go Fishing
Neck
type lock with the No-Go shoulder located between the
locking dogs and the packing section. The ‘DB’ lock mandrel Pinning
keys only hold well pressure from below, any pressure from Holes

above bears on the No-Go ring.

The ‘DB’ lock mandrel is run on the ‘Z-6’ running tool and
pulled with the ‘PRS’ series pulling tool (Refer to running
and pulling procedure below).

a) Application
The ‘DB’ lock mandrel can be used to locate and lock various
Shear Pin
flow control devices in the tubing string, e.g. surface
controlled sub surface safety valves, direct controlled safety Garter
valves, plugs, chokes, check valves, and instrument hangers. Spring

b) Advantages
Locking Keys
The ‘DB’ is a No-Go type lock, making nipple location and
No-Go
lock setting easier. When this lock is pinned to the ‘Z-6’ Shoulder
running tool its locking dogs are fully retracted reducing the
Lock
risk of the assembly hanging up while being installed.
Housing

Inner
Mandrel

Packing

‘O’ Ring

Figure 13.14 - Camco ‘DB’ Lock Mandrel

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 281 of 465

of 4658
13.3.6 Blanking Plug
The ‘DB-P’ blanking plug is designed to attach to the appropriate ‘DB’ series lock mandrel. It will
hold differential pressure in the tubing string from both above and below. The ‘DB-P’ blanking plug
and lock mandrel is installed in the ‘DB’ series landing nipples. ‘DB-P’ blanking plugs can be used in
both low and high pressure applications up to 10,000psi when attached to the appropriate lock.
a) Application
The ‘DB-P’ blanking plug can be used as a barrier to plug the tubing in
order to pressure test the tubing, when pulling tubing or to isolate flow
Rope
and tubing pressure when carrying out wellhead maintenance. The ‘DB-
Socket
P’ plug with attached lock is run in two wireline trips. The first to set the
plug body and the second to set the prong. Two runs are required to
pull this plug, the first being the prong and the second the plug body. Prong
The wireline retrievable prong, which is inserted on the second trip, is
available with either an internal or external fishing neck. The length of
the prong is also variable and can be made to protrude well above the
blanking plug if desired. The prong is completely pressure balanced and
is not locked in place.
Housing

Packing
Sections
b) Advantages
Because this blanking plug incorporates a prong which extends above
the lock mandrel fishing neck, making it ideal for use in tubing
installations where sand or scale may be present.

Bull
c) Operation Nose

Figure 13.15 - ‘DB-P’ Blanking Plug

The ‘DB-P’ is made up to the appropriate ‘DB’ series lock. This assembly is run into the tubing and
locked in the nipple using standard wireline methods. Downward jarring with the app ropriate ‘Z-6’
running tool sets the lock. Upward jarring allows retrieval of the running tool to the surface. On
the second trip into the well, the equalising ports are sealed off by installation of the prong.
When retrieving the assembly, the appropriate ‘J’ or ‘S’ series pulling tool is run into the tubing
and latches onto the prong. Upward jarring removes the prong and allows equalisation. On the
second trip, the appropriate ‘PRS’ pulling tool latches onto the lock and blanking plug. Upward
jarring unseats the lock and the assembly may be pulled to the surface.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 282 of 465

of 4658
13.4 HALLIBURTON/OTIS
13.4.1 ‘X’ and ‘R’ Running Tool
The ‘X’ running tool is a selective running tool that can be used for running both Otis selective or
non-selective lock mandrel systems.
a) Application
The type ‘X’ and ‘R’ running tools were developed to enable the ‘X’ or ‘XN'/'R’, ‘RN’ or ‘RQ’ lock
mandrels to be run in either the selective or non-selective position (described below)
into ‘X’ or ‘XN’/’R’, ‘RN’ or ‘RQ’ landing nipples. The running position is determined
by the mode of the running tool and should be manually set up at surface prior to
running the assembly into the well.
The type ‘R’ running tool is identical in design and operational concept to the type ‘X’
running tool. The ‘R’ range of downhole equipment was designed for sizes of higher
weight ranges of tubing and higher pressure rating.

a) Advantages
On occasions an ‘R’ or ‘RN’ nipple is used in step down completion nipple designs
where a mixture of ‘X’ and ‘R’ ranges can provide larger nipple bore sizes than could
be achieved using the ‘X’ range only.
One running tool can be used for both selective and non-selective mandrels.

b) Operation
The running tool is attached to the lock mandrel by a shear pin through the core and
by a set of dogs to the lock mandrel fish neck. The tool will be positioned in either
the selective or non-selective mode. The plug can then be attached to the bottom of
the lock mandrel.
When the assembly is run to depth, if it has been run if the selective mode, it needs
to be moved to the non-selective position by running through the landing nipple and
then pulling back through. This moves the tool to the selective position whereby the
assembly is lowered into and locates the nipple. Downward jarring ensures the lock
is properly located and the fish neck closed. Upward jarring then confirms plug
location and shears the shear pin in the core allowing release of the running tool.

Figure 13.16 - ‘X’ and ‘R’ Running

Tool
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 283 of 465

of 4658
13.4.2 ‘RXN’ Running Tool
a) Application
The type ‘RXN’ running tool the Otis non-selective running tool designed for
top No-Go lock mandrel systems such as the ‘RPT’ It replaced the older ‘RQX’
running tool.

b) Advantages
It has been designed such that the retainer dogs on the running tool will not
release the fishing neck of the lock mandrel until the fishing neck and expander
sleeve have moved at least 80% of their travel. With this increased assurance
of lock mandrel closure, no ‘tell tale’ devices are required.
The ‘RXN’ features an offset retainer pin to transfer the upward action from
the core through to the main mandrel and backs up as an alignment device for
pinning in the selective or non-selective position.

Figure 13.17- ‘RXN’ Running Tool

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 284 of 465

of 4658
13.4.3 Type ‘X’ Lock Mandrel
The ‘X’ lock mandrel is a selective type lock mandrel designed to locate and lock into a compatible
‘X’ nipple. This lock mandrel can be run in two modes: selective or non-selective. The mode is
determined prior to installation by selecting the running position of the running tool. This lock
mandrel is installed on the type ‘X’ running tool and pulled with the type ‘GS’ or ‘GR’ pulling tool.

a) Application
When combined with an equalising assembly and valve cap, this
lock mandrel can be used as a tubing plug capable of holding
pressure differentials from either direction. The ‘X’ lock mandrel
can also be used as a locking device for various other flow
controls such as chokes, check valves, pack-offs, instrument
hangers etc. When the ‘X’ lock is used as part of a wireline
retrievable sub-surface safety valve system, the lock mandrel
can be modified to prevent flow vibrations from vibrating the
expander mandrel upwards and thus unlocking the mandrel.
This modification is to install a lock pin which locks the expander
mandrel and the main body of the lock together after the
expander is moved downwards. This shear pin is held in place
with a leaf spring and an Allen cap screw.

b) Advantages/Disadvantages
Simply by changing the keys, a ‘X’ lock mandrel can be converted
into a ‘XN’ lock mandrel. The pressure rating of the ‘X’ lock
mandrel to be used must be thoroughly checked as the various
sizes and models in various materials vary considerably. The
pressure rating of the lock should never just be assumed.

Figure 13.18 - Otis ‘X’ Lock Mandrel

CAUTION: When running through several nipples of the same size, the ‘V’ packing can
become damaged, increasing the risk of not obtaining a good pressure test
when the plug is located in the desired nipple.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 285 of 465

of 4658
13.4.4 Type ‘XN’ Lock Mandrel
The ‘XN’ lock mandrel is the non-selective version of the ‘X’
lock mandrel and is designed to land and lock sub-surface
flow control devices in the type ‘XN’ nipple profile. It is a
bottom No-Go type lock with the No-Go shoulder machined
on the equalising valve, attached to the packing section. The
locking shoulders on the keys are chamfered to prevent them
locating in any type ‘X’ landing nipple. This lock mandrel is
installed on the type ‘X’ running tool and pulled with the type
‘GS’ or ‘GR’ pulling tool.
a) Application
The type ‘XN’ lock mandrel can be used for the same
applications as the type ‘X’ lock mandrel, except that it mates
with the ‘XN’ nipple.

b) Advantages
In general’ a ‘XN’ plug assembly has a higher pressure rating
from above than the equivalent ‘X’ plug because it
incorporates a relatively larger No-Go shoulder area. Since the
No-Go shoulder provides positive location, this lock is easy to
locate and lock into its nipple. By changing the keys the ‘XN’
lock mandrel can be converted into a type ‘X’ lock mandrel.
The pressure rating of the ‘XN’ lock mandrel to be used’
similar to the ‘X’ previously’ must be thoroughly checked as
the various sizes and models in various materials vary
considerably. The pressure rating of the lock should never just
be assumed.

Figure 13.19 - Otis Type ‘XN’ Lock Mandrel

CAUTION: When running through several nipples of the same size, the ‘V’ packing can
become damaged, increasing the risk of not obtaining a good pressure test
when the plug is located in the desired nipple.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 286 of 465

of 4658
13.4.5 Type ‘R’ and ‘RN’ Lock Mandrel
The Halliburton/Otis ‘R’ and ‘RN’ lock mandrels are designed for heavy weight tubing. They are like
the ‘X’ and ‘XN’ lock mandrels except that the locking keys have an additional groove to provide
more shoulder area for the greater pressures they require to hold. The plugs described in the
following sections are designed to fit both the ‘X’/’XN’ and ‘R’/’RN’ ranges.

13.4.6 Type ‘RPT’ Lock Mandrel

The ‘RPT’ lock mandrel is a non-selective No-Go lock mandrel and is designed to land and lock sub-
surface flow control devices in the type ‘RPT’ nipple profile. It is a top No -Go type lock with the
No-Go shoulder machined on the packing section. The locking shoulders on the keys are
chamfered so as to raise the lock up off the No-Go shoulder and hence provide much higher
pressure ratings from above. The small No-Go shoulders allows a number of ‘RPT’ nipples to be
installed with little reduced flow area. This lock mandrel is installed on the type ‘RXN’ running tool
and pulled with the type ‘GS’ or ‘GR’ pulling tool.

a) Application
The ‘RPT’ lock mandrel can be used to locate and lock various flow control devices in the tubing
string, e.g. surface controlled sub surface safety valves, direct controlled safety valves, plugs,
chokes, check valves, and instrument hangers.
The Otis range of ‘X’ and ‘PX’ plugs can be run with the ‘RPT’ lock.

b) Advantages
In general a ‘RPT’ plug assembly has a higher pressure rating from above than the equivalent ‘X’
plug because it does not use the No-Go shoulder for downward pressure. Since the No-Go
shoulder provides positive location, this lock is easy to locate and lock into its nipple.
The ‘RPT’ has a lock down feature which positively locks the expander down until pulling when the
lock down pin is sheared allowing the fish neck to move upwards.
SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 287 of 465

of 4658

Figure 13.20 - ‘RPT’ Lock Mandrel

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 288 of 465

of 4658
13.4.7 Type ‘X’ and ‘R’ Plug Chokes
The ‘X’ and ‘R’ plug chokes consists of two main components, an equalising assembly and a valve
cap. The ‘X’ and the ‘R’ plug chokes are similar in design and differ only in pressure rating. The ‘X’
plug choke is used with the ‘X’ or ‘XN’ lock mandrels, the ‘R’ plug choke is used with the ‘R’ or ‘RN’
lock mandrel.
a) Application
The ‘X’ and ‘R’ equalising assemblies provide a means of
equalising pressure differential across wireline set plug
assemblies. The ‘X’ and ‘R’ allow the plug assemblies to be
run and set in one operation and equalised and pulled in one
operation. The valve cap is simply a blanking plug, attached
to the equalising sub, to prevent flow through the plug
choke until the equalising melon has been moved off seat. It
is sometimes replaced by an extended version to act as a
sump for scale etc. or to catch gas lift valves.

b) Operation
The equalising-sub consists of a multi-ported outer housing
and an inner melon incorporating two ‘O’ Ring. When the
melon is in the running/setting position, the two ‘O’ Ring are
below the equalising ports allowing fluid by-pass through the
plug choke assembly. Once the plug choke assembly is
locked and set the action of shearing and pulling the running
tool out of the choke assembly moves the melon upwards.
This places the ‘O’ Ring across the equalising ports packing
them off.

Figure 13.21- Otis ‘X’ and ‘ R’ Plug Chokes

CAUTION: It is important not to attempt to pull the choke assembly until equalisation
has been achieved or the toolstring will be blown up the hole. The equalising
subs must be checked and redressed every time they are used as the ‘O’
Ring on the melon may be flow cut.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 289 of 465

of 4658
13.4.8 Type ‘PX’ and ‘RR’ Plug Chokes
The ‘PX’ and ‘PR’ plug chokes consist of three main components: a prong, equalising sub and valve
cap. The ‘PX’ and the ‘PR’ plug chokes are similar in design and differ only in pressure rating. The
‘PX’ plug choke is used with the ‘X’ or ‘XN’ lock mandrels, the ‘PR’ plug choke is used with the ‘R’ or
‘RN’ lock mandrel.
a) Application
The ‘PX’ and ‘PR’ equalising assemblies provide a means of
equalising pressure differential across wireline set plug
assemblies. They require two wireline runs to set and two
wireline runs to pull. The first run is to install the plug body and
the second to set the prong in the body. The assembly is
retrieved in the reverse order. The valve cap is simply a blanking
cap, attached to the equalising sub, to prevent flow through the
plug choke until the equalising prong has been removed
exposing the ports.
b) Operation
The equalising-sub consists of a multi-ported outer housing.
These ports are straddled with the prong ‘V’ packing, one set
positioned above the ports and the other below. The ‘P’ type
plug choke is used where there is a strong likelihood of sand or
scale being present in the well. The plug equalising prong is long
to extend above the top of the lock mandrel and has an external
fishing neck. Depending on the length of the equalising prong,
an amount of sand or scale can fall out on top of the plug choke
without covering the prong fishing neck. The prong is run on a
shear down type running tool, e.g., ‘SB’ or ‘JDC’ and is pulled on,
either, a shear up or down pulling tool, e.g. ‘RB’, ‘JUC’, ‘SB’ or
‘JDC’.
The seals on the prong assembly must be checked and replaced,
if necessary, after each run. The choke body may be
disassembled by removing the valve housing and cap allowing
the packing of the lock mandrel to be replaced, if required.
Always inspect the lock mandrel springs and packing after each
run.
Figure 13.22 – Plug Choke
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 290 of 465

of 4658
13.5 PETROLINE
13.5.1 ‘QX’ Running Tool
The ‘QX’ running tool is designed to run and set the Petroline lock mandrel systems.
a) Application
The ‘QX’ running tool is used to run and install ‘QX’ lock mandrels in
either Petroline or other manufacturer’s nipples. It was designed to
provide the advantage of the modern small No-Go nipple shoulders for
location only and high pressure differentials from above and below.

b) Advantages
It incorporates a tell-tale feature that indicates whether or not the lock is
correctly set once the running tool is retrieved to surface.
The running tool will not release the lock mandrel unless it has went
through the complete setting sequence and therefore will retrieve it
back to surface.
If in the event a lock becomes stuck due to sand or scale, the running
tool can be released in order to allow a retrieving string to be run with
power jars, etc.

c) Operation
When run into a nipple attached to a ‘QX’ lock, light downward jarring
positions the assembly into the nipple. Further downward jarring shears
the lower shear pins in the fishing neck which allows the inner mandrel
to move upwards into the locking position. Tension applied to the
wireline confirms the proper location of the lock and upward jarring then
shears the top pins releasing the running tool from the lock.
When the running tool is pulled from the lock, the tell-tale collet should
not contact the inner sleeve, hence, the shear pin should remain intact.

Figure 13.23 - ‘QX’ Running Tool

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 291 of 465

of 4658
13.5.2 Type ‘DU’ Pulling Tool
The ‘DU’ is designed as a standard internal fish neck pulling tool
compatible with the Halliburton/Otis ‘GS’ range of pulling tools.

a) Application
The 'DU' pulling tool is used to retrieve both Petroline and competitors
lock mandrels which have internal fish necks.

b) Advantages/Disadvantages
It is bi-directional requiring both upward jar action to release from lock
mandrels in comparison with the ‘GS’ or ‘GR’ pulling tools that are uni-
directional shear. The design still enables prolonged jarring in either
direction before electing to release.
It also does not rely on the shouldering out of the tool on the device being
pulled to enable shearing off.

c) Operation
When the pulling tool reaches the fish neck of the device to be pulled, the
collet is pushed upwards enabling it to be collapsed and enter the fish
neck. The collet returns to its original position and is backed up by the
core.
Downward jarring action can be commenced if required with the shear
pins being protected. If upward jarring is required, it shears the pin in the
‘DU’ mechanism but this only serves to enable the tool to be sheared by
subsequent downward shear action again. Upward jarring can continue to
release the device to be pulled and recover to surface.
If the device cannot be released, to shear off, reverse the jarring to
downwards and shear the releasing pin. Recover the tool to surface.

Figure 13.24 - ‘DU’ Pulling Tool

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 292 of 465

of 4658
13.5.3 ‘QX’ Lock Mandrel
The ‘QX’ lock mandrel is designed to be compatible with the Petroline ‘QN’ landing
nipple but can also be adapted to be installed in any other manufacturer’s nipples
in existing completion strings.

a) Application
The ‘QX’ lock mandrel can be used for any downhole flow control, e.g. safety
valves, plugs, chokes, gauges, flowmeters, etc.

b) Advantages
The ‘QX’ lock mandrel can be supplied to fit any seal bore in either Petroline or
third party nipple sizes. The standard pressure rating is 10,000psi but 15,000psi
versions are also available.
Large sizes are available with ultra lightweight running tools to ease installation.
The inner mandrel moves in the direction of flow to lock the keys out. There is no
need for a secondary lock down mechanism to prevent flow-induced vibration
from unseating the lock mandrel. This makes the Uniset lock design the leader in
safety and reliability in flowing well service.
The lock mandrel design can be customised to maximise its through bore. This
minimises the well fluids velocity and hence the flowing pressure drop.
The highly polished inner mandrel minimises frictional pressure loss, and the
tendency for scale adhesion.

c) Operation
The lock is installed on the ‘QX’ running tool. When the lower shear pins in the fish
neck are sheared by downward jar action, the inner mandrel moves upwards by
spring pressure locking the keys partially out.
Upward pull confirms location of the lock and following upward jar action enables
the keys to fully expand into the nipple profile. Continued jarring shears the upper
shear pins and releases the running tool.
The collet on the inner mandrel allows passage of the tell-tale collet on the
running tool confirming that if the shear pins are unbroken the lock has properly
set.

Figure 13.25 - QX Lock Madrel

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 293 of 465

of 4658
13.5.4 ‘PT’ Equalising Assembly
The ‘PT’ equalising assembly is used for the equalisation across ‘one run’ plugs attached to the
‘QX’ lock mandrel.

a) Application
The ‘PT’ equalising assembly provides a means of equalising pressure differential across wireline
set plug assemblies. It allows the plug assemblies to be run and set in one operation and also
equalised and pulled in the pulling operation. It may also be used as a blanking plug by attaching a
valve cap to the equalising sub, to prevent flow through the plug choke until the equalising melon
has been moved off seat. It is also used in conjunction with the other Petroline plugs such as the
‘pump-open’ plug.

Figure 13.26 - ‘PT’ Equalising Sub

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 294 of 465

of 4658
13.5.5 ‘Pump Open’ Plug
The pump open plug was designed to enable plugged wells to be brought back onto production
more reliably and safely than conventional wireline plugs.

a) Application
The pump open plug is used to plug wells in order to provide a barrier against well pressure. It is
used where, either; immediate production is desired before the plug can be retrieved later, or
where high amounts of sediment or debris is expected and the well needs to be cleaned up before
being able to pull the plug. The flow area has been maximised to provide high production flow
rates with minimum erosion.
The plug can be set to operate at fine limits of differential pressure to enable pressure testing and
opening within the limits of the completion integrity pressure.

b) Operation
The plug consists of a body, end cap, piston, check valve, latch and spring. The plug is opened by
differential pressure, which moves the piston and the valve downwards. The latch catches a
shoulder in the bottom of the body preventing the valve to move back upwards. The well can now
be flowed through the large ports moving the piston back upwards to the open position.

Figure 13.27- ‘Pump open’ Plug

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 295 of 465

of 4658
13.7 ASSEMBLY/DISASSEMBLY PROCEDURES
13.7.1 Safety
Safety can only be assured by using the correct assembly and disassembly procedures and
individual common sense. The company provides training courses including the current course
specifically to train wireline personnel in the necessary procedures and how to handle the
equipment in the vices and with hand tools. These procedures should be followed at a ll times
irrespective of the well site facilities available or the demands of the operation.
Failure to adhere to these instructions can cause injury to personnel from metal burrs cutting
hands, to fingers being trapped or even more serious injuries from components being propelled by
spring forces damaging eyes or other facial features.
13.7.2 Assembly Procedure
The assembly procedures for all of the equipment described in this section should be in
accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions data sheets although a general procedure is given
below. Ensure that the data sheets being used are up to date. To conduct such procedures without
current up-to-date data sheets may lead to tool malfunction causing misruns or even fishing jobs.
Similarly, if any replacement parts are required, ensure that they are obtained from an authorised
source for the same reason as given above.
1) Ensure all parts are clean, free from rust and are fit for use, i.e. no damage or excessive wear
and tear.
2) Ensure all elastomers are in good condition and new items are not past the useable date.
3) Gather all tooling required to conduct the assembly with a proper vice.
4) Check that the correct shear pins or screws are available, if required.
5) Apply coatings of grease where advised in the manufacturer’s data book and begin
assembly.
6) Assemble the tool as per the manufacturer’s instructions.
7) Ensure all threads are made up tightly especially grub screws.
8) Ensure all shear screws are made up correctly with a back off - turn, if applicable.
9) After assembly, conduct a function check with the corresponding mating tool.
10) Label and set the tool aside, ready for use.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 296 of 465

of 4658
13.7.3 Disassembly Procedure
The disassembly procedures also need be in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions data
sheets. A general procedure, however, is given below.
1) Ensure the proper tools and vice are available.
2) Clean the tool in the cleaning bath.
3) Disassemble the tool in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions paying particular
attention to safety, i.e. spring tension, trapped pressure, etc.).
4) Remove all broken shear pins or screws.
5) Clean all the individual parts in the bath.
6) Check the condition of all parts and elastomers.
7) Make a list of all parts needing to be replaced and obtain from stock.
8) Reassemble the tool without any pinning and check for operation.
9) Prepare the tool for storage on the rack or in the toolbox.

13.7.4 Handling
All griping and handling of the components in the vice or with wrenches or hand tools, should also
be in accordance with the manufacturer’s procedures otherwise damage may be caused to the
parts incurring expense for replacements, i.e. crushing, tong marking, damage to sealing areas,
etc.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 297 of 465

of 4658

13.8 RUNNING/PULLING PROCEDURES

All running and pulling procedures should be in accordance with the manufacturer’s Instructions
Manual or to the companies operating procedures. This includes all HSE policies and procedures.
If there is any doubt over whether a procedure is current or correct, or if any clarity is required,
check with your line supervisor before proceeding with any operation.
The following procedures are generic for running and pulling both selective and non-selective plugs
systems.

13.8.1 Safety
All plug running and pulling operations must be conducted according to the authorised Safety
Management System in operation at the well site. The SMS system will include the policies and
procedures to be used. Irrespective of the SMS, employees must also work according to the
company’s safety policies and procedures. If it is noted that there is a conflict between
procedures, it should be brought to the attention of your immediate supervisor to obtain
clarification of which procedure should be employed.
A PTW will be obtained before commencing work which should ensure safety of operations within
the work area.
At no time should a wireline crew conduct unsafe operations.

13.8.2 Selective Plug Running Procedure

The following is a generic running procedure for selective plug systems. The most common
selective nipple/plug systems still used today are the Halliburton/Otis 'X’ or ‘R’ systems.
1) Rig up the surface pressure control equipment according to the work programme.
2) Pressure test the lubricator.
3) Assemble the wireline toolstring for the operation to be carried out.
4) Conduct plug pre-installation operations, e.g. tubing drift, depth correlation, etc.
5) Make up the lock mandrel, equalising valve, plug and the running tool assembly.
6) Attach the running tool/plug assembly to the programmed wireline toolstring.
7) Lower the toolstring into the tubing running slowly through the wellhead and at any depth
where there is any sensitive completion equipment such as safety valves, SPMs, etc.
8) Run into the hole until 50ft above the target nipple and conduct a weight check.
9) Run into the nipple slowly, it may be necessary to tap lightly with the jars to engage and pass
through the nipple bore.
10) Manipulate the toolstring to activate the selective locating device.
11) Engage the lock mandrel in the nipple and if the weight indicator confirms location, begin
jarring to set the lock mandrel. If the plug is a one-trip plug, retrieval of the running tool
closes the equalising assembly.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 298 of 465

of 4658
12) Test the lock mandrel by applying an upward strain on the wireline. If the mandrel is
properly locked in the nipple, upward jarring will shear the releasing pin in the running tool
and allow the tool string to be retrieved to surface.
13) If the plug is not properly locked in the nipple, the setting procedure may need to be
repeated.
14) If the lock is not properly set, it will be retrieved back to surface with the running tool.
15) On recovery of the toolstring to surface, check the tell-tale device for correct tool operation,
if applicable.
16) If a two trip plug is being set, attach the prong to the toolstring and run in again to install the
prong on a shear down running tool.
17) Conduct any other planned operations according to the programme then rig down the
pressure control equipment, if applicable.
13.8.3 Non-Selective Plug Running Procedure
The following is a generic running procedure for non-selective plug systems. There are a variety of
systems available today as described earlier in this section.
1) Rig up the lubricator assembly according to the work programme.
2) Pressure test the lubricator.
3) Assemble the wireline toolstring for the operation to be carried out.
4) Conduct plug pre-installation operations, e.g. tubing drift, depth correlation, etc.
5) Make up the lock mandrel, equalising valve, plug and the running tool assembly.
6) Attach the running tool/plug assembly to the programmed wireline tool string.
7) Lower the tool string into the tubing running slowly through the wellhead and at any d epth
where there is any sensitive completion equipment such as safety valves, SPMs, etc.
8) Run into the hole until 50ft above the target nipple and conduct a weight check.
9) Run into the hole and tag the nipple slowly, accurately recording the depth with the jars
open.
10) If necessary, tap lightly with the jars to engage the nipple bore.
11) Confirm location of the plug by observing weight loss on the weight indicator. Begin jarring
to set the lock mandrel. If the plug is a one trip plug, retrieval of the running tool closes the
equalising assembly.
12) Test the lock mandrel by applying an upward strain on the wireline. If the mandrel is
properly locked in the nipple, upward jarring will shear the releasing pin in the running tool
and allow the tool string to be retrieved to surface.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 299 of 465

of 4658
13) If the plug is not properly locked in the nipple, the setting procedure may need to be
repeated.
14) If the lock is not properly set, it will be retrieved back to surface with the running tool.
15) On recovery of the toolstring to surface, check the tell-tale device for correct tool operation,
if applicable.
16) If a two trip plug is being set, attach the prong to the toolstring and run in again to install the
prong on a shear down running tool.
17) Conduct any other planned operations according to the programme then rig down the
pressure control equipment, if applicable.
13.8.4 Single Trip Pulling Procedure
The pulling procedure for both selective and non-selective systems is essentially the same.

CAUTION: Ensure any pressure differential across the plug at depth is negligible, or is
equalised, prior to pulling a plug unless the device being pulled has an
equalising feature.

1) Rig up the lubricator assembly according to the work programme, if not already rigged up.
2) Pressure test the lubricator.
3) Assemble the wireline toolstring for the operation to be carried out.
4) Conduct plug pre-installation operations, e.g. tubing drift, depth correlation, etc.
5) Make up the correct plug pulling tool with the pulling prong onto the programmed wireline
tool string. It is essential that the correct equalising prong is selected.
6) Lower the tool string into the tubing running slowly through the wellhead and at any depth
where there is any sensitive completion equipment such as safety valves, SPMs, etc.
7) Run into the hole until 50ft above the target nipple and conduct a weight check.
8) Run in and latch onto the lock mandrel. As the pulling tool enters the lock mandrel the prong
will shift the equalising valve open (slight downward jar action may be necessary to shift the
valve). Always expect pressure below the plug.
9) The weight of the tool string should be allowed to rest on the lock mandrel while pressure
across the control device is being equalised. Equalisation across the plug will be noted by
changing surface pressure in the tubing.
10) Tap downwards, if required, to loosen the lock mandrel in the nipple.
11) Pull the plug according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 300 of 465

of 4658
12) Check the weight to confirm the plug has been pulled from the nipple.
13) Retrieve the toolstring, pulling tool and lock assembly to surface.
14) Conduct an LSA check and handle as appropriate.
15) Check the condition of the plug.
16) Conduct any other planned operations according to the programme then rig down the
pressure control equipment, if applicable.

13.8.5 Two Trip Pulling Procedure

The pulling procedure for both selective and non-selective systems is essentially the same.

CAUTION: Ensure any pressure differential across the plug at depth is negligible, or is
equalised, prior to pulling a plug unless the device being pulled has an
equalising feature.

1) Rig up the lubricator assembly according to the work programme, if not already rigged up.
2) Pressure test the lubricator.
3) Assemble the wireline toolstring for the operation to be carried out.
4) Conduct plug pre-installation operations, e.g. tubing drift, depth correlation, etc.
5) Attach the pulling tool to the toolstring and install into the lubricator.
6) Lower the tool string into the tubing running slowly through the wellhead and at any depth
where there is any sensitive completion equipment such as safety valves, SPMs, etc.
7) Run into the hole until 50ft above the target nipple and conduct a weight check.
8) Run in and latch onto the prong. Pull the prong from the plug using straight pull or jar action
if necessary. Equalisation across the plug will be noted by changing surface pressure in the
tubing.
9) Pull the prong and retrieve to surface.
10) Make up the correct plug pulling tool.
11) Lower the tool string into the tubing running slowly through the wellhead and at any depth
where there is any sensitive completion equipment such as safety valves, SPMs, etc.
12) Run into the hole until 50ft above the target nipple and conduct a weight check.
13) Run in and latch onto the lock mandrel.
14) Tap downwards, if required, to loosen the lock mandrel in the nipple.
15) Pull the plug according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
16) Check the weight to confirm the plug has been pulled from the nipple.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 301 of 465

of 4658
17) Retrieve the toolstring, pulling tool and lock assembly to surface.
18) Conduct an LSA check and handle as appropriate.
19) Check the condition of the plug.
20) Conduct any other planned operations according to the programme then rig down the
pressure control equipment, if applicable.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 302 of 465

of 4658

NOTES
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 303 of 465

of 4658

NOTES
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 304 of 465

of 4658

14 KICKOVER TOOLS

14.1 INTRODUCTION
This section is to provide students with an overview of the application and operating procedures
for kickover tools only as this subject is covered in greater depth in a subsequent wireline training
module.
A kickover tool is used to install and retrieve valves from side pocket mandrels (SPMs). The most
common SPMs in use today are the Camco ‘KBMG’, ‘KBUG’, ‘MMG’ and the Otis ‘WB’, ‘RW’ and
‘RL’. The Otis and Merla Teledyne product lines have recently been transferred to Camco. There
are many sizes for various tubing ranges but there is only two sizes of pocket, either, 1” or 1 1/2” ID.
Most of the tools incorporate, from top to bottom:
Fishing neck with a pin thread connection
Locating trigger
Kick springs
Arm assembly with a box thread on the lower end for the attachment of a running or pulling
tool

14.2 CAMCO

14.2.1 Type ‘OK’ Kickover Tool

The ‘OK’ series includes ‘OK1’, ‘OK’5, ‘OK’6 and ‘OK7’ kickover tools. All have the same basic
features except the ‘OK5’ which can be re-pinned without disassembly and features a stainless
steel arm assembly. To re-pin the ‘OK1’, some disassembly is required.

a) Application
The Camco ‘OK’ type kickover tools are used to with the ‘KBMG’ and ‘KBUG’ 1” SPMs to install and
retrieve valves.

b) Advantages
The Camco ‘O’ series kickover tools are especially suitable for wireline operations in highly
deviated wells.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 305 of 465

of 4658
14.2.2 Type ‘OM’ Kickover Tool
The ‘OM’ series includes ‘OM1’, ‘OM2’ and ‘OM5’ kickover tools. All have the same basic features
except the ‘OM5’ can be re-pinned without disassembly and has a stainless steel arm assembly.

a) Application
The ‘OM’ type kickover tools are used with ‘MMG’ 1 1/2” SPMs to install and retrieve valves.

b) Advantages
The Camco ‘O’ series kickover tools are especially suitable for wireline operations in highly
deviated wells.

14.2.3 Camco Kickover Tool Operation

The kickover tool can be run to install a valve with a latch and running tool or, alternatively, to
retrieve a valve and latch from a pocket with a pulling tool. To describe the tool operation, a valve
installation is used although the tool operation in both cases is the same. Refer to Figure 5.1.
1) Refer to the generic running procedure in section Error! Reference source not found.. Install
a valve catcher.
2) The kickover tool is run in the hole with the kickover arm held in the straight position.
3) When the tool is run below then pulled back up into the SPM the trigger engages the
orientation sleeve in the top of the SPM which aligns the arm kickover axis to the pocket. A
specified pull on the wireline compresses the spring and releases the kickover arm which
kicks out the valve.
4) The kickover tool is now lowered so that the valve engages the pocket.
5) As the valve is lowered the knuckle on the kickover arm allows the valve to align with the
pocket.
6) Jarring downwards ensures the valve is properly located and the latch locked in behind the
SPM lug. This is confirmed by conducting a straight pull on the wireline.
7) After release from the latch, the tool is pulled back up into the orientation sleeve where
upward jarring will shear the pin in the trigger and allow the tool to be pulled to surface.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 306 of 465

of 4658

Figure 14.1 - Camco ‘O’ Series Kickover Tool Operation

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 307 of 465

of 4658
14.3 TELEDYNE MERLA
14.3.1 ‘TMP’ Kickover Tool
The ‘TMP’ was designed for installing and pulling 1” valves. The ‘TMP’ series of tools can be used
with any other type of side pocket mandrel. The kickover tool performs three important functions,
i.e.
1) Locates the mandrel.
2) Orientates the valve or pulling tool to the correct position.
3) Laterally offsets the valve or pulling tool into position over the pocket for setting or pulling
the valve from the mandrel.

a) Application
The ‘TMP’ type kickover tools are used with ‘WB’ and ‘RW’ 1” SPMs to install and retrieve valves.

b) Advantages
The design features have been incorporated to make it easy to service and practical to use. No
disassembly is required and only one shear pin needs replaced and can be accomplished hanging
from the lubricator allowing quicker round tripping.
The ‘TMP’ series of tools can be used with various other types of 1” side pocket mandrel.
The kickover arm is latched back into the straight position when pulled preventing dragging, hence
wear and tear to the tool and tubing. This is also a very important feature in the event of a fishing
job.
14.3.2 ‘TP’ Kickover Tool
The ‘TP’ was designed for installing and pulling 11/2” valves. The ‘TP’ series of tools can be used
with any other type of 11/2” side pocket mandrel.

a) Application
The ‘TP’ type kickover tools are used with ‘RL’ 11/2” SPMs to install and retrieve valves.

b) Advantages
The design features have been incorporated to make it easy to service and practical to use. No
disassembly is required and only one shear pin needs replaced and can be accomplished hanging
from the lubricator allowing quicker round tripping.
The ‘TP’ series of tools can be used with various other types of 11/2” side pocket mandrel.
The kickover arm is latched back into the straight position when pulled preventing dragging, hence
wear and tear to the tool and tubing. This is also a very important feature in the event of a fishi ng
job.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 308 of 465

of 4658

14.3.3 Merla Kickover Tool Operation

The following is a general kickover tool operation describing the installation of a valve in a side
pocket.
1) Refer to the generic running procedure in section Error! Reference source not found.. Install
a valve catcher.
2) The kickover tool is run in the hole with the kickover arm held in the straight position.
3) When the tool is run below then pulled back up into the SPM the trigger engages the
orientation sleeve in the top of the SPM which aligns the arm kickover axis to the pocket. A
specified pull on the wireline against the latch spring forces the arm outwards which kicks
out the valve. The arm is retained in this position by the latch mechanism.
4) The kickover tool is now lowered so that the valve engages the pocket.
5) As the valve is lowered the spring loaded knuckle on the kickover arm allows the valve to
align with the pocket.
6) Jarring downwards ensures the valve is properly located and the latch locked in behin d the
SPM lug. This is confirmed by conducting a straight pull on the wireline.
7) After release from the latch, the tool is pulled back up into the orientation sleeve where
upward jarring will shear the pin in the trigger.
8) Pulling back through the top of the mandrel will move and latch the arm back into the
straight position.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 309 of 465

of 4658

Figure 14.2 - Terladyne Merla Type ‘TM’ and ‘TMP’ Kickover Tool
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 310 of 465

of 4658
14.4 ASSEMBLY/DISASSEMBLY PROCEDURES
14.4.1 Safety
Safety can only be assured by using the correct assembly and disassembly procedures and
individual common sense. The company provides training courses including the current course
specifically to train wireline personnel in the necessary procedures and how to handle the
equipment in the vices and use hand tools. These procedures should be followed at all times
irrespective of the well site facilities available or the demands of the operation.
Failure to adhere to these instructions can cause injury to personnel from metal burrs cutting
hands, to fingers being trapped or even more serious injuries from components being propelled by
spring forces damaging eyes or other facial features.
14.4.2 Assembly Procedure
The assembly procedures for all of the equipment described in this section should be in
accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions data sheets although a general procedure is given
below. Ensure that the data sheets being used are up to date. To conduct such procedures without
current up-to-date data sheets may lead to tool malfunction causing misruns or even fishing jobs.
Similarly, if any replacement parts are required, ensure that they are obtained from an authorised
source for the same reason as given above.
1) Ensure all parts are clean, free from rust and are fit for use, i.e. no damage or excessive wear
and tear, especially the trigger.
2) Ensure all elastomers are in good condition and new items are not past the useable date.
3) Gather all tooling required to conduct the assembly at a proper vice.
4) Check that the correct shear pins or screws are available.
5) Apply coatings of grease where advised in the manufacturer’s data book and begin
assembly.
6) Assemble the tool as per the manufacturer’s instructions.
7) Ensure all threads are made up tightly especially grub screws.
8) Ensure all shear screws are made up correctly with a back off-turn, if applicable.
9) After assembly, conduct a function check ensuring the kickover action is strong enough for
the operation.
10) Set the tool aside ready for use.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 311 of 465

of 4658
14.4.3 Disassembly Procedure
The disassembly procedures also need be in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions data
sheets. A general procedure, however, is given below.
1) Ensure the proper tools and vice are available.
2) Clean the tool in the cleaning bath.
3) Disassemble the tool in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions paying particular
attention to safety, i.e. spring tension, etc.
4) Remove all broken shear pins or screws.
5) Clean all the individual parts in the bath.
6) Check the condition of all parts.
7) Make a list of all parts needing to be replaced and obtain from stock.
8) Reassemble the tool and check for operation.
9) Prepare the tool for storage on the rack or in the toolbox.

14.4.4 Handling
All griping and handling of the components in the vice or with wrenches or hand tools, should also
be in accordance with the manufacturer’s procedures otherwise damage may be caused to the
parts incurring expense for replacements, i.e. crushing, tong marking, damage to sealing areas,
etc.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 312 of 465

of 4658
14.5 RUNNING/PULLING PROCEDURES
All running and pulling procedures should be in accordance with the manufacturer’s Instructions
Manual or to clients operating procedures. This includes all HSE policies and procedures.
If there is any doubt over whether a procedure is current or correct, or if any clarity is required,
check with your line supervisor before proceeding with any operation.
The following procedures are generic for running and pulling a device from a SPM. The
manufacturer’s tool specific procedure should be used.

14.5.1 Safety
All tool running and pulling operations must be conducted according to the authorised Safety
Management System in operation at the well site. The SMS system will include the policies and
procedures to be used. Irrespective of the SMS, employees must also work according to the
company’s safety policies and procedures. If it is noted that there is a conflict between
procedures, it should be brought to the attention of your immediate supervisor to obtain
clarification of which procedure should be employed.
A PTW must be obtained before commencing work, which should ensure safety of operations
within the work area.
14.5.2 Running Procedure
1) Check the type of mandrel to be serviced and ensure that the kickover tool is the correct tool
for the operation including the running tool and valve.
2) Rig up the surface pressure control equipment according to the work programme.
3) Pressure test the lubricator.
4) Assemble the wireline toolstring for the operation to be carried out.
5) Conduct SPM valve pre-installation operations, e.g. tubing drift, depth correlation, etc.
6) Install a valve catcher.
7) Prepare the kickover tool for running by ensuring it is shear pinned and in good working
order.
8) Make up the running tool to the valve latch and pin the latch to the running tool. Install a
knuckle joint between the jar and the positioning tool, if required.
9) Make up the running tool/valve assembly to the kickover tool. Take care to avoid tripping
the trigger.
10) Attach the kickover tool/running tool assembly to the programmed wireline toolstring.
11) Lower the toolstring into the tubing running slowly through the wellhead and at any depth
where there is any sensitive completion equipment such as safety valves, other SPMs, etc.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 313 of 465

of 4658
12) Run into the hole until 50ft above the target SPM and conduct a weight check.
13) Run in the hole to a point several feet below the SPM. Do not run the tool below the next
lower mandrel because the tool cannot be pulled back through the mandrel without
shearing the trigger pin. Once the pin is sheared, the tool cannot orientate or kick-over.
14) Pick up the tool slowly until tension is observed on the weight indicator. This means the
finger on the kickover tool has engaged the orientation sleeve aligning the kick over arm
with the pocket.
15) If the locator key misses the orientating slot, lower the tool past the mandrel and repeat the
procedure.
16) Record the depth.
17) Apply an overpull of 150-400lbs, dependent on the working depth and deviation, to kick out
the arm.
18) The toolstring is lowered until the valve locates the side pocket.
19) Jar downwards to latch the valve securely in the side pocket.
20) Check and confirm the setting depth.
21) Upward jarring confirms the valve is latched and releases running tool.
22) The toolstring can be pulled out of the hole.
23) On recovery of the toolstring to surface, check the running tool for correct operation.
24) Conduct any other planned operations according to the programme then rig down the
pressure control equipment, if applicable.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 314 of 465

of 4658
14.5.3 Pulling Procedure

CAUTION: Ensure any pressure differential between the tubing and the annulus at the
SPM depth is negligible, or is equalised, prior to pulling a valve from a side
pocket unless the device being pulled has an equalising feature.

1) Check the type of mandrel to be serviced and ensure that the kickover tool is the correct tool
for the operation including the pulling tool and spacer, if required.
2) Rig up the surface pressure control equipment according to the work programme.
3) Pressure test the lubricator.
4) Assemble the wireline toolstring for the operation to be carried out.
5) Conduct any pre-installation operations, e.g. tubing drift, depth correlation, etc.
6) Install a valve catcher.
7) Prepare the kickover tool for running by ensuring it is shear pinned and in good working
order.
8) Make up the pulling tool to the spacer, if applicable.
9) Make up the pulling to the kickover tool.
10) Attach the kickover tool/pulling tool assembly to the programmed wireline toolstring.
11) Lower the toolstring into the tubing running slowly through the wellhead and at any depth
where there is any sensitive completion equipment such as safety valves, other SPMs, etc.
12) Run into the hole until 50ft above the target SPM and conduct a weight check.
13) Run in the hole to a point several feet below the SPM. Do not run the tool below the next
lower mandrel because the tool cannot be pulled back through the mandrel without
shearing the locator key pin. Once the pin is sheared, the tool can not orientate or kick-over.
14) Pick up the tool slowly until tension is observed on the weight indicator. This means the
finger on the kickover tool has engaged the orientation sleeve aligning the kick over arm
with the pocket.
15) If the locator key misses the orientating slot, lower the tool past the mandrel and repeat the
procedure.
16) Apply an overpull of 150-400lbs, dependent on the working depth and deviation, to kick out
the arm.
17) Carefully lower the toolstring, tapping lightly and ensure the pulling tool latches the valve.
(Note: excessive downward jarring may damage the fishing neck and/or the side pocket if
the pulling tool is not properly latched).
18) Jar up to open the equalising device, if applicable.
19) Jar up to shear the latch shear pin and allow the valve to release from the SPM.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 315 of 465

of 4658
20) The toolstring can be pulled out of the hole with the retrieved valve attached.
21) On recovery of the toolstring to surface, check the running tool for correct operation.
22) Run and pull the valve catcher.
23) Conduct any other planned operations according to the programme then rig down the
pressure control equipment, if applicable.

14.6 LATCHES
Latches, attached to the side pocket valves, are designed to lock the valve into the side pocket
mandrel. The internal design of the SPM and the OD of the valve determines the use and size of
the latch required. Most latches are designed to latch into a profile in the top of the side pocket,
but some mandrels also have a lower profile to accept integral latches which are used if the upper
profile becomes worn.
The following sub-sections described the various latches which can be selected and their features.

14.6.1 ‘BK’ Latch

The ‘BK’ latch is a spring-loaded ring style latch that locks a 1” OD SPM into the side pockets. The
‘BK’ latch is used with valves and accessories without integral latches. The operation of the latch is
that the latch ring is pushed upward and to the side as it enters the pocket and after the valve is
properly located in the pocket, the latch spring forces the latch ring back down into the l ocking
profile in the pocket.
During pulling, the shear pin is sheared and allows the latch body to move from behind the latch
ring which unlocks the valve run on a ‘JK’ running tool and pulled on a 1 1/4” ‘JDC’ or ‘SM’ pulling
tool.
14.6.2 ‘BEK-2’ Latch
The ‘BEK-2’ latch is similar to the ‘BK’ latch except it has a hole through its centre (0.375”
diameter). It is run and retrieved with the same tools as the ‘BK’ latch described above but
requires a core extension to the pulling tool. The ‘BEK-2’ latch is used when flow is required
through the lock, e.g. when used with gas lift, chemical injection or kill type valves.
14.6.3 ‘RK’ Latch
The ‘RK’ is a spring-loaded ring style latch that locks 1 1/2” OD valves and accessories into ‘MMG’
series SPMs. It has a debris barrier on top of the mandrel latch tube in the form of two ‘O’ rings on
the bottom skirt. It is run on an ‘RK-1’ running tool and pulled by a 15/8” ‘JDS’ or ‘SM’ pulling tool.

14.6.4 ‘RK-1’ Latch

The ‘RK-1’ latch is similar to the ‘RK’ except this 1 1/2” OD latch does not have ‘O’ rings, but
contains longitudinal grooves acting as flow conduits between the latch and the pocket. This latch
is used when pressure communication between the latch and the tube mandrel is required. Run
on an ‘RK-1’ running tool and pulled on a 15/8” ‘JDS’ or ‘SM’ pulling tool.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 316 of 465

of 4658
14.6.5 ‘RKP’ Latch
The ‘RKP’ latch is similar to the ‘RK’ latch except it has a hole through its centre (.0453” ID). It is
run and retrieved with the same tools as the ‘RK’ latch. The ‘RKP’ latch is needed when flow is
required through the lock, e.g. when used with gas lift, chemical injection or kill type valves.

14.6.6 ‘R’ Latch

The ‘R’ latch is used to lock 11/2” OD side pocket accessories in the type ‘MM’, ‘MME’, ‘RL’ and
‘RLF’ side pocket mandrels. It incorporates a spring loaded concentric cam type latch. The latch is
pushed up and into the lock body as it enters the side pocket. Once the lock No-Go is in place, the
latch cams out under spring pressure into the nipple profile and holds the side-pocket valve in
place.
When pulling the lock a pin is sheared which allows the latch to swing into the lock body and the
side pocket valve can be retrieved. It is run on a ‘JC-3’ or type ‘M’ running tool and pulled with a 2”
‘JDC’ or ‘SM’ pulling tool.

14.6.7 ‘RA’ Latch

The Type ‘RA’ latch is identical to the ‘R’ latch except for two ‘O’ rings below the No-Go which act
as a debris barrier. It also has a shorter cam nose. It is run and retrieved with the same tools as the
‘R’ latch.
14.6.8 ‘M’ Latch
The type ‘M’ is a 1” latch used with type ‘RW’ side pocket mandrels. This type is a collet type latch,
the collet of which moves up and is deflected into the lock body as it passes the lock recess.
It is run on an ‘M’ or ‘J’ type running tool which requires downward jarring to set and upward
jarring to shear off, which in turn locks the collet in place. The 1 1/2” type ‘SM’ or ‘JDS’ pulling tool
is used to retrieve this latch. A shear pin in the latch body is sheared, allowing the collet to retract
and the side pocket valve to be retrieved.
14.6.9 ‘T2’ Latch
The type ‘T2’ is a 11/2” latch used with type ‘RL’ side pocket mandrels. This is also a collet type
latch which move up and deflects into the lock body as it passes the lock recess. It incorporates an
‘O’ ring below its No-Go, which acts as a debris barrier. It is run on a ‘MO’ or ‘J’ type running tool
which requires downward jarring to set and upward jarring to shear off which in turn locks the
collet in place. The 2” type ‘SM’ or ‘JDS’ pulling tool is used to retrieve the latch. A shear pin in the
latch body is sheared allowing the collet to retract and the side pocket valve to be retrieved.
SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 317 of 465

of 4658

Figure 14.3- Latches

SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 318 of 465

of 4658

Figure 14.4 – Latches

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 319 of 465

of 4658

NOTES
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 320 of 465

of 4658

NOTES
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 321 of 465

of 4658

15 SHIFTING/POSITIONING TOOLS

15.1 SAFETY
The use of shifting or positioning tools usually runs a risk of having tools being blown up or down
the hole dependent upon the whether an upward opening or closing SSD is being manipulated. A
common preference is to open SSDs with downward shifting as differential pressures do not
usually act down against the formation but tend to be upwards into the tubing.
The preferred method to reduce this risk is to equalise pressure across the sleeve before opening
but this is not always possible. In cases where there is high differential pressure, it is, therefore,
essential that the sleeve is moved to the equalising position before fully opening.

15.2 BAKER
15.2.1 ‘D2’ Shifting Tool
The model ‘D2’ shifting tool is a wireline operated tool designed to open or close the Baker type ‘L’
sliding-sleeve.
a) Application
The ‘D2’ shifting tool is used for opening and closing Baker ‘L’ sliding sleeves to enable
communication between the tubing and the annulus outside the tubing. The sliding sleeve is
moved by means of wireline action to open or close the sleeve.
b) Advantages
Any number of sleeves of the same size, in a single tubing string can be shifted in any combination
or in any sequence.
c) Operation
The shifting tool incorporates an automatic locating collet which gives a positive indication to the
wireline operator when the desired sleeve is reached. The sleeve is opened or closed by upward or
downward jarring. The same tool can be used for both operations by simply swapping round the
end subs. Once the sliding-sleeve has been shifted to its fully open or closed position, the shifting
tool will automatically release. The sleeve can then be checked that it has fully moved by sitting
back into it. If it is in the correct position, the ‘D2’ shifting tool will pass straight through.
The ‘D2’ has a built-in safety feature that can hold it in place when there is an overbalance from
the annulus. It has an emergency release to allow it to be sheared if the ‘L’ sliding sleeve will not
open or close. The ‘D2’ can also be deliberately released without shifting the sliding sleeve.

CAUTION: Before running the ‘D2’, the collet size and the distance from the collet to
the shifting dogs must be determined.
SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 322 of 465

of 4658

Figure 15.1- Baker ‘D2’ Shifting Tool

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 323 of 465

of 4658
15.3 CAMCO
The Camco ‘DB’ sliding sleeve is operated either by the range of Halliburton/Otis shifting tools or
their own ‘C’ shifting tool which is similar to the Otis ‘B’ tool described in the next section. The
application and advantages are therefore the same as that listed in the next section. Reference
must always be made to the Camco data sheets to ensure the correct tool is being selected.

15.4 HALLIBURTON/OTIS

15.4.1 ‘B’ Positioning Tool

The ‘B’ positioning tool is the universal tool designed by Otis for all of their SSDs. Not only is it
used by the Halliburton group and their clients but is also used by their competitors due to its ease
of operation and versatility. Many competitors SSDs have been designed to be operated by the
Otis ‘B’ shifting tool.

a) Application
For use to open or close any Halliburton/Otis SSD and also many other manufacturer’s SSDs, i.e.
type ‘AO’, ‘XA’, ‘RA’, ‘XO’, ‘RO’, ‘XD’, ‘RD’ and Baker ‘CMU’/’CMD’ SSDs.
They are also used extensively with tubing conveyed perforating systems for drop subs which also
use a sliding sleeve to activate.
By removing the self releasing shoulder the tool can be used as a positive shifting tool as described
below.

b) Advantages
This tool is universal for both opening and closing sleeves and has a very simple method of
operation. By simply turning the tool upwards or downwards, it will shift up or down. It has a self
releasing mechanism which provides conformation that the sleeve has fully moved before
retrieving the tool.
It also has an emergency release in case it cannot self release to enable it to be recovered.

NOTE: If other sleeves of the same size are in the string then they may also need to
be moved in order to get the tool to depth or back to surface. In cases where
upward shifting is to be carried out and this is undesirable, a tool with
positive keys may be used as it is sheared before releasing hence cannot
make contact with any other sleeve.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 324 of 465

of 4658
c) Operation
The tool is attached to the toolstring with the keys 90° shoulders facing the way the sl eeve is to be
shifted, i.e. shoulder facing up to shift upwards and vice versa.
When the tool reaches the SSD it is slowly lowered into the sleeve until the spring loaded keys
engage the matching profile at the top or bottom of the sleeve.
When the keys are confirmed to be engaged, begin jarring in the direction of moving the sleeve.
When the sleeve is reaching full travel the self releasing shoulders are nipped between the
chamfers on the end of the sleeve and the SSD top or bottom sub. This causes the keys to be
pushed inwards until the key shifting shoulders clear the sleeve profile and the tool becomes free.
If the tools emergency release prematurely occurs, usually only found on return to surface, the
tool must be re-pinned and run again.
SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 325 of 465

of 4658

Figure 15.2 - Otis ‘BO’ Shifting Tool

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 326 of 465

of 4658
15.4.2 ‘BO’ Selective Positioning Tool
The ‘BO’ selective shifting tool is designed to selectively position the shifting sleeve inside an Otis
SSD.

a) Application
It is designed so that the shifting sleeve of any sliding door
can be shifted downwards without shifting any other sleeve
Fishing Neck
downwards.

b) Advantages Upper Key

Retainer
Use of this tool saves having to move sleeves in SSDs higher
up in the well while attempting to get to the target SSD.
Key

c) Operation
Key Spring
The ‘BO’ selective positioning tool should normally be run
with the positioning keys retracted which is the selective
Lower Key Retainer
position. The keys are held in with a sleeve.
Set Screw
The locating dogs are designed to locate on the bottom of the
desired SSD. Spring Housing

Upward tension on the wire moves dogs and the sleeve to Spring

their lower position releasing the positioning keys.

Dog Retainer
The positing keys are then able to locate the shifting sleeve
and manipulation of the sleeve can commence.
Spring
Once the shifting sleeve has completed its downward travel,
Spin Pin
the positioning keys will collapse inwards and pass through
the SSD the same way as the non-selective tool. Locating Dog

By placing the ‘BO’ selective positioning tool in the selective

position, it enables it to pass through any SSD above the
target SSD. Main Mandrel

Figure 15.3- Otis ‘BO’ Selective Positioning Tool

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 327 of 465

of 4658

NOTES
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 328 of 465

of 4658

16 WIRELINE FISHING
Fishing is the name given to the operation to retrieve items from the well which may be damaged,
stuck or have been dropped, and is an efficient way of rectifying this kind of problem. The most
common reason for fishing is when a wireline has broken either at the surface and remains visible,
or downhole, and not visible. In the latter case, several conditioning and preparatory trips may be
necessary before the ‘fish’ can be located successfully and retrieved. As each fishing job is
different, these operations cannot be covered by specific procedures, but by following the ‘best
practices’ in this section, there will be a better chance of a successful operation. It is in this area
the operator’s experience and skill can play a significant part.

16.1 Introduction
Wireline fishing is not a planned operation, the variety of possible fishing jobs make it impossible
to detail definitive procedures, however, it should be remembered that standard wireline
procedures and practices must still be followed wherever possible even when the rig up will
almost certainly be different from normal.
Wireline fishing becomes necessary due to a number of reasons, ranging from operator error,
often due to poor communication, bad practices, inexperience etc. through to problems
experienced in today’s deep and often deviated wells, such as asphaltines, scale, chemical
composition, and high temperatures which attack wirelines, equipment and seals and serve to
compound problems.
Over the years there have been vast improvements in downhole technology, such as completion
design, plugging systems, subsurface safety valves etc. There have also been improvements in
wire quality and strength, wireline units, and surface equipment. However, the areas that have
seen few changes are the wirelining technique itself.
Before tackling the various methods of fishing, we will discuss what can be done to avoid a fishing
job in the first place.
Fishing techniques are extremely varied and depend largely on the circumstances and well
conditions for each individual situation.
The aim of wireline is to complete the set programme as quickly and safely as possible without
getting the tools stuck or breaking the wire.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 329 of 465

of 4658
16.2 prevention
It is the aim of the wireline operator to carry out operations in a safe and timely manner without
becoming stuck, breaking the wire, being blown up the hole or losing tools etc. To prevent these
occurrences the following good wireline practices should be observed:
Check and maintain equipment regularly. Function test all equipment to be run including
hydraulic and spang jars
Check that running/pulling tools move to the sheared position by removing the shear
pins and testing them on an appropriate fish neck
Always ensure that a tool with an OD. larger than the rest of the toolstring is run below
the jars and check that all thread connections are tight
Observe that the load limitations of the wire being used are never exceeded
Maintain the wireline and lubricate with oil when running into the well to reduce friction
and wear to the stuffing box. Take precautions to avoid kinking the wire and check
that the counter is correctly zeroed at the appropriate datum point
Keep the hydraulic pressure relief valve correctly adjusted
Use correct equalising procedures with the proper prong, wait until equalisation is
complete
Concentrate on what you are doing. Try to visualise what is happening downhole as the
wire is manipulated at the surface. If unsure, ask for assistance
Maintain a careful record of toolstring dimensions i.e. fish neck sizes, ODs and lengths.
Think ahead, be prepared for problems
Check the programme and/or well files for current well status and previous problems en -
countered. Follow the programme and do not deviate unless prior approval has been
obtained.

NOTE: However careful an operator is, fishing jobs will still occur due to equipment
failures, well conditions and unexpected problems.

NOTE: Discuss a fishing programme with all the relevant personnel and consider all
possible results of each time the well bore is entered and plan for the
various possibilities.

Make sure that wire is not in contact with rig floor, beams etc. as this will cause damage
from abrasion.
If taking control of well i.e. Hydraulic Pumps for SCSSV and HMV make sure hold open
pressure are not exceeded and closely monitored for any pressure drop
Make sure that signs and barriers are up to prevent anyone closing swab valve etc.
especially with adjacent operations ongoing.
Make sure that all hydraulic pumps used have a back up air supply in case of an
emergency

16.2.1 Preventing the wire break

First of all, let us look at a typical wireline rig-up, and the areas which can stand some
improvement; See Figure 16.1.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 330 of 465

of 4658

Figure 16.1 - Typical Wireline Surface Equipment

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 331 of 465

of 4658
16.2.2 Counter wheel assembly
The counter wheel can vary in size from 8 inches diameter to 16 inch diameter. The wire is fed
around the counter wheel in a 360o loop. The size of the counter wheel will have some bearing on
the life of the wire. The wire has an ideal bending radius, and to reduce it is to increase the stress
on the wire, (especially under load), which may result in stress cracking, and premature
degeneration of the wire.
One generally accepted formula for wire/pulley ratio is that pulley sizes should be 120 times larger
than the wire OD. The ideal counter wheel/pulley size for 0.108 inch wire is 12.96 inch diameter.
Although the 16 inch counter wheel is more than adequate in size, consideration must be given to
the method in which the wire is fed from the drum through the counter assembly, as some current
methods will create rapid deterioration of wireline due to reverse curving of the wire.
Perhaps the best comparison of counter head assemblies is shown in Figure 5.3. These figures
represent the results of a series of tests performed by a major oil service company and show the
disadvantages of some counter systems currently in use.
The figures stated are actual cycles of the measuring wheel.

K winch number 1
Using 0.092 inch wireline through K winch number 1 counter head configuration which has a
measuring wheel of 7.68 inch diameter and using the counter head rig test configuration, over
three tests, the wire cracked or deteriorated at the measuring wheel after:
487 cycles
527 cycles
470 cycles
On average using this wire it was found that it would rapidly deteriorate at approx. 495 lbs using
this counter head configuration.
The same counter head configuration test was carried out on the same winch using 0.108 and
0.125 inch wirelines.
Using various increased diameters in measuring wheel assemblies it was found that with the 15
inch wheel, life expectancy from the wireline was far greater.
OD of wire x 120 = correct pulley size.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 332 of 465

of 4658
These results are due to rapid deterioration of wirelines due to reverse curving of the wire through
various head configurations, using the counter head test rig set up as below.
Wire Diameter Run No. K-Winch #1 OTIS Home Made K-Winch #2
0.092 1 487 1353 2638 6253
2 527 1070 2267 5927
3 470 1016 2534 6120
average 495 1146 2480 6100

0.108 1 442 1052 1966 7281

2 434 959 1943 6125
3 410 918 2260 6207
average 419 976 2056 6538

0.125 1 392 889 2840 3597

2 351 873 2150 2774
3 360 906 2177 3716
average 367 889 2389 3362
Table 16.1
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 333 of 465

of 4658
Wire Properties
Wire Type IPS Supa 70 IPS Supa 70 IPS Supa 70
Diameter (ins) 0.092 0.092 0.108 0.108 0.125 0.125
Diameter (mm) 2.34 2.34 2.74 2.74 3.175 3.175
Weight (lbs/1,000 m) 75.0 75.0 100.0 100.0 141.0 141.0
Min. Sheave Diameter 111/4” 111/4” 13” 13” 15” 15”
B. Load (lbs) 1547.0 1600.0 2120.0 2100.0 2865.0 2865.0
Table 16.2

Figure 16.2 - Counter Head Test Rig

SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 334 of 465

of 4658

Figure 16.3 - Counter Wheel Assembly

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 335 of 465

of 4658
16.2.3 Pressure Wheels
The function of the pressure wheels is to prevent the wire from springing out of the counter wheel
during downward jar action, (or any other time the wire is slack). The pressure wheels should ride
above the wire, and should not actually be in contact with it. Contact with the wire in tension
could cause sharp edges to be worn onto the pressure wheels which could create mechanical
damage to the wire during high speed operating. Mechanical damage is one of the most common
causes of wire breakage, and can cause failure at lower than quoted breaking strain. A re-
designed counter wheel groove may overcome this problem.

Figure 16.4 – Pressure Wheels

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 336 of 465

of 4658
16.2.4 Hay Pulleys
There is no escaping the fact that the criteria already discussed should also apply to hay pulleys.
Although wireline operators are generally aware that the larger diameter wheel is more
compatible with 0.108 inch wire, the 8 inch pulley has proven to be the most trouble free pulley
from wirelining point of view. Increasing the pulley size to 16 inch would mean that the centre of
gravity of the pulley would be much lower, resulting in a tendency for the pulley to fall over
towards the horizontal position when the wire is slack. This could cause the wire to slip out of the
pulley and increase the risk of severe mechanical damage.

Figure 16.5 - Hay Pulley

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 337 of 465

of 4658
NOTE: Hay pulleys are a load bearing piece of equipment and are certified, so check
for any damage.

NOTE: Make sure Hay pulley Pin Spring is not weak and that securing catch is not
bent over as a weak spring could result in the wire jumping out and a weak
catch could result in the Hay pulley Disconnecting.

The requirements for the larger pulley would be:

Extremely light weight material, e.g. aluminium, and a correctly fitted guard to prevent
the wire from springing out of the pulley.
High strength to withstand high shock loads during upward jarring operations.

Although such pulleys are available they are still treated with suspicion, since earlier models could
not withstand high shock loading.
Some information published by Bridon Wire gives a guide to the limitations in weight loading that
should be applied when using 8 inch counter wheels or pulleys.
These tests show how increased loading on the wireline affect the number of cycles the wire will
withstand when passed around an 8 inch diameter pulley.

NOTE: Fatigue cycle figures would be considerably lower, under severe service
conditions.

Carbon Steel Braking Load Cycles Around Pulley

0.108 Wire API9A 2,120 lbs
Typical fatigue life 25% of B.L. 5,500
in bending around 50% of B.L. 3,800
8” diameter pulley 75% of B.L. 50
Table 16.3
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 338 of 465

of 4658
16.2.5 Stuffing Boxes/Packings
Stuffing boxes for use with 0.108 wire incorporate a 16 inch sheave wheel which highlights that
manufacturers have recognised that sheave wheels, pulleys etc., should be compatible with wire
size.

NOTE: It is essential to change all stuffing box packings on a regular basis since,
during wireline operations, it is quite common for metal splinters to be
shaved from the line by the cutting action of the sharp profiles on the edges
of the metal wireline guides. These filings are carried into the packings and
increase lateral pressure on the line. In cases where only the top two or
three packings have been replaced, metal build up has contributed to
isolated instances of a phenomena called Hydro-Dynamic deformation,
which is evidenced by a reduction in the diameter of the line, (over approx.
2-3 ft of its length), caused by the generation of hydrostatic pressures during
rapid acceleration/deceleration during the wirelining process.

Similar conditions, and line failures, can be created by excessive tightening down of the stuffing
box packing. Although this is not a common problem, it has been experienced in Europe and the
USA, particularly when using stainless steel lines.

NOTE: It is recommended to use brass packing gland and lower gland as the metal
type can create wear to the wire resulting in wire failure.
SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 339 of 465

of 4658

Figure 16.6 - Wireline Stuffing Box

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 340 of 465

of 4658
16.2.6 Weight Indicators
The most common weight indicator in the field is the Martin Decker type, and consists of an
indicator in the cab of the wireline unit, a hydraulic hose leading to a load cell coupled to the
counter head assembly, or, more commonly, attached to the hay pulley at the well head.
The Martin Decker has proven to be an extremely robust piece of equipment and generally quite
positive in showing jar action. It will also give a fairly accurate reading of weight pulled, under a
slow pull condition; however, due to the time lag caused by hydraulic response, between the load
cell and the indicator, the gauge may not produce a correct load indication during high speed
jarring.
In order to get the best possible results from the weight indicator, it is necessary to completely
flush and re-charge the unit at least once per month. Having re-charged the unit, a specific gap
should be set between the load plate and the load cell retaining ring; See Figure 16.7. If this
procedure is conducted in the workshop, a test of accuracy can also be carried out.

Figure 16.7 - Martin-Decker Weight Indicator

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 341 of 465

of 4658
16.2.7 Re-Charging Procedure
This procedure provides instructions for setting the specified load cell gap and for adjusting the
pointer on the indicator.
Remove all weight from the load cell.
Ensure that the weight hose is free of kinks and sharp bends.
Remove the cap from the f53 check valve.
Close the load damper.
Attach the hand pump to the check valve. Do not tighten.
Fill the hand pump reservoir with W/15/16 (red) hydraulic fluid.
Operate the hand pump plunger slowly to bleed air from the pump at the check valve.
When air bubbles ceases to appear, tighten the pump to the check valve connection.
Raise the load cell to a position slightly higher than the indicator.
Loosen the load cell plug.

CAUTION: Keep the hand pump reservoir at least half full at all times to avoid introducing
air into the system.
Pump fluid into the system and bleed at the load cell plug until air bubbles cease to
appear.
Tighten the load cell plug.
Pump enough fluid to slightly overcharge the system, loosen the load cell plug and bleed
until the proper gap is set. The gap size is normally stamped on top of the load cell, if
not, a reasonable guide would be to set a 1/2" inch gap for a unit with a 100 ft hose,
and a 3/8 inch gap for a unit with a 50 ft hose. The gap can be accurately achieved by
using two lengths of the correct diameter shear stock, placed between the load plate
and the load cell retaining ring. When the proper gap is achieved tighten the load cell
plug.
Disengage the hand pump from the check valve.
Replace and tighten the check valve cap.
Adjust the load damper three complete turns anti-clockwise;
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 342 of 465

of 4658

16.2.8 Wireline Angle Correction Factors

The load registered on the weight indicator of the wireline unit does not indicate the total load
exerted on the line.
If the angle between the wireline entering and exiting the hay pulley is 90o then the reading on
the weight indicator is correct; See Figure 16.7.
If the angle between the wireline entering and exiting the hay pulley is less than 90o then the
reading on the weight indicator is Higher than the actual load on the line. Example 1.
If the angle between the line entering and exiting the hay pulley is more than 90o then the
reading on the weight indicator is Lower than the actual load on the line. Example 2.
Using the tables provided, the actual (resultant) load on the line can
be calculated prior to wireline operations; See

Figure 16.8 for Examples 1 and 2.

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 343 of 465

of 4658
Example 1
Angle below 90O then WT indicator dial reads
higher than actual resultant.
e.g. Angle between entry and exit line = 70O
Reading on WT Indicator = 1000 lbs
= 1000 x 1.41422 (constant for 90O from table
on next page)  1.63830 (constant for 70O
from table on next page)
1.41422
= 1000 x
1.63830

= 1000 x 0.8634
= 863.4 lbs
Angle below 90O then weight indicator dial reads
higher than actual resultant.

Example 2
e.g. Angle between entry and exit line = 110O
Reading on WT Indicator = 1000 lbs
= 1000 x 1.41422 (constant for 110o from table
on next page)  1.14716 (constant for 90O
from table on next page)
1.41422
= 1000 x
1.14716

= 1000 x 1.2328
= 1232.8 lbs.
Actual Load on wire is 1232 lbs when WT indicator
reads 1000 lbs at 110O.

Figure 16.8

To interpolate odd number angles not shown on the following chart calculate according to above
formulae the resultant of the angle one degree less and one degree more than the angle desired
and split the difference. (Figures provided by Martin Decker, Aberdeen)
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 344 of 465

of 4658

Included Line Load By Const ant Resultant Included Line Load By Const ant Resultant
Angle Of Angle Of

0 2.00000 92 1.38932

2 1.99970 94 1.36400

4 1.99878 96 1.33826

6 Multiply 1.99726 98 Multiply 1.31212 To Get

8 Line 1.99512 To Get 100 Line 1.28558 Resultant

10 Load 1.99238 Resultant 102 Load 1.25864

12 By 1.98904 104 By 1.23132

14 1.98510 106 1.20362

16 1.98054 108 1.17556

18 1.97538 110 1.14716

20 1.96962 112 1.11838

22 1.96326 114 1.08928

24 1.95630 116 1.05984

26 1.94874 118 1.03008

28 1.94058 120 1.00000

30 1.93186 122 0.96962

32 1.92252 124 0.93894

34 1.91260 126 0.90798

36 1.90212 128 0.87674

38 Multiply 1.89104 130 Multiply 0.84524

40 Line 1.87938 To Get 132 Line 0.81348 To Get

42 Load 1.86716 Resultant 134 Load 0.78146 Resultant

44 By 1.85436 136 By 0.74922

46 1.84100 138 0.71674

48 1.82708 140 0.68404

50 1.81262 142 0.65114

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 345 of 465

of 4658
52 1.79758 144 0.61804

54 1.78202 146 0.58474

56 1.76590 148 0.55128

58 1.74924 150 0.51764

60 1.73206 152 0.48384

62 1.71434 154 0.44990

64 1.69610 156 0.41582

66 1.67734 158 0.38162

68 1.65808 160 0.34730

70 1.63830 162 0.31286

72 1.61804 164 0.27834

74 1.59726 166 0.24374

76 Multiply 1.57602 168 Multiply 0.20906

78 Line 1.55430 To Get 170 Line 0.17430 To Get

80 Load 1.53208 Resultant 172 Load 0.13952 Resultant

82 By 1.50942 174 By 0.10468

84 1.48626 176 0.06980

86 1.46270 178 0.03490

88 1.43868 180 0.00000

90 1.41422
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 346 of 465

of 4658

16.2.9 Safety
Safety while fishing, as in all wireline operations, is of primary importance. The use of BOPs to seal
the well while attaching devices to the wire is common. Personnel involved in the operation
should be made fully aware of the procedures and changes involved and wear the proper
protective clothing and equipment. Only essential personnel should be within the restricted area.
If toolstrings are stuck, higher than normal pulls will be applied to the wireline, which can result in
the wire breaking at or near the surface, possibly causing injury, the eyes being especially
vulnerable. An increased level of safety awareness is essential during a fishing operation.

NOTE: Good communication is essential especially on a live well during fishing

operations.

NOTE: If changing over to braided line to carry out fishing operations, make sure
that the slings and shackles are of suitable strength and in certification.

NOTE: During fishing operations equipment can be the subject of wear and tear.

16.2.10 Areas to consider that may present added problems

Well Conditions.
Completion Components Layout.
Well Deviation
Well Drilling Profile
Surface Conditions.
Communication Considerations.
Are Persons Competent/Suitably Trained To Carry Out Fishing Operations.
Availability of correct fishing tools and schematic.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 347 of 465

of 4658

16.3 general notes

Before launching into a usually complicated and time consuming fishing operations the following
should be addressed:
Does the tool have to be fished ?
Can the fish be left in place ?
Will fish have fallen to the bottom ?
Can the fish be pushed to the sump ?
Can the well be flowed in the interim ?
Can the operation be conducted using slickline or Braided Line?
Is a combination of Slickline and Coil required?

The accuracy of the records taken may have a bearing on the success or failure of the fishing
operation. If the exact configuration of the toolstring to be fished is not known it could be far
more difficult to retrieve.
Prior to starting the fishing operation give it a great deal of thought to the requirements of the
surface rig-up. The configuration of the surface equipment will almost certainly need to be
changed in order to accommodate the fishing plus the fish, or alternatively to give access to the
end of the broken wireline when it has been successfully brought to surface. Especially important
is the height of available lubricator which will be severely limited when working under the rig
substructure.

NOTE: Can it accommodate both toolstrings above the swab?.

NOTE: For the above reasons it is preferable to conduct fishing operations through
the rig. (If available).

When fishing for broken wireline it is normal to rely on the wireline BOPs to isolate the well from
the fished wire. It is essential that the BOPs are dressed for the size of wire to be fished. They
should be certified and pressure tested before starting fishing operations.

NOTE: Under ideal circumstances two sets of BOPs would be used to fish for broken
wire giving extra barrier situation.

NOTE: If conducting the fishing operation using slickline, you will get a superior
jarring action and feel, but slickline can have a poorer mechanical strength
than braided line in most circumstances.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 348 of 465

of 4658

NOTES PAGE
SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 349 of 465

of 4658

FISHING WIRE
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 350 of 465

of 4658

17 Fishing wire
Of all the possible fishing situations broken wire is the most common and for this reason it will be
discussed first.
The two possibilities are:
Wire broken ON SURFACE, and remaining visible.
Wire broken DOWNHOLE.

17.1 wire broken at surface

17.1.1 Wire Remains Visible
When the wire breaks at the surface it occasionally gets trapped in the hay pulley or the stuffing
box. If it jams at the hay pulley the normal procedure is to put the wireline clamp on the wire, pull
out the slack, if any and connect the two broken ends together by either looping the ends round
each other and wrapping them and/or using ferrules, as discussed later in this fishing section. Pull
the wire out of the hole, remove the tool string and the broken wireline. Spool on a new line if the
remaining line is too short to carry out further operations. If the wire is broken at the stuffing box
and the tool string is free the procedure would be:
Close the BOP rams to grip the wire. Bleed off all pressure in the lubricator. Remove one
section of lubricator, back-thread the wireline through the remaining lubricator and
stuffing box and reconnect wire as above.
Take up all wire slack with the wireline unit. Equalise and open the BOP rams. If there is
enough lubricator remaining to accommodate the tool string, then POOH. If not,
then enough wireline should be POOH to allow the section of lubricator to be re-
installed in the rig-up.

NOTE: Hay pulley may have to be repositioned to allow knot to pass. The wire can
also be removed from counter head to pass on to the drum.

NOTE: The BOPs should be re-closed and pressure bled off.

NOTE: Always attempt, if possible, to make the connection so that it is wound onto
the reel a number of times before picking up heavy weights or jarring.

Cut the wire at the wireline unit and rig-down lubricator. Pull the wireline out of the
stuffing box and lubricator. Add the lubricator section and back-feed through the
stuffing box. Re-rig the lubricator and re-connect the wireline as before. Take up all
wire slack with the wireline unit. Equalise and open the BOP. POOH with tool string.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 351 of 465

of 4658
The wire is reconnected, using a nut, link from a chain, or disc or rope sockets, or best of all,
ferrules, (made from ¼” control line) and spooled back onto the drum. Hay Pulley may have to be
repositioned to permit the knot to pass. Wire can be removed from the counter head to allow the
knot to go onto the drum, or ferrules can be coaxed through most counterheads.

Figure 17.1 - Chain Link Type Knot

Figure 17.2 - Double Ferules can be coaxed through counterhead

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 352 of 465

of 4658
17.2 CASE I - wire broken downhole

NOTE: Practical skills in fishing are difficult to acquire through training sessions and
most must be learned while on the job.

When the wire breaks downhole, or breaks at the surface then falls back down the hole, the first
objective is to calculate the depth at which the top of the wire will be from the surface. To
calculate this, a number of factors must be known:
The length of wire in the hole, whether tools are stuck or free and, if tools are free, what
depth would they fall to i.e. bottom of the hole (HUD), PBTD, a nipple, crossover, etc.
If stuck, at what depth.
The operator will know this from the actions he was taking at the time the wire broke
and from the wireline unit’s depth counter reading.
Having calculated the length of the wire in the hole and determined where the tool
string is held up it is easy to calculate where the top of the wire would be if it was
standing straight up.
Depth of tool string - length of wire in hole = Depth to top of wire.
However, the wire does not sit straight up but has a minimal coiling effect round the
tubing walls and therefore falls to a slightly lower depth. This is referred to as wire
fall and is dependent upon the size and type of wire, the length in the hole and the
tubing diameter.
Having determined the approximate depth of the top of the wire, it is now necessary to
find and confirm the depth before attempting to retrieve it. The tools used to find
the top of the wire are referred to as wire finders. If the line breaks at the surface
due to extensive jarring, the jars on the tool string still work and if the line parted at
the counterhead, with the broke end extended through the stuffing box, it is not
advisable to splice the line and continue jarring to free and recover the toolstring. It
is always better not to risk increasing the complexity of the fishing job by breaking
the line elsewhere. Use of go-devils is advised, and is discussed later.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 353 of 465

of 4658
Let us now look at an example of a fishing scenario where the wire has broken downhole.
A toolstring is latched onto a difficult plug 10,000 ft down the well. During jarring operations, the
wire parts on the surface and disappears through the stuffing box. The immediate action of the
wireline operator is to close the wireline valve on the off chance that the fractured end of the wire
has been caught in the stuffing box. (If however, hydrocarbons are pouring from the stuffing box,
then it is highly unlikely that the wire will have caught up anywhere, and the swab valve should be
closed.)

NOTE: As soon as the lubricator has been bled down and it has been established
that the wire is down the hole, the operator must then calculate the
position at which the wire broke and the amount of wire left down the hole.

NOTE: It is important to determine where the wire broke, as this will have a
bearing on the way in which the fishing job is performed.

If the wire breaks on the surface, it will invariably break at the counter head or the ha y pulley, due
to the extra stresses put on the line at these points. For this case we will assume that the wire
broke at the hay pulley and has fallen 'x' feet down the hole.
We should be able to fish the top of the wire, and pull it back through the wireline valve, after
which a decision can be made, whether to drop a go-devil or other type of wire cutter, or to use
the toolstring downhole to shear off, if downward jarring could achieve it.
However, we have made the decision to fish the end of the wire with the toolstring still attached,
so now we will calculate how much wire is in the hole and where it is likely to be located.
On the schematic Figure 17.3 , we can see that the distance from the break point to the top of the
lubricator is 21 ft. This distance, plus 28 ft, is the distance that must be added to the well depth
from the zero point to the top of the actual fish. The 12 ft toolstring can be treated as wire in the
calculation. We can then assume that there is a 10,061 ft of wire in the hole.
Table 17.1- Wire Fall Estimations, has been devised after some experiments were conducted on a
training well. These figures may not be accurate; however, field experience has proven them to be
a reasonable guide.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 354 of 465

of 4658
17.2.1 Amount Wireline Will Fall Back per 1,000 ft
In our scenario, we have used 0.108 wire in 5 1/2 inch tubing. By using the table we find that the
wire will fall back 40 ft per 1,000 ft and that the wire will be found as follows.

10,000 + 28 + 21 + 12 (Toolstring) = 10,061

10,061
Fall back = 40 x = 402.44
1,000
Top of wire = minus 61 ft of surface wire = 341.44

To assume that the top of the wire would be found or pushed 'x' thousand feet down the hole is
totally wrong. The wire will be found in a long spiral, hard against the tubing wall, and does not
emulate a coil spring. (The only way that the line would move further down the tubing, is if the top
of the wire was picked up by a fishing tool, and pulled down the hole inside itself as the tool
moves downhole inside the wire spiral. On trying to retrieve the fishing tool, it would invariably
get stuck due to wire above the toolstring being dragged into a ball).
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 355 of 465

of 4658

Tubing Size (ins.) Wireline OD. (ins.) Wire Fall ft/1,000 ft.
27/8 0.092 12
31/2 0.092 16
31/2 0.108 15
31/2 0.125 13
31/2 3
/16 20
41/2 0.108 27
41/2 0.125 22
41/2 3
/16 35
51/2 0.108 40
51/2 0.125 35
51/2 3
/16 50
71/2 0.108 90
71/2 0.125 83
71/2 3
/16 100
Table 17.1- Wire Fall Estimations
SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 356 of 465

of 4658

Figure 17.3 - Schematic

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 357 of 465

of 4658
17.3 Toolstring equipment
Having established where the top of the wire should be, the first tool we would run is a wire
finder.
A typical toolstring would include:
Rope socket.
Lightest amount of stem required to get down the hole (See Below).
Tubular jars.
Jar-Up Pulling Tool.
Rope Socket.
Stem. - (for spacer)
Wirefinder.

17.3.1 Stem
The reason that the lightest amount of stem is required is due to the fact that we wish to find th e
top of the wire with the wire finder. It would be ideal, therefore, if the wire finder should cease
downward movement, or show some sign of running through a restriction (i.e. weight loss or jerky
downward movement), at the 341 ft + 20 ft mark, where the wire would be expected to be found.
To find the lightest amount of stem, the following formula would be used.
Force per square inch or amount of weight it will take for a toolstring to fall, neglecting friction =
area in square inch x pressure: (A x P = f)

 ' x' wire OD2

= Area x lubricator press = Force trying to blow the
4

wire out of the stuffing box

. x 0.1082
314
= 0.0092 x 2,200 (assumed lubricator pressure 2,200 psi)
4
= 20.14 lbs wt
As 20.14 lbs is the force acting on the cross sectional area of the wire trying to blow it out of the
stuffing box, we shall require a stem weight of 20.14 lbs to counter balance the force. Extra stem
would also be required to overcome the friction created by the wire passing through the stuffing
box packings. An extra 20 lbs would normally be sufficient, though this can vary according to other
variables, e.g. amount of force applied to the packings by the packing nut, gas or oil well, (amount
of lubrication on the line), high pressure etc. The wireline operator would know what is needed, so
long as he is not over-generous with the amount of stem weight added.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 358 of 465

of 4658
If the weight per ft of the stem is not known, the following formula may be used:

OD2 x 8
Weight per ft of round bar stock or stem =  wt per ft
3
Assuming 17/8 inch stem is being used:

. 2 x8
1875
 9.375 lbs per ft
3
40 lbs weight required at 9.375 lbs per ft = 4.26 ft of stem.
As the stem is manufactured in 2 ft, 3 ft and 5 ft lengths then 1 five foot length of 1 7/8 stem should
be sufficient for our needs.
SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 359 of 465

of 4658

Figure 17.4 - Initial Fishing String

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 360 of 465

of 4658
17.3.2 Jars
The normal spang jar would not be used for wire fishing as jar action could easily be lost if the wire
gets snagged between the linkage. Therefore tubular jars would be used.
Tubular jars are commonly used when fishing because its moving components are, for the most
part, enclosed inside a housing, protecting it from entanglement with the wireline to be fished and
other well debris.
Tubular jars have screwed components which are susceptible to backing off during prolonged
jarring. Also, the efficiency of jarring down may be decreased due to the viscosity effects of the
fluid displaced from inside the housing.

Figure 17.5 - Spang and Tubular Jars

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 361 of 465

of 4658
17.3.3 Jar Up to Shear Pulling Tool
The reason for running a jar up to shear pulling tool is that if the wirefinder is made up directly
onto the bottom of the toolstring there may be a chance that the wire finder may get stuck in the
wire bring fished and cannot be released causing another potential fish in the hole. By adding the
jar up to shear pulling tool if the wirefinder gets stuck as a last resort the toolstring can be
released from the wirefinder allowing it to be pulled to surface.
Always ensure that the shear pin is checked after every run as it may be weakened during the runs
and as a result, the tools below may fall off prematurely.

Figure 17.6 – Otis ‘R’ type Jar-Up to Shear Pulling Tool

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 362 of 465

of 4658
17.3.4 Below the Jar Up to Shear Pulling Tool

Another rope socket would be used. This is to allow the lower half of the
toolstring (rope socket, stem, wire finder) to be easily picked up should it become
left in the hole.
2’of Stem is added between the lower rope socket and the wire finder to act as a
spacer in case of wire by-passing the wire finder. If the jar up pulling tool pin was
sheared, the spacer stem would ensure that the lower rope socket was above the
wire wrapped around the finder so making it easier to re-latch.

17.3.5 Wire Finder

This is run to locate the top of the wire to lift the broken edge away from the side
of the tubing and bend it allowing the wire grab to latch it (although the Bowen
wire finder is designed to find and retrieve the wire in 1 run, this seldom is the
case and it is prudent to aim for locating the wire and preparing it for the next run
(wireline Grab).

NOTE: This type of wirefinder will generally only work in the tubing
above the Safety Valve Nipple. Adjusting the skirt to pass
through the SVLN will allow it to bypass the wire in the
tubing. A ‘Scratcher’ Wire Finder is recommended when the
wire fall is below the SVLN.

Figure 17.7 - Wire Finder

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 363 of 465

of 4658
The technique for finding the top of the wire is observing the ‘pattern’ of the wirefinder
progressing down the tubing. Due to the light weight of the toolstring, the wirefinder will tend to
‘float’ down the tubing causing the hay pulley to develop a ‘pattern’ of rising and falling. This
‘pattern’ usually becomes constant until a restriction is encountered. Some light jarring may be
required to establish if this is the top of the broken wire. If this is the case, continue to jar down
lightly for a few more jars. The objective is not to ‘ball’ the wire as this could laed to problems
with the ‘Wire Grab’. The objective is to pull the wire away from the tubing wall, and put enough
of a bend into the top of the wire for the grab tobe able to locate it. Once we have run the wireline
finder and located and tagged the top of the wire the next run is to fish the wire back to surface.

NOTE: NEVER RUN THE WIREFINDER MORE THAN 20’ PAST THE CALCULATED TOP
OF THE WIRE.

If the wire is encountered much further down than the top, this can lead to wire falling in on the
wirefinder/grab.
17.3.6 Wireline Grab
Using the same toolstring as previously run, but replacing the Wirefinder with the Wire Grab, and
remembering to check the pin in the jar up pulling tool, the next run is to latch onto the top of the
wire and pull it to surface.
Remember that the top of the wire has been located with the Wirefinder.
It is possible that the Grab may miss the top of the Wire. In this case, never run deeper than 5’
below the position that the wire was found. ‘Grabbing’ the wire too deep will result in wire ‘falling
in’ on top of the grab, and preventing the grab and wire being brought to the surface, thus
creating a further ‘fishing job’.
Once the wire is successfully pulled into the lubricator with the (Wire Grab) we now have to close
the BOPs with the broken end of the wire above the BOPs.
At this point it would have to be decided whether to connect the wire back on to the wire which is
on the drum, or if it is suspected that the toolstring cannot be released from the stuck plug at
10,000 ft a Wire cutter will have to be dropped, cutting the wire at the rope socket at 9982 ft. The
wireline would then be removed out of the hole. New wire may have to be spooled in order to fish
the tool string.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 364 of 465

of 4658
17.4 CASE II - wire broken downhole
While running in the hole to retrieve a plug, at 10,000 ft the ‘TRBV’ which is set at 760 ft, closes
and cuts the wire. The toolstring is 15 ft long and the depth indicator shows that we had reached
7,500 ft.
The wire must be withdrawn from the well and as previously discussed, it is possible that the wire
will start to blow out of the stuffing box, however, if this does not happen immediately the wire is
cut, tightening the packing nut on the stuffing box could avoid this problem altogether.
Having made the well safe, (and re-opened the ‘TRBV’, a fishing procedure must be established,
starting with determining the amount of wire in the hole, and the approximate position of the top
of the wire.
At the time the wire was cut, 7,500 ft was showing on the counter. This means that the distance
from the bottom of the toolstring to zero point (base of wellhead) is 7,500 ft, therefore, 7,500 ft
minus 760 ft (depth to ‘TRBV’), or wireline is in the hole. It could be safety assumed that the
toolstring followed by the wire has fallen down the well and the ‘GR’ or super ‘GS’ pulling tool has
latched into the plug at 10,000 ft.
Length of wire = 7,500 ft
Less 760 ft
6,740 ft
1,500 of 41/2 inch tubing 27 ft per 1,000 = 1,540 of wire in 41/2
Total wire in 51/2 inch = 5,200 inch tubing
Wire falls back 40 ft per 1,000 = 208
Top of wire above 41/2 inch x 51/2 inch X-over = 4,992
Total 51/2 inch tubing = 10,000
Less 4,992
Depth of top of wire from zero point = 5,008
The next point to consider is that, as the ‘GR’ or super ‘GS’ will have latched into the plug and it
would be inadvisable at this stage to attempt fishing the wire as this could mean trying to jar with
the wire attached to a grab or wirefinder. It is obvious that the wire must be cut o ff from the rope
socket downhole.
The two most common tools for carrying out this operation are:
Blind box,
The sidewall cutter
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 365 of 465

of 4658

17.5 Blind Box

Iit is possible, and indeed preferable, to run a blind box
on the end of a toolstring, (using tubular jars), down
through the broken wireline to the rope socket, box off
the wire from the rope socket, (6-10 downward jars
being sufficient). and retrieve the toolstring without
getting tangled up with the broken wire. However, it is
essential that the blind box is of the EXACT size for the
job, as a blind box with too small an OD will not cut the
wire, and a blind box that is too big will probably tangle
up in the broken line and prematurely cut the wire
uphole. Therefore the formula to find the blind box size
will be as shown in Figure 17.9.

Figure 17.8 - Blind Box

Formula
Always assume that the rope socket is sitting against the tubing wall.
The blind box MUST be of an exact size to touch the opposite side of the tubing wall, and overlap
the centre of the rope socket in order to cut the wire.
Check that the blind box OD is small enough to go through the smallest tubing ID allowing two
wraps of wire around it. i.e.
5 inch, 15# Tubing
Tubing ID = 4.408
Toolstring OD = 1.875
Blind Box OD = 3.52
4 x 0.108 wire = 0.43
Blind Box + Wire = 3.95
‘R’ Nipple ID = 4.125
Total Clearance above Safety Factor = 0.18
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 366 of 465

of 4658
This formula has proven very successful on a number of occasions, but it will be stressed that only
the correct size of blind box will give any chance of success.

Figure 17.9 - Formula for Blind Box Size

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 367 of 465

of 4658
17.6 Cutter Bar
Description
A cutter bar consists of one or more lengths of
wireline stem which has a blind box attached to its
lower end and a wireline socket made up on the
upper end.
The purpose of the cutter bar is to cut the wire at
the top of the wireline socket of the toolstring
which cannot be retrieved.

Mode of Use
Dropping a cutter bar does not necessarily mean
dropping it from the surface as a cutter bar moving
at a good speed through the safety valve nipple
could do serious damage to the nipple.
The answer then is to run the cutter bar to a
position approx. 100 ft below the top of the wire
and then release it, letting it fall the rest of the way
down the hole. Perhaps the best method of
achieving this is to remove the top spring from an
‘RB’ pulling tool, which leaves the smaller dog spring
holding the dogs in the latched position. No shear
pin is necessary. Upon reaching the selected depth
the toolstring is 'bounced' using a short sharp jar
down action, thus allowing the dogs to release the
cutter bar. The same result can be achieved by tying
the cutter bar rope socket to a gauge cutter with
string and bouncing the toolstring. Whichever
method is used, extreme care must be taken when
pulling the toolstring into the lubricator, as
premature releasing of the cutter bar could prove
dangerous.
Although cutter bars have been dropped with some
success in the days of .092 wire, with modern wires
it is not a recommended practice as often the
impact is not sufficient to cut or damage the wire
sufficiently to detach it from the rope socket. The
blind box run as part of the toolstring is
recommended.
Figure 17.10 - Cutter Bar
SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 368 of 465

of 4658

Figure 17.11 - Sidewall Cutter

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 369 of 465

of 4658
The Sidewall Cutter is run on a type ‘C’ running tool, which is pinned on the inside of the cutter.
The cutter must be run down through the broken wire in the same way as a blind box would be.
Once reaching the point where the wire is to be cut, the tool is ‘bounced’ by using a short jar down
action, allowing the blades on the bottom of the tools taper to expand against the tubing wall.
Jarring down will cut the wire against the tubing wall, and also shear the pin in the running tool,
thus allowing the running tool to be retrieved from the well. The wire above the cutter will then
be fished using a wire finder and grab, as previously described. The cutter is then retrieved and
re-run to cut the next length of wire if required. A final run with a blind box, boxing off a
reasonable length of wire would be advisable so that a clean rope socket will be left. Ho wever, a
lead impression block should be run to establish whether or not fishing necks are free of wire,
prior to attempting to fish them with a pulling tool, although this may seem like unnecessary extra
runs, it must be remembered that a 2-3 ft piece of wire could create the same fishing job over
again if it gets caught up around the toolstring or the plug when attempting to pull it.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 370 of 465

of 4658
17.7 CASE III - blown up the hole
This is the last, but most difficult of the three types of fishing job, and deals with the problems
resulting in the toolstring being 'blown up the hole'.
The most common causes of being blown up the hole are:
Opening a jar up to open sliding side door.
Pulling gas lift valves from side pocket mandrels.
Bailing sand bridges.
Insufficient equalisation of plugs.
Go Devil

When conducting this type of operation, full consideration must be given to

the possibilities of differential pressure, and the various methods employed
to equalise them in a controlled manner. A hydrostatic differential pressure
from the annulus to the tubing can cause the same damage as a pressure Wireline

build up below the plug. Great care must be taken to ensure that pressures
are equalised properly.
There are essentially three considerations that will effect equalisation:
Depth.
Flow area through equalising ports.
Gas oil ratio (the more gas, the longer equalisation will take.)

The amount of differential pressure will have very little bearing on the
equalisation time.
Toolstring
Common equalisation port sizes used in today's downhole equipment can
mean equalisation times of 1-6 or more hours, and this must be taken into
consideration before running downhole controls.

Figure 17.12 - Wireline Fish

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 371 of 465

of 4658
An operator will know immediately when his toolstring has been blown up the hole. The symptom
will normally be a complete loss of weight on the wire. The toolstring will have acted as a piston,
and could be blown as much as 100 ft or more up the hole, overtaking the wire and leaving a
considerable loop below the toolstring.
When the toolstring loses upward motion and starts to fall back, it will generally create a
considerable tangle which will wedge itself into the tubing.
The immediate reaction is to try and pull the wire ball up the hole. However, if the operator is
successful in pulling the ball up the hole, there is a good possibility that the ball will get stuck in
the Christmas Tree, since there will be no jar action available and there is no way of telling how
long the ball is or where the toolstring is located within the ball. There is a strong possibility that
the ball and toolstring could straddle the tree and the wireline valve, leaving no means of shutting
the well in, also, pulling too much weight on the wire will tighten the ball due to the wireline from
the surface being connected to a point below the ball. The following procedure is recommended.
When there is no longer sufficient weight showing on the weight indicator, and the operator
believes he has been blown up the hole, he should only pick up enough weight to establish
whether or not he has a ball of wire in the tubing, (i.e. if normal pick-up weight was 400 lbs, he
should pick-up to 450-500 lbs). By sitting down again, and losing weight, the operator will know
that the wire is balled in the tubing.
Close in the wireline valve, bleed down the lubricator, lift the lubricator and attach a flat bottomed
go-devil to the wire (make sure that the go-devil is centralised for the correct size of tubing). The
go-devil will form a base for a wireline cutter. Allow sufficient time for the go-devil to fall and then
drop the Kinley or Flopetrol cutter (also centralised), to cut the wire on top of the go -devil.
Retrieve the cut wire from the well, with luck the wireline cutter will also be attached to the wire.
At this point it must be considered that any further fishing could result in the complete ball of wire
being retrieved. Therefore, the lubricator stack must be re-organised.
The wireline valve should now be placed at a higher point in the lubricator stack so t hat sufficient
room between the tree and the wireline valve exists to accommodate the toolstring. This
manoeuvre allows the swab valve to be closed if the toolstring becomes stuck across the wireline
valve, or vice versa.
A fishing toolstring must now be assembled and should consist of a rope socket, stem (shortest
and lightest possible), tubular jars, knuckle joint. Below this should be a centraliser (the same size
as the go-devil centraliser), 3 ft - 5 ft of stem (as a spacer), ‘RS’ or ‘UO’ pulling tool (with the
smallest skirt considered necessary).

NOTE: The running of an LIB before trying to pull the go-devil, may only serve to
drive the go-devil further down in the wire ball, therefore, it is
recommended that an attempt is made to fish the go-devil first, and only
run the LIB if that attempt fails.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 372 of 465

of 4658
When the depth of the go-devil/wire is established, the amount of wire in the ball can be
calculated. This can aid in deciding on the techniques to be used.
Having either retrieved the go-devil or failed to retrieve it, an LIB would now be run to establish
whether a fishing neck or strands of wire are looking up. If an impression of the go -devil is looking
up through the wire strand, then a ‘BE’ type of pulling tool may be necessary to grip the fishing
neck.
In the event that the go-devil has been retrieved and an impression of the toolstring rope socket
has been taken then the type of device that the toolstring is attached to would dictate whether an
attempt is made to retrieve the toolstring before the wire, or whether a wire spear arrangement,
or wire grab is to be used. The barbs on spears or grabs can break off if they come into heavy
contact with solid equipment, adding further complication to the fishing job, so this step merits
careful consideration and cautious wirelining.
If we are in the more likely position of having wire looking up, then a narrow bodied, two or three
prong grab with a rope socket attached, should be run on an ‘RB’ attached to a conventional
fishing string.
First, attempt to pull the wire up the hole, if this fails then light jarring will be necessary. If the pin
in the ‘RB’ shears, and the wire has not moved, then it is obvious that some heavier jarring is
necessary. The ‘RB’ would be changed for an ‘SB’ type tool, and the additional use of spring or
hydraulic jars must be considered.
At this stage, it is impossible to predict further occurrences, but consideration should be given to
circulating, flowing or killing the well. Remember to consider the forces applied to toolstring
piston areas, and the potential damage or good that could be achieved, especially by using high
pump rates.
If the wire ball can be pulled to the surface, then the fishing procedures becomes the same as
previously discussed in Cases I and II.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 373 of 465

of 4658
17.8 CONCLUSION
Although the techniques described in these Scenarios have proven to produce a more than
average degree of success, they are by no means the only method of wireline fishing and
alternative suggestions should also be given every consideration. Whichever techniques are used,
they can be assisted by following certain ground rules which can save time and money.
Make sure that you have all the information required, preferably a completion schematic
and not just numbers written on a scrap of paper. Attempt also to find out
differential pressures and well conditions which may well effect the fishing
operation.
On any wireline job, make sure the equipment lengths and sizes are well documented.
Draw fishing sketch to scale.
Think the job through before commencing and ensure that all equipment is capable of
doing the job, (i.e. wireline valve is tested etc.).
Avoid large committee decisions, too many people involved tend to see too many
gremlins, and just serve to cloud main issues.
Patience is the key word, short cuts during fishing operations lead to more problems and
longer fishing jobs. Fully record all fishing stages, even if not successful. If crew
changes have to take place, relief operators are less likely to duplicate mistakes.
Relatively few and inexpensive tools are required for wireline fishing operations. Having
a good comprehensive fishing tool box on each platform with such things as blind
boxes, removable centralisers for go-devils and wire cutters, manufactured to suit 2
or 3 different sizes of tubing on the platforms adds up to surprisingly few pieces but
can certainly save a great deal of money and time in extra helicopter flights for more
equipment and extra time spent fishing with the wrong size of equipment.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 374 of 465

of 4658

NOTES PAGE
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 375 of 465

of 4658

NOTES PAGE
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 376 of 465

Page 376 of 4658

WIRELINE FISHING TOOLS, EQUIPMENT AND

OPERATION PROCEDURES
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 377 of 465

Page 377 of 4658

18 wireline fishing tools, equipment and operation procedures

18.1 Wire Finder

The three traditional types of wire finder are the bell shaped finder, the Bowen finder/retriever
and the ‘scratcher finder’.
18.1.1 Bell Shaped Finder
This type of finder is a solid, thin walled device which is belled out to conform to the tubing drift
diameter. When correctly used it will seldom miss the top of the wire, however, the disadvantages
are:
Difficult to get through the Christmas tree.
Cannot pass through nipples.
Cannot retrieve the wire.

18.1.2 Bowen Finder/Retriever

The Bowen wireline retriever consists of a top sub, mandrel, main sub, spear point, slip and skirt.
The retriever may be dressed with various skirt sizes to conform to tubing drift. Disadvantage:
No use if the top of the wire is below the safety valve nipple.

18.1.3 Scratcher Finder

The ‘Scratcher Finder’ is a 5’ piece of 3/4” stem with holes drilled though it at 10” intervals, and
180degrees opposed. Wire is then looped through the holes describing a 270 degree arc. The
resulting loops will be a snug fit inside the size of tubing required, (this can be tested in a pup
joint). The primary advantage of the scratcher is that it will pass through nipples and spring back
to its original shape. Disadvantages:

Best made with .092 UHT wire which is difficult to find these days
Requires patience and skill to build
Some company representatives will not allow ‘home made’ tools to be run
SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 378 of 465

Page 378 of 4658

Figure 18.1 - Wire Finder

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 379 of 465

Page 379 of 4658

18.1.4 Running a Wire Finder
The wire finder is a circular device with fingers which pick up the tail end of the wire from the
tubing wall and bend it into the middle of the tubing, preparing it to be retrieved by another
device (wireline grab/spear).
Select the appropriate size of wire finder for the tubing and restrictions. Adjust the
diameter of the wire finder fingers according to the particular tubing weight or
restriction size. The fingers should be adjusted to bear on the tubing walls so that
the wire cannot pass.
If necessary, attach a rope socket to the pin end of the wire finder.
Make up a suitable toolstring using tubular jars instead of spang jars.
Attach wire finder to releasing tool. (Normally a jar up to release tool is preferred.)
Attach wire finder assembly to the toolstring and zero on the tubing hanger flange.
Pick up tools into the lubricator and make it up to the BOP.
Pressure test the lubricator and open the swab valve, counting the number of turns.
RIH slowly and continuously observe weight indicator.
Once close to the wire, pull up the hole 15 ft every 20 ft. to ensure that the wire has not
been bypassed. Do not exceed 30 – 40 ft past the calculated top of the wire. POOH,
re-adjust the finder and try again.
The wire tail (top of loose wire) depth will be indicated by weight loss. Sit wire finder
down on top of wire tail. (Care must be taken to ensure that the wire finder does not
run past the wire tail.)
Open jars and tap down on wire several times. This action will bend the wire end into
the middle of the tubing forming a sufficient bend to arrest the downward
movement of a Grab.
Once the tool is confirmed to be inside the lubricator, close the swab valve and bleed
down the lubricator.
Back off the quick union and raise the lubricator.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 380 of 465

Page 380 of 4658

18.1.5 Bowen Wirefinder

In operation, the Bowen retriever is run into the well, the well fluid and friction cause the skirt to
ride up on the mandrel, exposing the spear point and the opening between the spear point and
the skirt.
When the tool contacts the broken line, the line will pass through the space between the spear
and the skirt. A loss of running in weight will show when contact has been made. Stopping the
decent causes the skirt to move down the mandrel, wedging the caught line between the
matching tapers of the skirt and the spear. Pulling up on the wireline securely wedges the line, the
entire wireline can then be pulled from the well.
The main disadvantages of this device are:
Can be difficult to get through the tree.
Difficult to pass through nipples and remain effective.
If used roughly, the fingers which make up the skirt can distort or break off causing
further problems.

18.1.6 Wire Scratcher

This is a tool originally designed for 'scratching' paraffin from the tubing wall, but is i deally suited
for finding wire below nipples due to its flexibility.
The scratcher wirefinder consists of a 5 ft length of 3/4 inch stem with 5 sets of two adjacent 1/8
inch holes 180O opposed, at approx. 1 ft intervals along the stem. A length of wire, (approx. 15 ft)
would be fed through the topmost hole, until the centre of the wire is reached. One side of the
wire will then be looped around the stem to the next set of holes, allowing the loop to cover a
270O arc.
The other side of the wire is fed through its adjacent hole and then counter fed to cross the first
loop and also describe a 270O arc. This procedure is carried out along the length of the stem, so
that a 360O coverage exists, and the loop ODs conform to the tubing ID. (This can generally be
gauged inside the lubricator, or another piece of tubing.)
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 381 of 465

Page 381 of 4658

The main advantages of this tool are:
It is extremely versatile in that it can be used in almost any size of tubing.
It is flexible enough to be tapped down through the nipples without damaging them, and
then return to its original shape.
In most cases, this tool will not only find the wire, but also retrieve it.
Easily passes through the Christmas tree.

The disadvantage is that it is possible to miss the top of the wire in the hole, as with any type of
wirefinder.

Figure 18.2 - Wire Scratch

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 382 of 465

Page 382 of 4658

18.1.7 Wire Finder Operating Technique
Having chosen the equipment to use, run in the hole to locate the wire. It is possible that the
scratcher wire finder will be a little tight in the tubing and that some gentle jarring will be required
before the finder will run freely in the tubing. When the finder runs freely, proceed down the
tubing monitoring the weight indicator and looking for any kind of running pattern i.e. finder
binding on tubing joints, etc.
In our example, upon reaching 300 ft, the running speed should be extremely slow. Ideally, when
the scratcher reaches the broken end of the wire, downward movement should cease, however,
the most difficult part of fishing is pulling the broken end of the wire away from the tubing wall
and it is quite likely that the scratcher will run down inside the wire spiral. When this happens, the
operator should run in no further than 400 ft. It is quite likely that the running pattern will change
when the finder is inside the wire spiral. If 400 ft is reached, pull back up to 300 ft and try again,
watching for the pattern change and try to pin-point the depth at which it changes, it may take
some 5 or 6 attempts running slowly up and down the tubing. When the depth has been
established, start to increase the speed at which the finder is run, past the position the top of the
wire is believed to be at (run no more than 30 ft past the end of the wire at this stage).

Figure 18.3 - Scratcher with ‘Fished’ wire attached

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 383 of 465

Page 383 of 4658

The objective now is to pull the end of the wire away from the tubing wall and try and kink it
enough for a grab to get hold of it. Regardless of the type of wire finder, it is n ot good practice to
BALL the wire, as a wire grab with a tight ball on it could lead to problems and could cause damage
to the safety valve landing nipple or Xmas tree.
As soon as the wire finder has sat down on top of the wire, jar down lightly 4 - 8 times and if the
finder remains at the same depth, pull out of the hole. It’s quite likely that the wire will have
become entangled with the wire finder and will be retrieved; however, let us assume that the wire
is still left in the hole.
It must be taken into account that, if the first few runs with the wire finder are unsuccessful, the
finder must be pulled out of the hole, re-adjusted and re-run. It is essential that patience and strict
discipline are maintained.
The majority of fishing jobs which go sour are due to prematurely running wireline grabs hundreds
of feet below the end of the wire, causing the wire above the toolstring to ball and tangle, and
‘fall-in’ on the grab, thus leaving a second toolstring in the hole.

Figure 18.4 – Grab with retrieved wire

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 384 of 465

Page 384 of 4658

18.2 WIRELINE GRABS
These come in various designs such as two, three and four prong. The most important point when
choosing a grab is to choose one which is not too big for the job.
The largest inflexible OD on the grab must be measured. Assume that two wraps of wire, one on
top of the other are around that particular OD. Make sure that the total OD is smaller than the
smallest ID that the grab must pass through.

The most successful grab by far is the three prong grab, (as shown below), which has a very small
non-flexible OD at the top of the grab, but
is very easily adjusted to the required size
at the bottom.

18.2.1 Preparing the Grab

Bend open the prongs of the grab until
approx. 1/2 inch larger than the tubing ID.
Compress the prongs (without bending
them) to less than the safety valve ID and
bind two wraps of packing tape around
the tips of the prongs. (This will be worn
off when running up and down the tubing
directly below the safety valve nipple).
It must be considered that although the
main priority is to retrieve the fish, it must
not be achieved at the expense of scoring
the bore of the SVLN. Therefore, all
precautions must be taken to avoid this
happening.

18.2.2 Running the Grab

The grab would be run on the same
toolstring as the scratcher, and preferably
screwed onto the bottom of the scratcher.
If the preference is to run a pulling tool as
a precaution, then a jar-up-to-shear tool
should be run above the Scratcher.
Figure 18.5 - Preparing the Wireline Grab
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 385 of 465

Page 385 of 4658

Some operators prefer to 'bait the grab' by looping wire around the top of the grab prongs (only if
sufficient clearance exists between grab OD and SVLN ID). This method has proved to be
successful on some occasions, but on other occasions has caused an extra fish due to the now lack
of flexibility in the grab.
Other grabs are available such as the grab shown below, but the inflexibility on the shoulders of
the grab can cause major recovery problems if too much wire wraps around the grab.

18.2.3 Running a Wireline Grab/Spear

A wireline grab/spear is a device used for retrieving loose wire in the well. It is usually run after a
wire finder has found and ‘bent’ the wireline.
Select the appropriate size of wireline grab/spear for the tubing and restrictions. The
fingers should be adjusted to as close to the tubing internal diameter as possible.
If necessary, attach rope socket to the pin end of the wireline grab/spear. (Some
Companies insist on this practice). (The preferred method is as mentiond previously)
Make up a suitable toolstring using tubular jars instead of spang jars.
Attach wire grab/spear to releasing tool. (Normally a jar up to release tool is preferred.)
Attach wire grab/spear assembly to the toolstring and zero on the tubing hanger flange.
Pick up tools into the lubricator and make it up to the BOP.
Pressure test the lubricator and open the swab valve, counting the number of turns.
RIH slowly and continuously observe weight indicator.
Stop at approximately 30 ft. above ‘bent wire’ and note pick up weight accurately. Run to
wire depth.
Continue to run up and down tubing, no more than 10ft below the top of the wire, until
the grab engages the wire. If the grab does not engage, pull back out of the well and
re-adjust the grab and repeat the procedure.
Once the wire is engaged, open the jars and tap down on the wire several times. This
action should engage the wireline grab/spear securely in the bent/kinked wire.
Pick up and note the toolstring weight while POOH. A steady overpull when compared to
the pickup weight in step 9 indicates successful retrieval of the wire.
If the retrieved wire becomes stuck, the releasing tool can be sheared leaving the
wireline grab/spear downhole. The wire size or toolstring configuration can then be
changed and another attempt made to retrieve the wire.
POOH carefully, monitoring the weight indicator continuously. A sudden loss of weight
indicates that the retrieved wire has disengaged from the wire grab/spear. If this
should happen, repeat steps 8-14.
Recover the wire to surface by following the procedure for stripping wire.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 386 of 465

Page 386 of 4658

18.3 fishing Clamp

If there is any possibility of losing any of the strands back through the wireline valve, then use a
fishing clamp, (consisting of two pieces of angle iron back to back, bolted together so that the wire
is clamped between the plates). The clamp must be long enough to straddle the wireline valve; See
Figure 18.6.
Once the wire has been clamped, it would be removed from the grab, and the grab and pulling
tool replaced by a gauge cutter. The objective now being to pull the wire as far up the lubricator as
possible. (Additional lubricator sections would be an advantage at this stage.) The broken ends of
the wire would be looped over the skirt of the gauge cutter and secured by using wireline knots
(as per type ‘B’ rope socket), or by using a 2 inch length of tube,(ferrule) which would make a
tidier and more secure method of anchoring the wire.
The ideal sizes of tube would be:
0.092 wire = 1/4 inch control line.
0.108 wire = 3/8 inch control line or copper pipe.
3
/16 inch braided line = 1/2 inch copper pipe.

CAUTION: It is tempting at this stage to attach the gauge cutter directly onto the rope
socket in order to pull the maximum length of wire into the lubricator. This can
be dangerous, as a certain amount of weight is required to overcome the effect
of the well pressure acting on the cross-sectional area of the wire. Failure to
allow for this could cause the rope socket and gauge cutter to be blown up to
the top of the lubricator.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 387 of 465

Page 387 of 4658

Figure 18.6 - Fishing Clamp Figure 18.7

When the wire has been retrieved from the well with a Grab, it is possible that the Grab may have
‘found’ the end of the wire e.g. 10’ below the top of the wire. In this case it is possible that there
may be a ‘loop’ of wire trapped across the BOP Rams when they are closed. As it will not be
known which of the possible ‘multiple’ strands is the continuous wireline, then the wire has to be
clamped with the bar clamp. The looped wire above the clamp would be cut to form single
strands.
The objective of wrapping the retrieved ends of wire around a gauge cutter is to pull the ‘multiple’
strands as high into the lubricator as possible, so that eventually only one strand will remain
through the BOP. This strand we want to have retrieved as high as possible into the lubricator, as
in order to retrieve the total length of wire from the well, the wire will need to be ‘back-fed’
through the lubricator and stuffing box, the rig-up replaced on the BOP, and the stack equalised
and BOP opened in order to retrieve the wire by re-spooling it onto the unit.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 388 of 465

Page 388 of 4658

Feeding the wireline back through an 8’ lubricator section is an awkward and difficult task which
frequently contravenes manual handling regulations. It is therefore advisable to have a sort, (3’ is
sufficient),length of lubricator with a lightweight stuffing box specifically designed for wire fishing
operations so that the back-feeding task can be managed safely.
Having retrieved the wire back to single strand status, the job will proceed according to the status
of the wire and toolstring that is downhole. i.e. if the wire has not been ‘boxed’ off the rope
socket, then it may be necessary to cut the wire from the rope socket by use of a Go-Devil or other
type of wirecutter
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 389 of 465

Page 389 of 4658

18.4 Go-Devil
The go-devil is similar in appearance to stem. It is available in 1 1/2 inch and 17/8 inch sizes in
lengths from 18 inch to 60 inch (5 ft). It has a slot milled along its length and a filler plate which is
held in position with roll pins, leaving a hole in the centre to run smoothly down the wire.
There are two major types of go-devil:
BEVELLED
FLAT-BOTTOMED

Figure 18.8 - Go-Devils

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 390 of 465

Page 390 of 4658

Bevelled Go-Devil
A bevelled go-devil is used to slide down wire and cut at the socket by a ‘slicing’ action. Length is
determined by well content:
LONG in heavy oil.
SHORT in light fluid.

This tool is NOT recommended in gas, as speed of impact could cause considerable tubing/casing
damage.
Ensure diameter is sufficient to prevent devil wedging alongside toolstring.

The Flat-Bottomed Go-Devil

A flat bottom is used to:
Trip flopetrol cutter and Kinley.
Provide cutting base on sand/wire.
Add weight to toolstring to jar down.
Assist toolstring back into tubing (past muleshoe).

NOTE: When assembling a Go-devil above the BOP or tree connection, pack the
Quick Union with rags to prevent pieces being dropped inside the Union
box.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 391 of 465

Page 391 of 4658

18.5 Kinley Snepper
The Kinley Snepper will cut any line up to and including 0.125 inch and 7/32 inch electric (braided)
line. It is 21/2 ft long and can be run in a 11/4 inch minimum ID or larger. It will cut the line 21/2 inch
above the rope socket, (this is important when fishing for the rope socket as a pulling tool with an
‘J’ core, or a Camco PT without a core, but with rope socket and another PT on top, would be
required to grip the neck of the rope socket.)
It is designed to be dropped into the hole and operates by the impact of its own weight when it
hits bottom. (Larger wire OD’s may require a flat bottom go-devil to be dropped on top of it to
effect the cut).
As the Snepper cuts, it also crimps the line and clamps onto it. This action makes it possible to pull
the Snepper back up with the cut line, (though only use the crimper if the snepper has sufficient
weight to overcome the force of well pressure on the cross-sectional area of the wire).
The cutter can be used in three ways:
Dropped onto the rope socket.
Dropped and followed by a flat bottomed Go-Devil for cutting large OD. wire, in deviated
wells or wells with high viscosity fluid.
Dropped upside down when a rope socket is covered with sand; this gives a firm base for
a flat-bottomed Go-Devil to be dropped on to. (Note that this will leave 22 ¼” of wire
above the Rope Socket).
To recap a little, the wireline would have been picked up in the lubricator using the gauge cutter
until the wire is pulled tight against the toolstring downhole. It may also be possible to see the
toolstring jars open and close downhole by observing the weight indicator. The objective now is to
prepare the broken wire for the application of the wireline cutter so that the wire may eventually
be cut at the rope socket. To do this, the jars on the downhole toolstring must be closed, (so that
the cutter will strike solidly), and enough slack wire must be played out to avoid fouling the cutter
against the tubing wall. Satisfactory results can be achieved by allowing approx. 3 inch of slack per
1,000 ft in a straight hole and approx. 6 inch per 1,000 ft in a deviated hole. Sufficient time must
also be allowed for the cutter to reach the toolstring. By assuming a speed of 250 ft per min in an
oil well and 350 ft per min in a gas well, 45 minute should be adequate waiting time for this
scenario.
It is important that the operator does not prematurely manipulate the broken wire, as this could
cause the cutter to cut the wire before reaching the toolstring, thus complicating the fishing job.
The next and most important point is to consider the OD of the cutter bar, and the OD of the
toolstring versus the ID of the tubing. The Kinley Snepper for example, has an OD of 1.5 inch. The
toolstring in our case has an OD of 1.875 inch. Side by side that equals 3.375 inch OD. The ID of
51/2 inch 17 lbs per ft tubing is 4.892 inch.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 392 of 465

Page 392 of 4658

As previously discussed, the snepper is designed to stay attached to the wireline once it has cut it,
however, if the snepper fell off the end of the wire, it would fall down beside the toolstring,
possibly wedging itself between the jars, (which are slanted in the tubing), and the tubing wall,
creating what could be an -impossible fishing job. Therefore, the snepper MUST have centralisers
fitted in order to avoid this problem. These centralisers should be designed for each size of tubing,
and kept in a fishing box ready for fitting should the occasion arise. The design formula and
explanation can be seen in Figure 6.6 below.

Tubing ID

Fluid Bypass Holes

Centraliser

Rope Socket

Figure 18.9
SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 393 of 465

Page 393 of 4658

Figure 18.10 - Kinley Snepper

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 394 of 465

Page 394 of 4658

18.6 Flopetrol Cable Cutter
A Flopetrol cable cutter can be used to cut wire in a well providing it is still accessible at the
surface. If the wire has broken downhole then a different type of cutter must be used.
The cable cutter is attached to the wireline and dropped into the well. It strikes the rope socket or
go-devil (used when there is sand etc. covering the rope-socket), and cuts the wire simultaneously
gripping the cut end. The cable cutter can then be retrieved with the fishing wire. By changing the
components it can cut all sizes of slickline and braided line up to 1/4 ins. diameter, leaving 1 ins. of
wire remaining above the rope socket. The cutter can be used in two ways, with the tool in
'standard' mode and the hammer an integral part of the tool or in the 'interface' mode. If there is
a restriction or a fluid level in the well, it is possible, due to the operation of the 'standard' tool,
that it will cut the wire at these points, For this reason the Flopetrol cable cutter can be deployed
in the 'interface' mode. This involves removing the hammer section from the cutting section. The
tapered wedge in the cutter is pinned with a brass shear pin to avoid premature shearing. The
cutting section is then attached to the wireline. (Before starting this operation, the BOP must be
closed and the pressure bled off from the lubricator).
The lubricator can now be made up to the BOP, the pressure equalised across it and the BOP
opened. The cable cutter will now be free to drop down the hole. The time it takes for the cutter
to reach the rope-socket will vary depending on the depth, deviation and the type of fluid in the
hole. Once it is considered that the cutter has reached the rope-socket, an overpull should be
exerted on the wireline to ascertain whether the cutter bar above has cut the wireline. If not, the
wireline should be slacked off, the BOP closed and the lubricator bled off and removed. The
hammer/weight bar can now be installed and dropped in the same manner as the cutter section.
When the hammer section hits the cutting section, the impact is transmitted through the cutting
assembly, cutting and gripping the wireline.
The 'interface' tool can be retrieved on the wire in the same manner as the 'standard' cutter.
The cutter and go-devil are recovered with the wire and give a clean cut, close to the rope socket.
They can be used in oil or gas by varying the length of the go-devil.

CAUTION: THE OD OF TOOL STRING TO BE DROPPED ON AND THE ID OF TUBING SHOULD

BE KNOWN AND IF NECESSARY CENTRALISERS SHOULD BE ADDED TO THE
CUTTER TO PREVENT IT GOING DOWN THE SIDE OF THE TOOL STRING.
SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 395 of 465

Page 395 of 4658

Figure 18.11 - Flopetrol Wireline Cutter

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 396 of 465

Page 396 of 4658

18.6.1 Running a Cutter Bar
Note the normal cable weight and slack off the wire.
Close the BOP rams on the wire and vent down the lubricator via the manifold. Observe
the lubricator pressure gauge for any pressure build-up.
Ensure there is zero pressure build-up in the lubricator and back off the quick-union.
Raise the lubricator high enough to allow insertion of the cutter bar.
Install the cutter bar as specified in the manufacturer's manual.

IMPORTANT: Check that the cutter bar slides up and down the wire freely.

Gently sit the cutter down on top of the BOP rams.

Stab the lubricator back on top of the BOPs. Take particular care to keep the cutter bar
aligned with lubricator to avoid premature cutting of the wire. Avoid excessive slack
on the wire. Make up quick-union and close lubricator manifold valve.
Open equalising valve on BOP to allow well pressure to equalise across it.
Crack open BOP rams, enough to free the wire, but without allowing the bar to drop.
Pick up the wire to the normal wire weight noted prior to slacking off, or until the
beginning of overpull is observed.
Fully open BOP rams to allow cutter bar to drop.
Allow sufficient time for bar to drop.

NOTE: This will vary depending on well depth, well deviation, well fluid and bypass.

NOTE: In some cases the bar hitting the rope socket can be observed as a small kick
on the weight indicator, or felt manually on the line. Deviation, restrictions,
scale and doglegs can cause the bar to hang up. Working the wire up and
down can assist the cutter.

18.6.2 Running an Interface Bar

The procedure to insert the interface bar into the lubricator and release it is the same as
for the cutter bar.
When the wire has been cut, pull back to surface. This should normally retrieve the
cutter bar and interface bar on the end of the wireline.
Once the tool is confirmed to be inside the lubricator, close the Xmas tree and bleed
down lubricator.
Back off the quick-union and raise the lubricator.
Remove the cutter bar and interface bar.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 397 of 465

Page 397 of 4658

18.6.3 Centraliser Design

Ensure that the OD of the centraliser will sit against the tubing wall on one side with the other side
slightly overlapping the toolstring OD.
Ensure that the centraliser OD with two wraps of wire around it will pass through the smallest ID
(calculated safety factor).
Having dropped the snepper, the current state of the operation is as follows:
The lubricator is in position with the wireline valve rams partially open and the wire
attached to the gauge cutter in the lubricator.
Attempt to pull the gauge cutter as high as possible into the lubricator, (this should be
possible if the wire is cut from the toolstring, if not some manipulation may be
necessary or else a flat bottomed go devil dropped on top of the snepper). Having
established that the wire is cut, close the wireline valve and bleed off the lubricator.
Knowing at this stage that there is only a 2.5 ft long snepper to pull back, the lubricator
can be rigged down to one section or even crossover and stuffing box to sit onto the
wireline valve. This makes backfeeding the wire much easier and less dangerous to
fingers etc.
Once the line has been backfeed through the stuffing box, it should then be spliced
(using pipe splices as discussed with gauge cutter), onto the .108 drum, 3/16" drum, or
direct to the spooling device, whichever is most convenient, and having opened the
wireline valve the wire can be retrieved from the hole.

CAUTION: WHEN RETRIEVING THE WIRE, A STAGE WILL BE REACHED WHERE PRESSURE
ACTING ON THE CROSS SECTION AREA OF THE WIRE CREATES A FORCE GREATER
THAN THE WEIGHT OF THE WIRE IN THE HOLE, AT THIS STAGE THE WIRE COULD
BLOW OUT OF THE STUFFING BOX AND OUT OF CONTROL. ENSURE THAT NON
ESSENTIAL PERSONNEL ARE AWARE OF THIS, SO THAT THEY MAY STAND WELL
CLEAR.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 398 of 465

Page 398 of 4658

18.7 Retrieval of Fish
Assuming that the necessary re-spooling, re-rigging up of lubricator etc., has been completed, the
snepper (if it had fallen off the wire) and toolstring must be recovered. This should be a relatively
simple matter of using a centralised or skirted ‘SB’ or ‘UO’ pulling tool for the snepper and a
skirted ‘UO’, ‘SS’ or ‘RS’ (a ‘UO’' pulling tool with the bottom threaded to accept various sizes of
skirt, will avoid the expense of threading both ‘S’ and ‘R’ bodies) depending on the need to jar up
or down to shear the toolstring etc. off from the downhole device. The use of an ‘S’ or ‘J’ core for
the rope socket (i.e. ‘RS/J’ or ‘SS/J’) is recommended due to the fact that 2 1/2 inch of wire will be
left above the rope socket fishing neck, (a ‘B’ core would not have sufficient reach).
If there should be anything from 6 inch - 2 inch of wire attached to the rope socket, stopping an
‘SS’ or ‘RS’ from reaching the rope socket, do NOT box it off with a blind box. A small piece of wire
is difficult to fish, and could hinder the retrieval of the toolstring or downhole device. A ‘BB’ or ‘BE’
which have a split skirt should be used, alternatively, the skirt and body of the ‘UO’ or ‘RS’, ‘SS’ can
be modified to grip the rope socket leaving the wire attached.
SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 399 of 465

Page 399 of 4658

Figure 18.12 - ‘BB’, ‘BE’ and ‘SS’ Pulling Tools

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 400 of 465

Page 400 of 4658

18.8 ‘JUC’ & ‘R’ series pulling tools
18.8.1 Camco ‘JUC’ Series Pulling Tools
The type ‘JUC’ Pulling Tool, See Figure 6.9, is designed to engage with external fishing necks e.g.
rope sockets, stems, equalising prongs, test tools and to shear and release by upward jar action.
Three types of ‘JU’ Series tools are used and differ only by their core length which is selected to
give a desired reach:
Type ‘JUC’ - Long core/short reach
Type ‘JUS’ - Intermediate core/intermediate reach
Type ‘JUL’ - Short core/long reach.

(All other parts of each type of tool are identical and completely interchangeable.)
On reaching the working depth, the weight of the toolstring bears down on the device to be pulled
and, if necessary, is backed up by light downward jarring.
Once latched on, pulling operations can begin.
If the pulling operation is prevented by, for example, the build up of debris, differential pressure o r
scale, the shear pin will shear and so unlatch the dogs from the fishing neck. The pulling tool can
now be retrieved, redressed or changed for another type.

NOTE: When jarring up with ‘JU’ tools, large forces can be imparted to the shear
pin. For this reason, these tools are generally fitted with larger shear pins
than those fitted to equivalent shear down tools. Despite this, as the shear
pin takes the full load of the force imparted by the jar, it can sometimes
shear before the pulling operation is accomplished.

It is recommended that the shear mechanism is tested prior to use. Following recovery from the
well, the tool should be redressed before storing.
SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 401 of 465

Page 401 of 4658

Figure 18.13 - Camco Type ‘JUC’ Pulling Tool

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 402 of 465

Page 402 of 4658

18.8.2 Otis ‘R’ Series Pulling Tools
The Type ‘R’ series pulling tool, See Figure 6.10, is designed to engage with external fishing necks,
e.g. rope sockets, stems, equalising prongs, test tools and to shear and release by upward jar
action. Three types of ‘R’ series tools are used and differ only by their core length, See Figure 6.11,
which is selected to give a desired reach:
Type ‘RB’ - long core/short reach
Type ‘RS’ - intermediate core/intermediate reach
Type ‘RJ’ - short core/long reach.

(All other parts of each type of tool are identical and completely interchangeable.)
On reaching the working depth, the weight of the toolstring bears down on the device to be pulled
and, if necessary, is backed up by light downward jarring.
Once latched, pulling operations can begin.
If the pulling operation is prevented by, for example, the build up of debris, scale or differential
pressure, the shear pin will shear and so unlatch the dogs from the fishing neck. The pulling tool
can now be retrieved, redressed or changed for another type.

NOTE: When jarring up with ‘R’ tools, large forces can be imparted to the shear pin.
For this reason, these tools are generally fitted with larger shear pins than
those fitted to equivalent shear down tools. Despite this, as the shear pin
takes the full load of the force imparted by the jar, it can sometimes shear
before the pulling operation is accomplished.

Two features of the ‘R’ Series pulling tool are its ability to sustain downwards jarring without
releasing and it is not dependent on the core bottoming out to achieve shearing.
In certain circumstances, the tool can be used in running operations.
It is recommended that the shear mechanism is tested prior to use. Following recovery from the
well, the tool should be cleaned and redressed before storing.
The ‘R’ Pulling Tool is attached to a standard toolstring and lowered into the well. Upon contact
with the sub-surface device, the lower portion of the cylinder passes over the fishing neck; the
dogs are pushed outward, the force of the dog spring then makes the dogs spring inward to
engage the fish neck. Upward impact of the jars is used to pull the sub -surface device from the
well.
The shear pin should withstand considerable jarring before shearing. When the pin shears, the
cylinder spring acts between the cover and the cylinder and moves the core up in the cylinder. This
moves the dogs upward against the force of the dog spring. As the dogs move upward, their
tapered upper ends move into the cylinder, forcing the dogs inward thereby pushing th e lower
ends of the dogs outward. This causes the dogs to release their grip on the fish neck.
SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 403 of 465

Page 403 of 4658

Figure 18.14 - Otis Type ‘R’ Pulling Tool

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 404 of 465

Page 404 of 4658

Figure 18.15 - Otis Type ‘R’ Pulling Tools Reaches

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 405 of 465

Page 405 of 4658

18.9 Centre Spear
This tool is not recommended for general wire fishing operations. It is made by
welding barbs on a pointed rod, staggered around the outside and vertically.
This tool can be very difficult to move up the tubing should it be run too far
below the end of the line and because engaged in the wire. The wire above it
will ball up and become tighter as it is jarred up the tubing until it is impossible
to move it. It cannot be released from its bite once the wire is wrapped around
it. About the only time this tool should be used is in a case where the wire is
balled up so badly that it is impossible to get hold of it with a two-prong grab, or
in the case of wire being ‘blown up the hole’ and consequently is a wire ball. The
pointed spear can sometimes be driven into such a ball and break off a small
piece at a time until the ball has been loosened enough to be able to move it up
the tubing. In this case, it is recommended that the two - prong grab then be
used since it will come nearer to straightening out the wire, making it easier to
pull.

Figure 18.16 - Centre Spear

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 406 of 465

Page 406 of 4658

18.9.1 Stripping Wire
Prior to commencing fishing operations under pressure, the following important points must be
noted:
When pulling wire with toolstring and /or fish, sufficient lubricator length is required to
accommodate both toolstrings above the swab valve (with both jars open)
When the wire is open-ended, it may be forcibly ejected from the stuffing box by the
well pressure when the wire end is close to the surface. Ensure that all non-essential
personnel are excluded from the immediate area.
Pull up until the wireline grab/spear is as far up into the lubricator as possible to leave
the maximum length of wire beneath it to work with.
Close the BOP rams and note the travel of the manual stems. This will indicate if the
rams have successfully closed or not. If closed completely, this usually indicates the
wire bundle/’birds nest’ is completely contained in the lubricator and the BOP rams
are closed on the fished wire.
Bleed down the lubricator. Close in the bleed valve and monitor lubricator pressure.
Before backing off the quick union, the pressure gauge should be checked and should be
reading zero pressure. The bleed off valve must be re-opened.
Back off the quick union and pick up the lubricator slowly, making sure that the wire
bundle/’birds nest’ inside does not snag.

NOTE: The wireline operator must slack off as the lubricator is being lifted.

Place and secure a wireline bar clamp to the wire immediately above the BOPs.
Lower the fishing string out of the lubricator and remove the wireline grab/spear and
wire bundle/’birds nest’.
Rig down the lubricator (or stand it to one side).
If necessary, strip through enough wire to feed back through the lubricator and stuffing
box. This is done by attaching a tugger line to the bar clamp and picking up. The line
is then secured at BOP level using a second bar clamp.

NOTE: The wireline can also be attached to a gauge cutter and the wireline winch
used to strip the wire through the BOP.

Thread the tail end through the lubricator assembly and the stuffing box. Make up the
stuffing box to the lubricator and position this assembly above the clamp on top of
the BOPs.
Remove the wire from the unit depth counter wheel assembly (to allow the knot to be
pulled onto the drum).
Join the ends of the wire using a nut and a standard wireline knot.
Pick up tension on the line using the wireline winch. Examine the knot closely. Make
sure that it does not begin to unwind under tension.
Remove the bar clamp from above the BOPs and stab on the lubricator, making up the
quick union (as the lubricator is lowered, the tension in the wireline will drop off).
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 407 of 465

Page 407 of 4658

Take up the tension in the wireline using the winch and open the equalising valve on the
BOPs.
Allow the pressure to equalise across the BOP and open same.
POOH with the wireline until the wireline knot and several wraps are on the drum. Place
a wireline clamp on the line and slack off the tension.
Replace the wire in the unit depth counter wheel and take up the tension on the
wireline.
Remove the wireline clamp and continue to POOH.
POOH carefully, observing the weight indicator closely. Any sudden increase in weight
may indicate that there is a knot or kink in the wire.

NOTE: When a knot is encountered, steps 1-19 must be repeated.

When the end of the retrieved wireline is approaching surface, ensure that all personnel
are well clear of the immediate area in case the tail end is ejected from the well or
the wire breaks unexpectedly.
Post a responsible person at the BOP control to be ready to close the BOPs when the tail
end reaches the surface.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 408 of 465

Page 408 of 4658

18.10 Boxing Off Wire

This procedure applies when the tool is stuck and the wire has parted prematurely before a cutter
bar has been dropped and there is too little wire left in the well to reach the surface.
A boxing off operation is used to free the wire at the rope socket so that the wire in the well can
be retrieved separately from the tool.
Select and make up a suitable toolstring. (If available, a weak point rope socket should be used.)

NOTE: Only tubular jars should be used for fishing operations. Spang jars have an
open linkage which can become fouled by the loose wire.

Select a suitable blind box as follows:

Approx. 0.250” diameter below smallest restriction to be encountered
Hard faced
Edges chamfered at 45o at both ends.
Calculate the approximate top of the loose wire. This will vary depending on the size of
wire and the tubing diameter.
Zero the blind box at the tubing hanger or on top of the rotary table when working from
the drill floor.
Pick up the tool into the lubricator and stab the lubricator on top of the BOP.
Pick up the tool into the lubricator and slowly open the swab valve, counting the number
of turns.
RIH slowly continuously observing weight indicator.
At the depth of the wire tail (top of loose wire), pay close attention to the weight
indicator. Usually there is no indication or fall off in weight expected once the tool is
inside the loose wire coils. Excessive loss of weight indicates that the tool is not being
introduced cleanly into the coils and is ‘snagging’ the end of the wire.
Sit down on top of rope socket.
Jar down on top of rope socket to cut/break the wire.

NOTE: When the wire has been successfully parted at the rope socket, the newly
freed end will not usually spring up the hole, or move in any way to wrap
around the blind box. However, it will still be prudent to observe the weight
indicator carefully for weight excessive increase, indicating that the tool may
have snagged the wire.

Pull blind the box back to surface.

Once the tool is confirmed to be inside the lubricator, close the Xmas tree and bleed
down the lubricator.
Back off the quick-union and raise the lubricator.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 409 of 465

Page 409 of 4658

18.11 how to calculate optimum blind box size

18.11.1 Blind Box Calculation Example

Figure 18.17
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 410 of 465

Page 410 of 4658

18.11.2 Retrieving a Stuck Toolstring
This procedure refers to the recovery of a stuck toolstring with a clean rope socket. Previous to
this, boxing off and LIB runs will normally have been made to prepare and check the rope socket.
Prior to commencing any fishing operation, attempt to determine the cause of the ‘stuck tool’
from the well history. If the causes are connected with settling of debris etc., check to see if these
conditions can be removed by circulation, change of well fluid etc.
Ensure that there is enough length of lubricator above the swab valve to accommodate
the combined fishing and fished tools. (With both jars open)
Select a suitable fishing tool and shear pin type (jar-up or jar-down release mechanism)
depending on the tool to be fished.
If appropriate, select the correct size of guide skirt and fit a centraliser above the pulling
tool instead of a guide skirt.
Make up the complete fishing string with sufficient weight (when selecting the fishing
string, consideration must be given to the combined weight of the fishing string and
the toolstring to be fished). Ensure that a spring/hydraulic jar is included in the
fishing string.
Pick up fishing string into lubricator after taking the zero on the tubing hanger flange.
Make up the lubricator quick union to the BOP.
Pressure test the lubricator and open the swab valve, counting the number of turns.
RIH slowly, observing the weight indicator closely. RIH to approximately 100 ft. above
the top of the stuck tool.
Take an accurate pick-up weight and RIH slowly. Sit down on top of the stuck tool.
Pick up on the wireline and observe the weight indicator. Overpull will indicate that the
stuck tool is successfully latched. If not latched, repeat previous steps as required.
Once the stuck tool has been properly latched, attempt to free it using the
spring/hydraulic jars.
If stuck tool is freed, POOH slowly and retrieve as normal.
If jarring produces no result, shear off fishing tool by jarring in the appropriate direction.
POOH and revert to fishing operations using heavier equipment.

18.11.3 Fishing for KNOWN/unidentified objects

Every time wireline operations take place there is always the possibility of coming across some
sort of obstruction whether it be in the Xmas tree, tubing, above an SCSSV or plug. If this is the
case then we have to find out what the obstruction may be.
In an ideal situation the down hole cameras on the market could be used but as they are
expensive and are still being experimented with basic fishing for unidentified objects would take
place. To identify and clear or free obstruction/obstructions from the well.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 411 of 465

Page 411 of 4658

18.12 fishing for tools

18.12.1 Fishing for Tools with a Fishneck

Generally this type of operation is the easiest of all fishing operations. The job should be very
similar to a conventional wireline job akin to pulling a plug or safety valve, provided the fish is free.
From the notes taken prior to the fish being lost, it will be known what type and size of fishing
neck is on the fish, it will then be a case of selecting the appropriate size and type of pulling tool
with which to latch the fish.
The most commonly used Otis pulling tools are the R, S, and G series tools. The B series tool would
only normally be run where there is junk around the fish neck to the extent that it could not be
latched with a skirted tool such as the R series.
The choice of tool will initially be made on whether the fish neck is internal or external, then
whether we want to shear up or down. Shear up is always the safer option, particularly when the
pulling tool is run in conjunction with spring jars. Generally the first attempt should always be
made with a shear up to release tool, so that even when fishing at depth, provided the spring jars
fire, the tool can be released. Obviously if the fish is stuck and requires upward jarring to free it, a
jar up to release pulling tool is unlikely to retrieve the fish. The next stage will be to go to a jar
down to release tool, which will allow multiple attempts to jar the fish free using the spring jars.
Careful consideration needs to be given to the amount of stem to be put in, particularly when
fishing at depth.
Too little stem (particularly if using braided line) will make shearing off extremely difficult, for this
reason pin the jar down to release pulling tool with brass shear stock at least until enough
confidence in the ability to release has been gained.
Fishing for tools with a fish neck will be complicated in case of where a small diameter tool has
fallen through tubing restrictions into the liner. 1n these circumstances, because the tool may be
lying across the wellbore, a pulling tool may be unable to latch. Thought should be given to using a
releasable crocodile grab or similar tool in these circumstances.

18.12.2 Fishing For Tools without a Fishneck

Usually these circumstances are caused by failure of the toolstring at a threaded connection.
Inspection of the part retrieved from the well will obviously give a clue about what type of tool
should be employed to fish the rest.
If the fish has a hollow core, it may be possible to use a spear of some type; otherwise a form of
overshot will be required. Under both circumstances it is possible a special releasable tool will
need to be fabricated before the fishing operation starts.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 412 of 465

Page 412 of 4658

18.13 LEAD IMPRESSION BLOCK
The Lead Impression Block (LIB), See Figure 18.18, is an important and useful tool to have available
during fishing operations. A selection of LIBs should be kept in the wireline toolbox in a range of
ODs to suit the various tubing and completion equipment sizes. Tapered LIBs can be used to check
damage inside internal fishing necks.
The lead core is normally pinned through the body and should be checked prior to running the tool
to ensure that it is firmly secure. Other pre-running checks are to measure the O.D. accurately and
ensure that the lead base is clean and smooth and has no markings on it that would confuse the
operator when interpreting an impression.
When running in the tubing, the LIB should be lowered slowly through the Xmas tree, landing
nipples, side pocket mandrels (SPMs), and sliding side doors (SSDs); the operator should have the
depths of these completion tools prior to running the tubing.
Running the LIB without a knuckle joint can avoid excessive movement of the tool while running
in. This will reduce the marking of the lead and will tend to centre the LIB for a more
representative impression.

NOTE: If the toolstring hangs up, it should be tapped through the restriction very
slowly and not jarred through.

When the toolstring is 4 - 6 ft. above the fish the LIB is lowered very gently onto the fish. The tools
are then picked up to open the jars about half way and the toolstring jarred down once only. The
toolstring is pulled back to surface.

NOTE: Heavy downward jarring will cause the lead to extrude (spread outwards)
and may interfere with the retrieval of the LIB through any restrictions in
the tubing i.e. landing nipples etc.

The LIB should be handled with care on recovery to avoid making any other marks on the lead that
would make the impression taken downhole difficult to interpret. The LIB can be used with
excellent results and will assist the operator in selecting the correct fishing tool to clear the tubing
and return the well to normal operations.
SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 413 of 465

Page 413 of 4658

Figure 18.18 - Lead Impression Block (LIB)

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 414 of 465

Page 414 of 4658

18.13.1 Running Lead Impression Block (LIB)
Select a suitable size of LIB. It should be at least 0.25 ins. below the smallest tubing
restriction to be encountered.
Prepare the base of the LIB. Remove all marks and dents using a file and polish the face.
The LIB should then be properly protected and handled with care to prevent damage
to the prepared face.
Make up the LIB onto the toolstring taking care not to mark the polished face.
Pick up the toolstring into the lubricator and make it up to the BOP.

NOTE: Make sure that the toolstring is pulled up well inside the lubricator to avoid
the LIB making contact with the BOPs as the lubricator is lowered.
Remember that, as the upper hay pulley is attached to the top of the
lubricator, the cable will move down at double the rate of the lubricator.

Pressure test the lubricator and open the swab valve, counting the number of turns.
RIH slowly with the LIB. Stop approximately 100 ft. above the object of which an
impression is required.
Take an accurate pick up weight.
RIH slowly and sit down gently on top of the object.
Pick up and partly open the jars. Jar down once only.

NOTE: Jarring down more than once may confuse the impression and loosen the
lead.

Slowly POOH with lead impression block.

When certain that the tool is inside the lubricator, close in well and bleed down
lubricator.
Back off the quick union and pick up lubricator.
Pull lubricator to one side of the Xmas tree to ensure that the LIB cannot make contact
with the top of the Xmas tree or any object as it is being lowered out of the
lubricator.
Remove LIB for inspection, taking care not to damage the polished face.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 415 of 465

Page 415 of 4658

18.14 magnet
The Magnet fishing tool is designed to remove small pieces of ferrous metals from the top of tools
in the wells. This tool does not have a hole through it for fluid bypass as do other tools. The
magnet is fitted with a sleeve on the outside and a spring which compresses the sleeve to keep it
below the end the magnet. Upon reaching the depth of the fish the operator sets the tool string
down gently on top of the fish. The weight of the tool string the forces the magnet down the
sleeve to pick up small pieces of wire or ferrous metals that might be lying on top or around the
fish. This should be retrieved from the well slowly so as not to lose the particles that have been
picked up.

Figure 18.19 - Magnet

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 416 of 465

Page 416 of 4658

18.15 PCE Alligator Grab
The PCE Alligator Grab, See Figure 18.20, is a wireline fishing tool utilised to catch and retrieve
loose objects (e.g. broken equipment) from the tubing. The grab is designed to allow the operator
to pre-determine the amount of jaw pressure required to effectively grip the fish by adjusting the
spring tension in the tool prior to running in the tubing.

NOTE: An external thread is available on the lower end of the top sub to allow the
attachment of a centraliser, if necessary.

The principle of operation is as follows. When the grab is set down on a fish, downward jar action
will shear the Shear Pin and the force of the spring will move the Inner Mandrel upwards. This
upward movement will also move the Shot Pin upwards and, due to the slots in the upper ends of
the Jaws, rotate the Jaws about the Pivot to grip the fish.

NOTE: Prior to running the PCE Alligator Grab, it must be established that loose
objects exist in the tubing. This Alligator Grab is not designed to withstand
heavy jarring operations on a fish stuck in the tubing.

The PCE Alligator Grab is available in various sizes as listed in Table 18.1

Size ins. (mm) Fish Neck Size ins. (mm) Thread Connection Ins. (mm) Maximum OD ins. (mm)
1 15
1 /4 (31.75) 1.187 (30.15) /16 (23.81) - 10 tpi 1.25 (31.75)
1 15
1 /2 (38.10) 1.187 (30.15) /16 (23.81) - 10 tpi 1.50 (38.10)
1
2 (50.80) 1.375 (34.93) 1 /16 (26.99) - 10 tpi 1.75 (44.45)
5
3 (76.20) 1.750 (44.45) 1 /16 (33.34) - 10 tpi 2.25 (57.15)
Table 18.1 - Specifications for the PCE Alligator
SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 417 of 465

Page 417 of 4658

Figure 18.20 - PCE Alligator Grab

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 418 of 465

Page 418 of 4658

18.16 Overshots
Overshots are used to grip downhole tools when:
The fishing neck is worn or broken
There is no fishing neck (i.e. the tool has parted by unscrewing)
When a larger upward force is required than could be pulled on a standard pulling tool.

The principle of operation of all overshots is the same. A hardened set of steel slips with sharp
upward facing teeth grip the fish. A spring assists these slips to engage initially. However, an
upward pull and upward jarring sets the slips tighter because of the tapered I.D. in the skirt.
Upward movement of the matching taper on the skirt will increase the gripping force.

18.16.1 ‘O’ Bannon Overshot

The ability of the O’ Bannon Overshot, See Figure 18.21 , to catch various items is made possible
by an upper and lower set of segmented slips which sit in tapered bowls (Dual Catch Overshot).
These slips are available in a 1/8 ins. incremental range of sizes giving this tool a broad catching
range. (It is usual to select the slip size required and check the grip by latching the same sized
object at surface prior to running.)
The principle of operation of the O’ Bannon overshot is as follows. The overshot is run in the
tubing with the ID of the slips slightly smaller than the OD of the fish. When the slips contact the
fish the slip segments move upwards in the tapered bowls increasing the ID of the slip
arrangement. The fish will move through the slips if the ID of the slips is big enough.
On picking up the toolstring the teeth on the slips bite into the sides of the fish stopping any
movement of the slip segments. Further upward pull moves the tapered bowls up and a wedging
action makes the teeth bite tighter into the fish.

NOTE: O’ Bannon overshots have no release mechanism so they are always run
with a rope socket and latched into a shear up or shear down pulling tool.

On retrieval at surface the O’ Bannon overshot requires to be disassembled.

SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 419 of 465

Page 419 of 4658

Figure 18.21 - O’ Bannon Overshot

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 420 of 465

Page 420 of 4658

18.17 Flopetrol Releasing Overshot
The Flopetrol Releasing Overshot, See Figure 18.22, performs the same function as the O’ Bannon
Overshot i.e. It will catch tool assemblies or parts of assemblies which have parted by breaking or
unscrewing. However, the Flopetrol Overshot has a releasing mechanism built into its upper
assembly, that is, when the tool is subjected to downward jarring the slips will retract and release
the fish. (Release may be necessary if the wire needs to be changed to a larger diameter line or a
rope socket requires re-making.)
The Flopetrol Overshot has a wide range of slips from 1/2 in. to 27/8 ins. to fit the tool's two
different sizes of overshots.
Prior to running the overshot it is necessary to check that the correct core extension (long or
short), correct slip size, and correct shear pin (steel or brass) have been installed.
The principle of operation is as follows. On contact the slips stop at the top of the fish and the
remainder of the tool moves downwards. The spring then pushes the slips down and the taper
causes the initial grip.
An upward pull sets the slips tighter. Any upward jarring force to retrieve the fish is transmitted
through the skirt and the slips. The shear pin cannot be sheared by upward jarring action.
Safety release is affected by downward jarring action; considerable jarring may sometimes be
required. The core remains resting on the fish - the remainder of the tool moves downwards. Once
the pin is sheared the two pawls hold the core in an upward position which keeps the slips
retracted from the taper.
SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 421 of 465

Page 421 of 4658

Figure 18.22 - Flopetrol Releasing Overshot

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 422 of 465

Page 422 of 4658

18.18 Petroline Heavy Duty Pulling Tool
The Petroline Heavy Duty Pulling Tool, See Figure 18.23, is designed to minimise the problem of
wear and/or damage to fishing necks during operations where heavy jarring is intended. This tool
has been designed so that the latching dogs act on the full circumference of a fishing neck. The
Petroline heavy duty pulling tool can withstand extensive heavy jarring. It is a shear down to
release tool.
The pulling tool is run on the end of a wireline string that includes a jar accelerator, 8 - 10 ft. of
weight bar, tension jars, link jars and the heavy duty pulling tool. The wireline toolstring is run
down to the fish and latched on to the fishing neck. Latching requires the core adapter and finger
core to move upwards in the latch housing; the fingers will move into the recess. Latching is
complete when the coiled spring in the upper housing returns the finger core to its original
position. Upward jarring should be continued until the object becomes loose or it is necessary to
cut off some wire or re-tie a new rope socket.
If safety disconnect is necessary several downward jars will shear the pin. The finger core will be in
the raised and release position and the wireline string may then be pulled to the surface.

NOTE: Prolonged jarring on non-heavy duty tools can result in tool failure and the
possibility of parts being left downhole.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 423 of 465

Page 423 of 4658

Figure 18.23 - Petroline Heavy Duty Pulling Tool

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 424 of 465

Page 424 of 4658

18.19 PCE Bulldog Spears
Wireline Bulldog Spears are fishing tools specifically designed to catch stuck tubular assemblies by
spearing into their internal profiles. PCE offer three types of Bulldog Spears:
Conventional type
Collet type
Releasable Collet type.

In all cases, the upward movement of a tapered rod will expand a set of Slips outward onto the
internal profile of a fish. When upward jarring is employed to free the fish, the Slips will bite
tighter into the internal profile of the stuck assembly due to the tapered arrangement between
the Slips and the tapered rod on the spear.

18.19.1 Conventional Spear

Figure 18.24 shows a conventional PCE wireline Bulldog Spear. This type of spear is primarily
designed to catch stuck tubular profiles with internal diameters ranging from 0.5 to 6.00 ins. The
Bulldog Spear consists of Top Sub/Fish Neck, Tapered Rod and hardened and tempered Slips wh ich
are dovetailed into grooves in the Tapered Rod. The through bore in the Tapered Rod and the hole
drilled in the Top Sub facilitates fluid bypass when running the spear in the tubing.
Depending on the ID. of the fish, the number of Slips used will vary.

NOTE: The conventional Bulldog Spear cannot be released once it catches on the
internal profile of a downhole assembly. This Bulldog Spear must be run
with a jar-down-to-release pulling tool to ensure that release is possible
from the spear when necessary.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 425 of 465

Page 425 of 4658

Figure 18.24 - Conventional PCE Bulldog Spear

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 426 of 465

Page 426 of 4658

18.20 Releasable Collet Type Bulldog Spear
The PCE Releasable Collet Type Bulldog Spear, See Figure 18.25, is used to catch stuck assemblies
with internal diameters ranging from 0.875 to 3.5 ins. The Releasable Collet Type Spear consists of
a Spear, Centre Mandrel with attached fishing neck, Collet Slips, Spring and Outer Mandrel with an
internal fishing neck. This spear has no fluid bypass features.
The principle of operation is as follows. A shear-up-to-release running/pulling tool (e.g. Camco ‘JU’
or Otis ‘RB’) is used to run the spear into the fish. When the fishing tool spears the downhole
assembly, the Collet will positively stop on top of the fish and the spear will move into the bore of
the fish. This action will compress the spring and simultaneously allow the Collet Slips to retract as
the OD. of the taper on the Centre Mandrel reduces.
When the Collet Slips are retracted sufficiently, they will force the Collet Slips down the taper and
grip. An upward pull on the wireline will move the Centre Mandrel up and expand the Collet Slips
to bite into the fish. Upward jarring is then applied to free the fish or shear the shear pin in the
running/pulling tool.
To release the spear from the fish, a shear-up-to-release pulling tool is used (e.g. Otis ‘GR’) to drive
down the Centre Mandrel and latch into internal fishing neck on the Outer Mandrel. As the Centre
Mandrel is driven down, the Collet Slips retract on the taper until the pulling tool latches. With the
Collet Slips retracted, upward jarring will free the spear from the fish.

NOTE: Due to the presence of the Spring, the downward movement of the Centre
Mandrel and the latching of the pulling tool is essential for the release of the
spear.
SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 427 of 465

Page 427 of 4658

Figure 18.25 - PCE Collet Type Spears

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 428 of 465

Page 428 of 4658

18.21 FISHING PROCEDURE WHEN WIRELINE IS PULLED OUT OF ROPE SOCKET
When it is suspected that the wire has pulled out of the rope socket on the tool string during a
wireline operation:
Remove all wire from the well, measuring it back on the wireline unit drum and leaving
the tools in the well. Check what fishing tools are available.
Inform the Wireline Supervisor of the situation and what equipment is available before
taking any further action.
If given instructions to proceed, rig up a second tool string consisting of 5 ft st.,
mechanical jars, knuckle joint and attach a lead impression block (LIB) to suit the
tubing size.
Pressure the lubricator. Run in carefully and take a single impression of the rope socket
by gently tapping down once only with the jars.
Pull out of the well, depressurise the lubricator and inspect the impression made in the
block.
If the impression indicates some wire is still attached to the rope socket, inform the
Wireline Supervisor.
If a clean impression is obtained, rig up extra lubricator to enable both tool strings to be
retrieved.
Attach an ‘SB’ pulling tool with brass shear pin installed and a flared skirt, if in 4½ ins. or
larger tubing, to the tool string.
Pressure up the lubricator, run in and latch the rope socket.

On instruction from the Wireline Supervisor, either:

Jar down to shear pins in the device downhole, to free the tool string. This will also shear
the pin in the ‘SB’ pulling tool and a second run will be required to latch and fish the
tool string. Remove the ‘SB’ pulling tool and attach the pulling tool, for the downhole
device, and retrieve.
or:
Jar up with the retrieving tool string on the device and retrieve it in one run.
If the reason for pulling out of the rope socket is apparent, e.g. a valve being run
becoming jammed in a nipple, lost jar action etc., check and re-arrange the tool
string. If necessary, also inspect the packing etc. on the device.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 429 of 465

Page 429 of 4658

NOTES PAGE
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 430 of 465

Page 430 of 4658

NOTES PAGE
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 431 of 465

Page 431 of 4658

19 BRAIDED LINE EQUIPMENT

This section describes the equipment required for braided line operations. The term braided line
includes both stranded or swab line wire and electric line.
The equipment which varies from that used in slickline services is the rope socket and the surface
pressure control rig up.
The major changes in the pressure control equipment are that a grease injection system is utilised
instead of a stuffing box and the BOP arrangement must have two opposing rams dressed for the
cable size being used. The two opposing rams enables grease injection between the rams which is
necessary to create the seal with the BOPs. A complete braided line rig up is shown in Figure 18.1.
Braided line sizes used by the wireline department are 3/16” and 7/32” diameter although 5/16” is
occasionally used for heavy duty fishing operations. The specialised equipment for braided line
operations is described in the following sections.

19.1 GREASE INJECTION SYSTEM

To supply grease under pressure the following equipment is required:
Grease injector head assembly
High pressure grease pump
Grease reservoir
Sheave
Hose package
Line wiper.

Each of the major items in the system is described below in the following subsections.

19.2 GREASE INJECTION HEAD

The grease injection head is required to effect a seal around cable, (refer to Figure 18.1). A
conventional stuffing box is ineffective for sealing around cable as the well fluids can leak through
the matrix of the cable. The grease head accomplishes a seal by utilising a ‘grease seal’.
19.2.1 Grease Seal
A grease seal is formed by the injection of grease at high pressure into an annular space between
the outside of the cable and the inside of a set of flow tubes. The grease seal when formed effects
two functions:

It fills the interstices between the strands and between the various layers of the wire. The
sealing fluid fills these spaces, depriving them as an escape route for well fluids.
Fills the small annular space with grease at a higher pressure than that of the well fluids,
forming a barrier to flow out of the head.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 432 of 465

Page 432 of 4658

Figure 19.1 - Typical Grease Injection Rig-up

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 433 of 465

Page 433 of 4658

As a result, a complete seal is formed which also lubricates the surfaces of the wire and flow tubes
reducing friction and wear and tear.
As the grease is supplied at a higher pressure than that inside the lubricator, the grease will flow
up and down the flow tubes at a volume according to:
Differential pressure between the flow tubes and well pressure
Differential pressure between the flow tubes and ambient pressure above the head.
The direction of movement of the wire.
The flow area around and through the wire.
The viscosity of the grease.

To prevent the use of excessive amounts of grease, the flow tubes should be selected to limit the
annular flow area without causing friction and a thick consistency of grease should be used.
Due to the higher differential pressure towards the top of the flow tubes towards ambient
pressure, most of the grease will tend to flow upwards. To help prevent this, more flow tubes are
installed above the injection point than below (refer to Figure 19.1).
The grease flowing downwards is expressed into the well usually carried away on the wire. Th e
grease flowing upwards is forced out through a return line to a drum for disposal. A packing unit is
used to close around the wire above the flow tubes to direct the grease into the return line.
When the wire is run into the well, it will tend to drag the grease with it and flow through the
return line will be lower than when pulling as the opposite now occurs.
If the system is correctly set up, there is little flow into the well and grease consumption is low.
19.2.2 Construction
The grease injection control head comprises flow tube sleeves, a flow tube sleeve coupling, a quick
union pin end, a flow hose and a line rubber and hydraulic packing nut assembly at the upper end.
The amount of flow tube sleeves required is dependent on the well pressure. For 3/16” and 7/32”
braided line the following set up is advised:

Well Pressure, psi Well Fluid Number of Flow Tubes

0-5,000 Liquid 3
0-5,000 Gas 4
5,000-10,000 Liquid 5
5,000-10,000 Gas 5-6
10,000-15,000 Liquid 6
10,000-15,000 Gas 6 or more

Table 19.1- Flow Tube Requirements

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 434 of 465

Page 434 of 4658

The flow tubes are close fitting tubes around the wireline which they, in conjunction with the flow
tube sleeves, form the main length of the grease head. Some modern grease heads do not enclose
flow tubes in sleeves but use thick walled flow tubes without sleeves. The flow tubes are designed
to be thick enough to provide the strength necessary. This type of head reduces the amount of
seals, which are potential leak paths, and makes servicing much simpler and easier.
The flow tube sleeves are the main body of the head but require to be segmented to enable the
flow tubes to be installed and also cater for the various configurations listed above. Being the
main body they provide rigidity.
The flow tubes are made of a very hard metal as the wire predominantly bears on them,
preventing wear on the other parts. The flow tube coupling forms a junction for the flow tubes
and also as the point of entry for the grease.
The hydraulic packing nut is a simple but efficient pack-off device that is remotely operated from a
hydraulic hand-pump assembly. The rubber pack-off is energised by applying pressure into the
cylinder, acting on the piston. When it is energised against the wire, the pressure is maintained by
closing the valve at the hand pump assembly. The pressure may be relieved by bleeding off the
pressure at the pump allowing the spring to return the piston and relaxing the seal. The body has a
port into which a flow hose is attached to lead off any seepage that migrates through the line and
finds its way above the flow tubes.
The grease delivery to the Grease Head is from an air operated pump with a grease reservoir. The
type of grease used is often referred to as 'Honey Oil'. In order to deliver the grease in the co rrect
quantity, and at the correct pressure, the delivery ratio of the pump must be known. The delivery
ratio is affected by the air pressure delivered to the pump.
The differential air pressure regulator valve, controls the flow of grease to the control head
supplied from the grease supply system. In every case, the grease is delivered at a pressure of
350psi to 400psi greater than the wellhead pressure, with an absolute maximum of 2000psi.
In order to attain this level of delivery, the air input must be controlled to allow the pump to
operate efficiently by delivering the correct pressure ratio. i.e. A grease pump that operates on a
ration of 100:1 would deliver 100psi of grease pressure for 1 psi of air input. Therefore, if the Well
Pressure is 3000psi, then the grease must be delivered with a minimum of 3350psi and a absolute
maximum of 5000psi. The air input pressure must be between 33.5psi - 50psi.
Caution: Too much air pressure input will lock up the pump and create inefficient operation.
Never allow pure rig pressure to enter the pump as most rig pressures are 120psi - 140psi. This
will seriously exceed the maximum operating pressure of the pump and may blow seals in the
delivery system and render the pump inoperable. This in turn could create an escape of Well
Pressure from the Grease Head.
SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 435 of 465

Page 435 of 4658

Figure 19.2 - Grease Injection Head

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 436 of 465

Page 436 of 4658

19.2.3 Flow Tubes
A range of flow tubes, (refer to Figure 19.2), are available which have small increment ranges of
IDs so as to provide an effective seal with various wireline diameters. The wireline reduces in size
throughout its life through usage.
The OD of conventional braided line should be measured and the size of the tubes selected for
the closest fit. The ID of the flow tubes should be larger than the OD of the wireline as per the
guidelines in the Table below.

Nominal Line Size, Actual Line Size, Actual Tube Size,

ins ins ins
0.174-0.176 0.176-0.178
0.177-0.180 0.182-0.184
3
/16 0.181-0.183 0.185-0.187
0.184-0.186 0.188-0.190
0.188-0.190 0.192-0.194
0.192-0.193 0.195-0.197
0.194-0.196 0.198-0.200
0.195-0.198 0.200-0.202
0.199-0.201 0.203-0.205
0.201-0.205 0.207-0.209
7 0.206-0.208 0.210-0.212
/32
0.211-0.213 0.215-0.217
0.214-0.216 0.218-0.220
0.216-0.219 0.221-0.223
0.219-0.221 0.223-0.225
0.222-0.225 0.227-0.229
0.224-0.228 0.230-0.233

Table 19.2 - Recommended Flow Tube Sizes

NOTE: The stated size of Bowen flow tubes includes the clearance required and
therefore does need use of the table.

If using Dyform wire, then a 0.010” clearance should be used.

Each tube should be slipped in turn over the wire and physically checked to confirm that they do
not grip the wire as this can lead to an effect termed ‘bird caging’ of the outer strands when
running in the well.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 437 of 465

Page 437 of 4658

This effect is caused by drag on the outer strands gradually holding them back in relationship to
the inner strands so they become loose and spring out from the cable like a bird's cage until they
finally jam at the packing nut. If a packing nut is too tight, it can also cause this same effect.
Alternatively, if the tubes are too big, too much grease will be wasted and may not be able to
effect the barrier.

NOTE: When calculating the amount of stem required to provide weight to

overcome well pressure, an extra amount should be added to overcome the
friction.

Figure 19.3 - Flow Tube Schematic

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 438 of 465

Page 438 of 4658

19.3 GREASE INJECTION PUMP
The grease pump system is designed to deliver grease as demanded under continu ous operation
by a single pump unit.
In the event of a loss of pressure due to pump failure, it is advisable to have a back-up system
available or use a dual pump.
There are two circuits on the unit, one for the grease supply system and the other for the
pneumatics system. Both are described below:
19.3.1 Grease System
The system pump draws grease from the grease reservoir through the pump suction tube and
pumps it to the outlet port which is split into two lines.
The first line is the grease supply line plumbed to the grease head possibly via a rotary valve and
hose storage reels.
The second line delivers grease to the control panel vent valve which allows the operator to vent
grease pressure to a container. This grease should be clean and can be reused; however, care
should be taken to isolate grease from airborne contamination.
The grease return line from the grease head, (possibly via the hose reel, rotary valve, and system
pressure gauge), leads to a system pressure control vent valve which is used to vent the grease at
a controlled flow rate. This grease is dumped (now at atmospheric pressure) through a hose to a
waste grease container and should not be re-used as this grease is contaminated.
Excessive grease returns will indicate that incorrectly sized flow tubes are being used.

NOTE: If a 5/16” line is used, the supply pump must be fitted with at least a 3/4” ID
hose to ensure adequate supply to retain the seal.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 439 of 465

Page 439 of 4658

19.3.2 Pneumatics
The drive air from an outside source is connected to a pilot controlled pressure cont rol valve
which usually also acts as a stop/start control.
A separate air supply is connected to a three way, two position valve:
Position one blocks the supply and vents the reservoir to atmosphere.
Position two directs air to the reservoir via the reservoir lid pressure controller.

This allows the operator to select an auto pre-set reservoir pressure or vent to atmosphere with
one control valve.
Remember that the Grease delivery to the Grease Head is controlled by the Air Input Pressure!

WARNING:

HIGH PRESSURE
Never allow any part of the human body to come in front of or in direct contact with the grease
outlet. Accidental operation of the pump could cause an injection into the flesh. If injection
occurs, medical aid must be immediately obtained from a physician, as ANY PRESSURE
INJECTION is a MEDICAL EMERGENCY.
COMPONENT RUPTURE
This unit is capable of producing high fluid pressure as stated on the pump model plate. To avoid
component rupture and possible injury, do not exceed 75 cycles per minute or operate at an air
inlet pressure greater than 100psi. (10 bar).
SERVICING
Before servicing, cleaning or removing any component, always disconnect or shut off the power
source and carefully relieve all fluid pressure from the system.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 440 of 465

Page 440 of 4658

19.4 DUAL BOPs
For braided line operations, a dual BOP (refer to Figure 19.4) is required in order to create a seal
around the wire. The BOP is dressed for the line diameter being used and the lower rams are
inverted, i.e. installed upside down to hold pressure from above. A grease injection port is situated
between the rams in order to introduce the grease from the grease injection system.
Similar to the grease head, the only means the BOPs can seal is to create a grease seal (refer to
section 19.3.1).
In the event that the line breaks and is ejected from the well, a triple BOP may be employed with
the top rams dressed with blind inner seals is sometimes utilised which can be closed to shut the
well. This is because the BOPs dressed with braided line inner seals cannot seal themselves. The
alternative is to close a wire cutting Master valve, or Safety Head, cutting the cable.

Figure 19.4 - Dual BOP for Braided Line Operations

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 441 of 465

Page 441 of 4658

19.5 SAFETY CHECK UNION
This is a safety device that should be included in braided/stranded wireline lubricator rig-up
immediately below the grease injection head. The wire is threaded through both these units and
in the event that the wire breaks and is blown out of the grease injection head, well flow will
automatically be shut off by the safety check union.
Shut-off is accomplished by the velocity of the escaping well fluids causing a piston to lift a ball up
against a ball seat, (refer to Figure 19.5). Well pressure holds the ball against the seat.
This device in fact performs the same function as the internal wireline valve or BOP in the wireline
stuffing box. As with all lubricator equipment, the safety check union is furnished with quick union
connections.

Figure 19.5 - Safety Check Union

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 442 of 465

Page 442 of 4658

19.6 BRAIDED LINE ROPE SOCKET
Braided line rope sockets (refer to Figure 17.6) are quite different in design to that of the slickline
tear drop design desribed earlier in section 2.
The designs below are available for braided line of 3/16” up to 5/16” diameter. These illustrate two
types, the overload release type and the plain type.
Releasable versions of rope socket for both slickline and braided line are available from Petroline.

19.6.1 Overload Release Rope Socket

The overload release type is designed to cause the line to break under severe loading at a specific
percentage of the full strength of the line. A range of five breaking strength slips (refer to Figure
17.6) is available: 50%, 60%, 70% and 80% of line strength.
19.6.2 Plain Rope Socket
The plain type is designed without the overload release feature. Experience indicates that the line
will usually break near the top end of the clamps at approximately 90% of the breaking strength of
the line. It is recommended to pull test these rope sockets prior to running in the hole.
19.6.3 Releasable Rope Socket
The Petroline releasable rope socket (refer to Figure 19.7) is available for both slickline and
braided line. It incorporates a releasing mechanism which enables it to release from the toolstring
if it becomes stuck.
The releasing mechanism is operated by a drop bar similar to a flat-bottomed Go-Devil which
disengages a collet. The top of the rope socket and the drop bar are then recovered leaving a
standard fishing neck looking upwards for fishing purposes.
SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 443 of 465

Page 443 of 4658

Figure 19.6 - Braided Line Rope Sockets

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 444 of 465

Page 444 of 4658

Figure 19.7 - Petroline Releasable Rope Socket

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 445 of 465

Page 445 of 4658

19.7 Fishing Conductor Line/Braided Line With Broken Strand
A gradual or jerky/sudden increase in tension may be the first indicator of a broken strand
beginning to ‘birds nest’.
The winch operator should regularly ‘sight’ along the wire as a matter of routine. On a clean
cable, a missing strand can clearly be seen as a dark spiral.
As this is a potentially serious situation, stop immediately and investigate.
Close the BOP rams hydraulically. Close the manual spindles to check that the rams have
reached the end of their travel.
Bleed down the lubricator. Close the needle valve and monitor the pressure gauge to be
sure that there is no pressure build up.

NOTE: If a gas column exists and dual BOPs are included in the rig-up, it may be
necessary to inject grease between the rams to obtain a seal.

Once a seal has been achieved, back off the quick union, release the tension in the cable
and lay out some slack and slowly raise the lubricator.
If the ‘birds nest’ is not jammed in the lubricator, continue to raise it and/or pull down
on the cable to expose the ‘birds nest’. If the ‘birds nest’ is jammed in the lubricator,
continue to raise it slowly until about 1 ft. of cable is exposed, even though this
means stripping through the BOPs.
Place a cable clamp on the cable immediately above the BOPs and tie it down securely.
The lubricator can now be gently raised without fear of damaging the BOPs through
stripping.
Cut off the ‘birds nest’ until the individual strand(s) is/are left.
Attempt to lay the strand back into the interstice. If several strands have broken, stagger
their ends.
If the armour end will not remain flush, it may be necessary to insert a shim underneath
adjacent armour wires to hold it in place.
File down any protruding strands or shims to ease the cable's entry into the flow tubes.
Pick up the tension in the cable and remove the cable clamp. Stab the lubricator on the
BOPs and make up the quick union.
Close in the lubricator manifold and equalise across the BOPs.
Fully open the BOPs.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 446 of 465

Page 446 of 4658

Attempt to pull the wire through the grease tubes slowly.
If all broken strands pass through the flow tubes, continue to POOH, monitoring the
cable. If the strands will not pull through, repeat steps 2-14. The old shim must be
removed and a new one placed close to the BOPs. Note, that in this way, fresh cable
equal to the length of the lubricator is pulled up at each attempt. This may need to
be done several times until relatively undamaged cable is found.
If this is not successful, then the cable must be cut and knotted. In this case, replace the
wire clamp and cut the cable close to the shim. Remove one or more sections of
lubricator and thread the cut end through the flow tubes manually from bottom to
top.
The tool can be retrieved after the knot has been pulled back onto the drum.
If the toolstring cannot then be accommodated in the lubricator, then the cable must be clamped
using the appropriate wireline clamp and the BOPs closed around the cable. The cable can then
be cut (leaving enough cable length to facilitate extra lengths of lubricator to be rigged up) and the
lubricator bled off. The existing lubricator must now be rigged down and sufficient extra sections
installed. Back feed the cable through the grease head and re-install the lubricator assembly. Re-
knot the cable, equalise and open the BOPs and continue to POOH with toolstring
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 447 of 465

Page 447 of 4658

19.8 braided line fishing

During Braided Line Fishing Operations there are always the possibility of parts of the fish coming
free or backing of so it’s important to have prior knowledge of the toolstring (fish) sizes +
capabilities due to the greater pulls and impacts created. There is also the possibility of wire
damage or breakage. To prevent any further loss of toolstrings a weak point could be
incorporated into fishing string. I.e. Rope socket.

19.8.1 3/
16 Ins. Rope Socket
This design is available for braided line up to 5/16 ins. diameter. There are two types of slips, the
overload type and the plain type.
The overload release type is designed to cause the line to break under severe loading at a specific
percentage of the full strength of the line. A range of five breaking strength slips are available, for
50%, 60%, 70%, 80% and 90% of line strength.
The plain type is designed without the overload release feature. Experience indicates that the line
will usually break near the top end of these slips at approximately 90% of the breaking strength of
the line.
The rope socket incorporates a fishing neck at its top end. This allows a fishing tool to latch on to a
stuck or dropped tool string to fish it from the well.

NOTE: It is important to record the fishing neck size of each individual section of
tool string, as this data is required for the selection of fishing tools, should
fishing operations become necessary. Make sure that you choose the correct
percentage slips.

Even with no overpull or jarring the rope socket should be rebuilt after a predetermined number
of runs, and a length of wire cut and discarded. The aim of this is to change the section of wire
continuously run over the pulleys. If this is not done, and particularly if the operations are
repetitive and at the same depth, the wire will become embrittled at the pulleys, break at the
surface, and fall into the well.
With poor well conditions, or when overpull or jarring occurs, the rope socket must be rebuilt
more often, preferably every trip.
For each operation, a safe maximum pull is determined. This depends on a number of factors,
particularly the diameter, type and condition of the wire.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 448 of 465

Page 448 of 4658

NOTES
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 449 of 465

Page 449 of 4658

20 bailers

20.1 Hydrostatic Bailers

A hydrostatic bailer consists of a chamber sealed at atmospheric pressure. When the bailer
reaches the top of the sand and is jarred down, a shear disc is ruptured and the bottom hole
pressure surges into the chamber, sucking up the sand. A ball check valve in the bottom serves to
trap the sand in the chamber. These bailers are used to clean off sand or foreign materials from
around a fishing neck and are very successful but are not recommended for normal bailing
operations. In soft sand, this bailer will bury itself each time it operates and usually requires a hard
object against which to shear the disc.
Always use a pump bailer to remove the bulk of sand or debris until it is resting on the tool to be
removed. Only then should a hydrostatic bailer be used to clean around the fishing neck.
Hydrostatic bailers are not recommended for normal bailing operations because they are too slow
and there is the possibility of sticking in sand due to the suction action when the sealed chamber is
opened.

DANGER: SAND PUMPS AND HYDROSTATIC BAILERS CAN BE EXTREMELY DANGEROUS,

AFTER PULLING THEM TO THE SURFACE, WHEN UNLOADING THE SAND DUE TO
PRESSURE TRAPPED INSIDE THE CHAMBER. CAUTION SHOULD BE TAKEN WHEN
REMOVING THE CHECK VALVE ON THE BOTTOM TO MAKE SURE THERE IS NO
PRESSURE INSIDE. THIS CAN BE DETERMINED USUALLY BY HOW HARD THE
BOTTOM IS TO UNSCREW. YOU SHOULD NEVER COMPLETELY REMOVE THE
BOTTOM WHILE THE BAILER IS PRESSURED UP.

DO NOT HAMMER ON A BAILER TO REMOVE THE SAND AS THE BARREL MAY BE

DAMAGED AND COULD SUBSEQUENTLY RUPTURE WITH THE BOTTOM HOLE
PRESSURE TRAPPED WITHIN IT. VISUALLY INSPECT THESE BAILERS FOR WEAR
AND WALL REDUCTION BEFORE RUNNING.

HYDROSTATIC BAILERS HAVE PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES AND SOME HAVE AN

AUTOMATIC PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE. THESE CAN BECOME PLUGGED AND BE
DANGEROUS TO HANDLE SO OBSERVE THE ABOVE CAUTION WHEN
UNSCREWING THE BOTTOM.

PRIOR TO RUNNING, CHECK THAT THE EXPECTED BOTTOM HOLE PRESSURE

DOES NOT EXCEED THE PRESSURE RATING OF THE BAILER.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 450 of 465

Page 450 of 4658

20.2 SAND BAILING

20.2.1 Introduction
Occasionally wireline service involves sand bailing prior to the actual pulling or setting of
subsurface flow controls. Techniques vary, but the operation of sand pumps are very much similar.
After a few trips, the operator will know how to get the bailer full each trip; how long he must
stroke the pump, whether it is necessary to drive down on the bailer, (although this seldom helps),
or how fast he must work the plunger.
Short bridges of sand in the tubing will require some extra precautions due to the possibility of
pressure being trapped under such a bridge. The operator should never stroke the pump and stop
at the top of the stroke. He should keep the tools moving up the tubing until he is sure there is no
overpull, and then set the pump back down to make another stroke.
When the bailer falls through a bridge, the tools should be pulled back up several feet abo ve the
point where the bridge was first encountered to make sure the bridge is completely clear before
going deeper.
Sand is prone to become packed tight on the top when pressure has been applied to the tubing
above, which is very often done to keep the pressure equalised above and below the sand bridge.
This makes it difficult to pick up the sand with the pump and, in this case, it might be necessary to
run a centre spear, to drive down into the hard sand and loosen it when pulling back out. A round
tool with teeth cut around the bottom edge (e.g. serrated gauge cutter), will sometimes loosen it
enough for the pump to pick it up, or the bailer bottom itself can be serrated. There are two basic
designs of sand bailer; pump bailers and hydrostatic bailers. There are also drive down bailers,
which as the name suggests, are designed to be driven into the fill and when picked up, a ball or
flapper moves on a seat and holds debris etc. in the bailer.

20.2.2 Sand Bailers

The pump bailer is used to remove the bulk of the sand from above wireline tools or equipment. It
is a hollow tube with a check valve, either a ball or flapper, at its lower end which is usually
‘muleshod’ (cut at 45o). It contains a piston and valve attached to a rod which passes through a
loose hole at the upper end of the tube for fluid bypass. This rod is attached to the tool string. As
the bottom of the bailer sits on the sand, the weight of the tool string pushes the piston to the
bottom of the tube. As this piston is picked up, it sucks sand and debris into the bottom of the
bailer. This slow stroking process continues until the bailer is full.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 451 of 465

Page 451 of 4658

Figure 20.1 - Pump Bailer and Hydrostatic Bailer

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 452 of 465

Page 452 of 4658

20.2.3 Otis Drive Down Bailer
The Otis Drive Down Bailer, See Figure 20.2, consists only of a fishing neck, cylinder, ball check,
and bottom sub. The lower end of this bailer has a sharp muleshoe type profile which enables it
to penetrate sand or debris when downhole jarring is performed.
The sand bailer is lowered into the tubing to the proper depth and driven into the sand or debris.
The downward motion of the bailer will move the ball off-seat and sand should enter the cylinder.
The sand is retained within the cylinder above the ball check.

Figure 20.2 - Drive Down Bailer

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 453 of 465

Page 453 of 4658

NOTES PAGE
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 454 of 465

Page 454 of 4658

21 HYDRATE FORMATION & PREVENTION

21.1 Formation of Hydrates

Hydrates will only form if there is free water present in a system.
Hydrates are crystalline water structures filled with small molecules. In oil / gas systems they will
occur when light hydrocarbons (or carbon dioxide) are mixed with water at the correct
temperature and pressure conditions.
A very open, cage-like structure of water molecules is the backbone of hydrates. This structure,
which bears some resemblance to a steel lattice in a building, can theoretically be formed in ice,
liquid water, and water vapour. In practice however, hydrates are only formed in the presence of
liquid water. The crystal framework is very weak and collapses soon if not supported by molecules
filling the cavities in the structures.
Methane, Ethane, CO2 and H2S are the most suitable molecules to fill cavities. Propane and
Isobutane can only fill the larger cavities. Normal butane and heavier Hydrocarbons are too big
and tend to inhibit hydrate formation.
Tests indicate that Hydrate formation is comparable with normal crystallisation. ‘Undercooling’ is
possible, but the slightest movement within an undercooled mixture, or the presence of a few
crystallisation nuclei will cause a massive reaction. Once the crystallisation has started, hydrates
may block a flowline completely within seconds.
The crude composition, water composition, temperature and pressure govern the formation of
hydrates. In most cases the crude composition cannot be changed. Hydrates can be dissolved /
prevented by a temperature increase or a pressure decrease. Changing the composition of the
water may prevent hydrate formation.
Under the correct conditions of temperature and pressure, hydrates will form spontaneously.
At high pressures, hydrates may form at relatively high temperatures; e.g. at 2,900psi they can
begin to form at about 77°F.
Hydrates do not require a pressure drop to form. However, the refrigeration effect from a small
pressure drop, such as a stuffing box leak, may be sufficient to produce optimum pressure and
temperature conditions for hydrate formation.
Hydrates can form under flowing or static conditions. The first indication of them forming in the
tubing or annular flow string is a drop in flowing wellhead pressure followed by an initially slow
then progressively rapid drop in wellhead flowing temperature.
During well operations, the greatest danger posed by hydrates is the plugging of the tubing string
downhole. The biggest risk area for this occurring is on offshore installations from the seabed
upwards where temperatures are generally the lowest.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 455 of 465

Page 455 of 4658

A hydrate plug in the tubing string under flowing or static conditions results in; being unable to run
or pull wireline tools, unable to squeeze or circulate the well dead, and unable to flow the well to
remove the hydrates. Hydrates may prevent vital equipment, such as the Downhole Safety Valve
from functioning correctly. Thus a downhole hydrate plug gives rise to a potentially dangerous
situation and must be avoided at all costs.
A hydrate is hazardous when it forms in surface pressure control equipment preventing operation
of valves, etc or plugging lubricators or risers. The latter may fool an operator into believing that
the pressure has been bled off when pressure may be trapped behind the plug.

21.2 Hydrate Prediction

Hydrate pressure / temperature formation conditions can be predicted for natural gas (refer to
Figure 21.1). Hydrate prevention is normally accomplished by the injection of methanol or glycol
downhole or at the Xmas Tree. The quantity of glycol or methanol required to suppress hydrates
depends on pressure, temperature, water cut and flowrate.
For the prevention of hydrates caused by the introduction of water whilst pressure testing for
wireline entry, 60% glycol will have to be added to the water for use as a hydrate suppresser (refer
Table 21.1, on freezing points of water/glycol mixes).

Water / Glycol Freezing Point SG

(% v/v) (°C)

100/0 -7 1.115
90/10 -28 1.109
80/20 -43 1.101
70/30 -60 1.091
60/40 -60 1.079
50/50 -44 1.068
Table 21.1 - Freezing Points Of Mono-Ethylene Glycol/Water Mixes

After the glycol/water has been thoroughly mixed, no separation of the solution will occur. The
glycol/water solution can therefore be left in the pump unit for the duration of the programme
without the solution deteriorating. Mono-ethylene glycol may be mixed with fresh water or sea
water without any adverse effect, although sea water is preferred as in itself it is less likely to
cause a hydrate than fresh water.

NOTE: Incorrect mixes will significantly reduce the level of protection.

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 456 of 465

Page 456 of 4658

Although methanol is a more effective hydrate inhibitor than Glycol, it is not, however, a first
choice for injection at the wireline lubricator or flowhead during well operations, as it dissolves
sealing greases and may cause loss of seal in a grease head. Also injecting glycol without any for m
of atomisation may result in the glycol adhering to the wall of the tubing/lubricator, and will not
effectively absorb free water being lifted through gas by the wireline.

Figure 21.1- Temperatures At Which Gas Hydrates Will Freeze

 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 457 of 465

Page 457 of 4658

21.3 Hydrate Prevention
Present techniques for prevention of hydrates are mainly geared to a live well with a gas cap in the
tubing. This allows methanol introduced at the Xmas Tree to gravitate down to the hydrate level,
and therefore act directly on top of a hydrate, should it occur.
Consideration must be given to a perforated well which has not yet been “cleaned up” as gas will
migrate throughout the tubing during the completion of perforation activities.
To minimise the risk of hydrate formation in the well bore and surface equipment, the following
action points must be taken:
The fluids used for well operations should be incapable of supporting a hydrate. For
example, water free base oil, diesel or water glycol mixes may be selected.
Prior to opening a well flow, methanol injection must be started at maximum rate and
continued until the flowline temperature is high enough to prevent hydrate
formation at that FTHP.
Use only a 60/40 mono-ethylene/sea water mix when pressure testing
Inject glycol at the grease injection head during wireline operations.

Continually inject methanol at the Xmas Tree during all well operations.

Curing Hydrates
The main guidance for removal of a hydrate plug is to reduce the pressure or increase the
temperature, or use methanol, or any combination of these.

WARNING: IT IS HAZARDOUS TO BLEED DOWN PRESSURE ON ONLY ONE SIDE OF A

HYDRATE PLUG IN ANY PIPEWORK.

NOTE: The risk is that if pressure is bled down from one side of a hydrate it will
begin to dissolve. As it dissolves, differential pressure can act upon one side
of the plug and may cause it to be dislodged at considerable velocity.
Bleeding down can be effective in dissolving a hydrate, but it is not
recommended as a routine practice. However, once a full column of fluid
(preferably methanol) has been established above the hydrate plug then
bleeding down the pressure above to destroy the hydrate can be
considered. The full column of liquid will act as a cushion and prevent the
dissolved plug achieving high velocities caused by the differential pressure
across it.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 458 of 465

Page 458 of 4658

Curing a hydrate problem in particular sections of the system has been accomplished by the
following measures:-
Plug in at the surface Close in the well and depressurise the line, or apply
steam or hot water externally.
Hydrate at the stuffing Close BOP’s and bleed down the lubricator
box during wireline
operations
Hydrate in the tubing Continue injecting methanol at maximum rate taking
note of the THP at all times as this could begin to rise
with the fluid injection.

If during injection of methanol no increase in THP is observed (this will indicate that the tubing is
not completely blocked), begin to bleed down the tubing taking careful note of the volume and
type of returns.
If during injection of methanol an increase in THP is observed (this will indicate that the tubing is
blocked, then bleed down the THP to the point below the bubble point so as to create a gas cap
above the hydrate. Methanol injected will then stand a better chance of reaching the hydrate.
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 459 of 465

Page 459 of 4658

NOTES
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 460 of 465

Page 460 of 4658

NOTES
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 461 of 465

Page 461 of 4658

22 FORMULAE AND CONVERSION FACTORS COMMONLY USED

Pressure Gradient psi/ft Mud/Brine Weight ppg x 0.052

Mud/Brine Weight ppg Pressure Gradient psi/ft ÷ 0.052
Hydrostatic Pressure psi Mud/Brine Weight ppg x 0.052 x
True Vertical Depth ft
Formation Pressure psi Hydrostatic Pressure (in string &
sump) psi + Shut In Tubing Head
Pressure psi
Equivalent Mud Weight Pressure psi ÷ True vertical Depth ft
ppg ÷ 0.052
Pump Output bbls/min Pump Output bbls/stk x Pump
Speed spm
Annulus Velocity ft/min Pump Output bbls/min ÷ Annulus
Volume bbls/ft
Boyle’s Law P1 V1  P2 V2
P1 V1
P2 
V2
V1 P1
V2 
P2
Conversion of pipe D2
diameter to bbls/ft  bbls / ft
1,029.42

Conversion of annular D2  d 2
bbls / ft
area to bbls/ft 1.029.42
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 462 of 465

Page 462 of 4658

22.1 CONVERSION FACTORS

Atmosphere = 33.94 feet of water
= 29.92 inches of mercury
= 760 millimetres of mercury
= 14.70 pounds per square inch
Bar = 14.504 pounds per square inch
= 100 Kilo Pascal’s
Barrel = 5.6146 cubic feet
= 42 gallons (US)
= 35 gallons (Imperial)
Barrel of water @ 60oF = 0.1588 metric ton
Barrel (36° API) = 0.1342 metric ton
Barrel per hour = 0.0936 cubic feet per minute
= 0.700 gallon per minute
= 2.695 cubic inches per second
Barrel per day (bpd) = 0.2917 gallon per minute
British Thermal Unit = 0.2520 kilogram calorie
= 0.2928 watt hour
BTU per minute = 0.02356 horse power
Centimetre = 0.3937 inch
Centimetre of mercury = 0.1934 pound per square inch
Cubic centimetre = 0.06102 cubic inch
Cubic foot = 0.1781 barrel
= 7.4805 gallons (US)
= 0.02832 cubic metre
= 0.9091 sacks cement (set)
Cubic foot per minute = 10.686 barrels per hour
= 28.800 cubic inches per second
= 7.481 gallons per minute
Cubic inch = 16.387 cubic centimetres
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 463 of 465

Page 463 of 4658

Cubic metre = 6.2897 barrels (US)
= 35.314 cubic feet
= 264.20 gallon (US)
Cubic yard = 4.8089 barrels
= 46,656 cubic inches
= 0.7646 cubic metre
Feet = 30.48 centimetres
= 0.3048 meters
Feet of water @ 60oF = 0.4331 pound per square inch
Feet per second = 0.68182 mile per hour
Foot pound = 0.001286 British Thermal Unit
Foot pound per second = 0.001818 horse power
Gallon (US) = 0.2318 barrel
= 0.1337 cubic feet
= 231.00 cubic inches
= 3.785 litres
= 0.003785 cubic metres
Gallon (Imperial) = 1.2009 gallons (US)
= 277.274 cubic inches
Gallon per minute = 1.429 barrels per hour
= 34.286 barrels per day
Gram = 0.03527 ounce
Horsepower = 42.44 BTUs per minute
= 33,000 feet/pounds per minute
= 550 feet/pounds per second
= 1.014 horsepower (metric)
= 0.7457 kilowatt
Horsepower hour = 2,547 British Thermal Units
Inch = 2.540 centimetres
Inch of mercury = 1.134 feet of water
= 0.4912 pound per square inch
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 464 of 465

Page 464 of 4658

Inch of water @ 60°F = 0.0361 pound per square inch
Kilogram = 2.2046 pounds
Kilogram calorie = 3.968 British Thermal Units
Kilogram per square centimetre = 14.223 pounds per square inch
= Kg/cm2 x 98.1 gives Pascals (KPa)
Kilometre = 3,281 feet
= 0.6214 mile
Kilo Pascal = 0.145 pounds per square inch
Kilowatt = 1.341 horse power
Litre = 0.2462 gallon
= 1.0567 quarts
Mega Pascal = 145.03 pound per square inch
Metre = 3.281 feet
= 39.37 inches
Part per million = 0.05835 grain per gallon
= 8.345 pounds per million gallons
Pascal = 0.000145 pound per square inch
Pound = 7,000 grains
= 0.4536 kilogram
Pound per square inch = 2.309 feet of water @ 60°F
= 2.0353 inches of mercury
= 51.697 millimetres of mercury
= 0.703 kilograms per square centimetre
= 0.0689 bar
= 0.006895 mega Pascal (MPa)
= 6.895 kilo Pascal (KPa)
= 6895 Pascal (Pa)
Pressure =psi x 6.895 gives Kilo Pascals (KPa)
Sack cement (Set) = 1.1 cubic feet
Square centimetre = 0.1550 square inch
Square foot = 0.929 square metre
 SLICKLINE INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED

Rev: 003 Date: 01/11/2009

Page 465 of 465

Page 465 of 4658

Square inch = 6.452 square centimetres
Square kilometre = 0.3861 square mile
Square metre = 10.76 square feet
Square mile = 2.590 square kilometres
Temp Centigrade = 5/9 (Temp °F - 32)
Temp Fahrenheit = 9/5 (Temp °C) + 32
Temp Absolute (Kelvin) = Temp °C + 273
Temp Absolute (Rankine) = Temp °F + 460
Ton (long) = 2,240 pounds
Ton (metric) = 2,205 pounds
Ton (short or net) = 2,000 pounds
Ton (metric) = 1.102 tons (short or net)
Ton (metric) = 1,000 kilograms
= 6.297 barrels of water @ 60°F
= 7.454 barrels (36° API)
Ton (short or net) = 0.907 ton (metric)
Watt per hour = 3.415 BTUs
Yard = 0.9144 metre